TS Nit N0 578

GN101-03-SP-06-02
Index
General Specification .................................................................................................3

1.0.0 Codes & standards ............................................................................................3
2.0.0 Design Guidelines & Parameters for Cable laying.............................................3
3.0.0 General Guidelines for Laying Cables...............................................................7
4.0.0 Testing ..........................................................................................................................14
5.0.0 Progress Reporting .........................................................................................15
6.0.0 Drawing, Data & manuals.............................................................................................15
7.0.0 Deviations........................................................................................................16
Annexure # 1 – DEVIATION REPORT FORMAT......................................................16

Annexure # 2 – DC HIGH VOLTAGE TEST .............................................................16
Annexure # 3 – CABLE TRENCH DETAILS .............................................................17
Annexure # 4 – STANDARD ROAD PROFILE .........................................................18
Annexure # 5 – ROAD RESTORATION SECTIONAL DRAWINGS..........................20
Annexure # 6 – DRAWINGS (CABLE TRENCH AND RCC CABLE COVER)..........23
Annexure # 7 – BARRICADING AND SAFETY…………………….………………….38
Annexure # 8 – ROUTE MARKER AND BARRICADING DRAWING……………….38
Page 2 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
General Specification
1.0 Codes & standards
Materials, equipment and methods used in the Laying of 11/33/66KV Cable shall conform to the
latest edition of following –

S. Reference No. Name of Standard

No.
1 Indian Electricity Rules, 1956
2 Indian Electricity Act, 1910
3 Indian Electricity Supply Act, 1948
4 Electricity Laws Act, 1991
5 National Electrical Code ( Indian standards Institution)
6 IS 1255 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of Power Cable upto
and Including 33KV rating.
7 IS 1554 PVC Insulated Electrical Cables upto 11KV
8 IS 2274 Code of Practice for electrical wiring installation – system voltage
exceeding 650V
9 IS 7098 Part II Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated PVC sheathed cables for working
voltages from 3.3KV upto and including 33KV
10 IS 7098 Part III Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated PVC sheathed cables for working
voltages from 66KV upto and including 220KV
11 IS 5820 Specification of precast concrete Cable cover.

2.0 Design guidelines and Parameter for cable laying‐
S. Parameter Details

No.
2.1 Selection of The cable route selection shall be done by the concerned supervising
Cable Route engineer by first conducting route survey and selecting a route along
with contractor keeping followings in mind:
‐The side of road which presents the least obstacles and the fewest
roadways crossings.
‐The future consumers and existing cables in the route may influence the
cable route.
‐Railway, road crossings, MCD and other government agencies may also
influence in selection of cable route.
‐Plans for future building projects should be considered.
‐The route shall be as far as possible away from parallel running gas,
water pipes and telephone/telecommunication cables.
2.2 Site Preparation a) Barricading:
• The identified cable route shall be barricaded continually
before excavation.
• Barricading shall be as drawing laid
• Open Trench method shall be adopted as far as possible for
trench preparation.
b) Excavated Earth:
Page 3 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
• The excavated earth shall be so stored at site, that it shall
not cause trouble to running traffic
• All excavated earth shall be stored within the barricaded
area.
•
c) Full height fence, barriers, barricades etc. shall be erected
around the site in order to prevent the working area from the
risk of accidents due to speedy vehicular movement. Same the
way barricades protect the road users from the danger due to
construction equipment and temporary structures.
d) The structure dimensions of the barricades , material and
composition, its colour scheme, BSES logo and details shall be in
accordance with specification and drawing laid down in the
tender documents.
e) All the barricades shall be erected as per the design
requirements of employer, numbered painted and maintained in
good condition and also barricade in charge maintain a barricade
register at site.
f) All barricades shall be conspicuously seen in the dark/night time
by the road users so that no vehicle hits the barricades.
Conspicuity shall be ensured by affixing retro reflective strips of
required size and shape at appropriate angle at bottom and
middle portion of the barricades at a minimum gap of 1000 mm.
In addition minimum one red light /red blinker and red beacon
light should be placed at the top of each barricade.
g) PPP to be provided by vendor to all workers and engineers.
h) Also refer Annexure‐ 7: Barricading and Safety

2.3 Clearance The desired minimum clearances are as follows –
‐ Power cable to power cable – A minimum clearance equal to diameter
shall be maintained. Trench drawings shall be referred to for guidance.
‐ Power Cable to control cables – 0.2 M
‐ Power cable to communication cable – 0.3M
‐ Power cable to gas/water main – 0.3 M
2.4 Depth of Cable The desired minimum depth of laying from ground surface to the top of
Laying cable shall be:
650 / 1100V grade XLPE Cables – 75 cm
6.35 / 11KV grade XLPE Cables – 90 cm
Low voltage and Control cable ‐ 75 cm
19 / 33KV grade XLPE Cables ‐ 1.2 M
38 / 66KV grade XLPE Cables ‐ 1.5 M
Cables at Road crossing ‐ 1.0 M (min.)
Cables at railways level crossings (measured from bottom of sleepers to
the top of Pipe) ‐ 1.0 M (min.)
Whenever there is any obstacle at the laying depth, the cable should be
lowered/ raised to cross the obstacle. However variation in the depth is
to be approved by BSES. The Contractor shall provide the same in
deviation report.
2.5 Width of Cable The width and depth of Cable Trenches shall depend upon number of
Page 4 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
trenches circuits and Voltage Grade. Annexure # 3 and drawings of this
specification shall be followed.
2.6 Bending Radius While pulling of the Cable from the drum or during laying
of Cables following minimum bending radius shall be maintained so that
the cable, in particular the insulation does not get damaged –
A) Single Core Cables ( PVC & XLPE)
Upto 1.1KV grade – 15 X D
Above 11KV grade ‐ 20 X D
B) Multi Core Cables ( PVC & XLPE)
Upto 1.1KV grade ‐ 12 X D
Above 1.1KV grade – 15 X D
Where ‘D’ is overall diameter of the cable.
2.7 Maximum For cables pulled with Stocking
permissible PVC and XLPE SWA Armoured cables P = 30 X D
Tensile PVC and XLPE AWA Armoured cables P = 20 X D
Strength for Where P= pulling force in Kgrm, D= Diameter of Cable in mm
Cables
For Cables pulled by Cable eyes
Aluminium conductor – 30 N/mm2 = 3 Kg/sq. mm
Copper conductors ‐ 50N/mm2 = 5 Kg/sq. mm

Permissible force is calculated by multiplying the above values by cross
sectional area (CSA) of conductor of each core and then number of cores.
2.8 Methods of a) Cables shall be laid in direct in ground, in trenches excavated
Laying therein and shall be protected with covers as given in the
drawing. Cables shall also be drawn into pipes of ducts or laid in
the formed trenches or troughs or on racks or supported in trays
or cleats as required by the site exigencies. Where the cables are
laid in the formed trenches, the installation shall include removal
and replacement of the trench covers and the provision of
temporary protective covers on the trenches where they cross
the access ways.

b) HDPE ( 200 mm) or RCC ducts shall be used where cable cross
roads and railways tracks. Spare ducts for future extensions
should be provided. Spare duct should be sealed off. Buried
ducts or ducting blocks shall project into footpath or upto the
edge of road, where there is no footpath, to permit smooth entry
of cable without undue bending. The diameter of the cable
conduit or pipe or duct should be at least 1.5 times the outer
diameter of the cable. Angular alignment of the duct across road
crossings shall be predetermined to maintain safe bending radius
when direction of cable trench changes before or after the road.

c) The contractor shall lay cable by Horizontal direct drilling (HDD)
in main roads and highway with heavy traffic, passage to public
property where excavation is not possible. Contractor shall take
approval for laying of cable by means of HDD wherever required
from the supervising engineer. The cable laid by HDD shall be
Page 5 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
minimized so that it doesn’t exceed by 12% of total route length.
This is to avoid De‐rating of Cables.

d) Unless approved by BSES, the contractor shall lay the cables,
direct in ground, in single layer. The cables shall be laid with the
pre‐determined and approved cable route.

e) Spacing shall be maintained uniformly between the cables all
along the length including the bends, as approved by BSES. To
maintain the spacing, suitable non‐metallic formers shall be
placed uniformly with spacing not exceeding 5 meters. Every
bend shall have at least one spacer.

f) 75 mm of the sand bed shall be placed at the bottom of cable
trench.

g) After the cables have been laid the trench shall be filled with the
sand and shall be well rammed to a level not less than 75 mm
above the top of the cables all throughout the route.

h) To protect the cables against external mechanical damage, which
may be caused by other agencies, the cable shall be protected by
suitable cover. (for drawing of RCC cable cover refer annexure
VI).

i) The type of the covers shall be as under
‐ 1.1KV Cables – Single layer of brick thickness not less than
75 mm ( 3 inch)
‐ 11KV Cables – sand stone of thickness not less than 75mm (
3 inch).
‐ 33KV Cables shall be protected by reinforced concrete cover of
width 300 mm as per attached drawing with thickness not less
than 50mm.
‐ 66KV Cables shall be protected by reinforced concrete cover as
per attached drawing with thickness not less than 50mm.

The RCC cable cover shall be embossed as “BSES EHV
CABLE”.

j) Back fill to be filled up to 75mm and the warning tape shall be
installed continuously. The tape shall be yellow in colour with
Black / Red lettering of minimum 20mm height. The approved
warning message shall be written in English and Hindi/ local
language. The minimum thickness and width of the tape should
be 300 microns and 150 mm respectively.

k) The trench shall be filled‐up by loose soft soil (300mm) and
Excavated soil as indicated in drawings.
2.9 Cable over On Bridges the cables are generally supported on wooden cleats and
Page 6 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
Bridges clamped on steel supports at regular intervals. The cables laid on bridges
shall be provided with Sun shield.
Approval from appropriate authorities (PWD/railways) as applicable shall
be taken by contractor.
2.10 Laying of Single a) The single core cables shall be laid in trefoil formation. Single
Core Cables core cables can be laid individually in 200mm HDPE pipe in case
of HDD only.

b) For single core cables laid in trefoil formation, plastic cable ties
shall be used at interval of 1.0 (one) meter throughout the cable
length to maintain the trefoil arrangement.

c) To balance the inductance, the phase sequence in trefoil format
shall be maintained by vendor ( for double circuit)

d) To prevent magnetic losses (eddy current and hysteresis losses),
the base plate of the panels or the terminal box of the
equipments, shall have aluminium plate. In case the entry into
the building is through GI pipe, a “slit” in the GI pipe shall be
necessary. Alternatively GI pipes may altogether be avoided and
non‐metallic pipes such as PVC or HDPE pipe shall be used.
Concrete pipes having steel reinforcement (RCC pipe) are not to
be used.
2.11 Earthing of a) Single point bonded earthing shall be employed to prevent flow
Single Core of induced circulating current in the armour and screen and
Cables consequential de‐rating of cables for feeder less than 2.0 KM.

b) For feeder length more than 2 KM, mid point earthing shall be
provided.
2.12 Violation of On violation of barricading guideline and safety norms, a fine of Rs.5000
barricading /day shall be imposed.
guideline and BRPL inspector/engineer in‐charge shall be empowered to impose the
safety norms above penalty.

3.0 General guidelines for Laying Cables

No.
3.1 General a) Laying of the cables and handling of the same shall be
undertaken, at all times, by adequate staff suitably trained and
supplied with all the necessary plant, equipment and tools.
b) The contractor shall be responsible for all the route survey,
establishment of the position of the joints as per the site
exigencies and the drum lengths of cables to be laid. While
carrying out the route survey the contractor shall take into
account the obstacles on the route whether above or below
ground. The cable shall be planned to be laid in an orderly
formation, free from unnecessary bends and crossings
c) The contractor shall submit a drawing for the complete scheme
Page 7 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
showing the entire route, road crossings, location of joints and
also the arrangement of cables to be laid. In case due to site
exigencies, cables have to cross over within the trench, the same
shall be shown in the drawing. For each and every job, these
drawings shall be approved by BSES, prior to commencement of
work.
d) BSES shall arrange for all the material and manpower required
for jointing and end termination. The Contractor shall provide
pit, carry out excavation for creation of working space required
for jointing by the jointer. All civil works, structural work,
clamping and earthing shall be carried out by the contractor, so
that the cables and accessories perform satisfactorily during the
entire life time.
e) The entry and exit of the cables into the building shall be through
RCC or GI pipe except for single core cables, which shall be
properly sealed and shall be duly supported as per the method
and technique approved by BSES, so that the outer sheath of the
cable does not get damaged at the entry and exit points. The
sealing should be of adequate length so that it minimizes the risk
of spreading of fire or ingress of water.
3.2 Handling and a) The cable drums shall be transported upright, so that the weight
Storage of is distributed on both the flanges. Under no circumstances the
Cable drums (All cable drum may be laid on its side. During transportation the
empty drums are drums must be properly secured. The cable drums should never
returnable) be dropped from Lorry or a trailer, so as to prevent damage to
the cable drum and also to the cable. Ramp may be used for
unloading. The drums may be rolled over short distance,
provided the correct direction of rolling as provided on the drum
is observed. Alternatively, a mobile crane should be used for
lifting and lowering the drum. A chain‐pulley arrangement may
also be used to lift the drums and deposit the same on ground if
required.
b) In case the drums are to be stored prior to cable laying, they
should be arranged in such a way to leave some space between
them for air circulation. It is desirable that the drums stand on
battens placed directly under the flanges. Overhead covering is
not essential except in heavy rainfall areas or during monsoon.
Cable should however be protected from direct rays of sun by
leaving the battens on or by providing some form of sunshade. In
no case the drums shall be stored in a flat position with flanges
horizontal.
c) For transportation of the cable drums from storage site to work
site, the drum should be mounted on a trailer or an open lorry
and unloaded by mobile cranes.
d) After cable laying, empty cable drums shall be taken return back
by vendor from site at their own risk and cost. Cost of empty
drums shall be deducted from vendor account during final
settlement.
3.3 Cable Laying a) The ground over which the drum is positioned at site should be
Page 8 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
properly consolidated and jacks placed on both sizes of the drum
to make the pay‐off arrangement stable. Suitable arrangement
be made to stop the drum rotation, during cable laying
preferably by square wooden poles kept temporarily pivoted
over cable roller under the flanges which when required can be
applied on the flange as a brake by personnel manning the drum.
b) The cable should always be paved off from the top of the drum.
The drum must be positioned in such a way that the arrow on
the drum points opposite to the direction of rotation marked on
the drum.
c) It must be ensured that the cable is not dragged over sharp
object or on the road surface, so as to avoid damage to the outer
sheath of the cable.
d) The pulling method to be used shall be approved by BSES. Cable
supplier’s recommended maximum pulling tension shall not be
exceeded.
e) Rollers shall be placed at intervals and the cable shall be pulled
over the rollers. The rollers shall be kept lubricated so that they
rotate freely, minimize friction to the cable in motion. Rollers
shall be positioned at the bends to minimize side wall friction.
The contractor shall ensure that PVC/HDPE sheath of cable is
free from damage due to abrasion.
f) The cable should not be pulled out from the drum by lifting of
the coil while the drum is lying flat on the flange. This leads to
twisting of the armour and cores resulting in permanent damage
to the cable.
g) To avoid ingress of moisture, it must be observed that the end
capping of the cables is not damaged. Cut pieces of the cables
must be capped immediately, before laying of the same is taken‐
up.
3.4 Excavation of a) The excavation of the trenches shall be commenced, with proper
the Trenches co‐ordination with BSES, so that all the necessary clearances for
the route are already obtained from the competent authorities,
well in time.
b) Before opening of the section of the trench, the contractor shall
satisfy himself that the line of the trench is clear of underground
obstructions, by taking out trial pits on the line of the trench.
c) The exact location of each trench shall be approved on site by
BSES. The trenches shall be kept as straight as possible and each
trench shall be excavated to approved formation and
dimensions. If necessary, the trenches shall be adequate shored
by wooden planks and bracing to avoid trench cave‐ins which
would cause injury to the persons and also damage the cables
laid.
d) The bottom of each trench shall be firm and of smooth contour.
The contractor shall take reasonable precautions to prevent
damage to the highway or ground surface from a slip or breaking
away of the sides of the trench.
e) The trench excavation and filling in shall be so executed that all
Page 9 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
walls, roads, sewers, drains, pipes, cables, structures, places and
things shall be reasonably secured against risk of subsidence or
injury and shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the
authorities concerned. Should, however, a damage to an existing
or other services be made, the Contractor will arrange and pay
for any necessary repair, to make good the damages.
f) Where trenches pass from a footway to a roadway or at other
positions where a change of level is necessary, the bottom of the
trench shall rise or fall gradually. The rate of rise or fall shall be
approved by BSES.
g) Contractor shall ensure that during excavation and until
restoration has been completed, for reasonable access of
persons and vehicles to property or places adjacent to the route.
h) When the excavation of the trenches has been accurately
executed, the contractor shall inform BSES for approval. Laying
of cables or building of structure shall not be started until the
contractor has been advised by BSES to proceed with the work.
3.5 Excavated a) The materials excavated from each trench shall be placed so as
material to prevent nuisance or damage to adjacent ditches, drains
fences, gateways and other property or things. Excavated
material shall be stacked so as to avoid undue interference with
traffic.
b) Where, owing to traffic or for reasons of safety or other
considerations, this is not permissible, the excavated material
shall be removed from the site and returned for refilling the
trench on completion of laying; surplus material shall be
disposed off by the contractor at his own cost.
3.6 Pipes and a) Care shall be taken to make the bend of the pipes or duct lines as
Ducts easy as practicable and in no case of radius less than 3 meters.
Where approved, split pipes may be used on bends, the pipes
being fitted round the cable after laying.
b) All road crossings shall be ducted. This applies to present and
future roads as indicated on the route plans. The pipes and the
ducts shall be laid in an approved manner and shall be
surrounded by 150 mm of PCC (1:2:4)
c) Ducts under the road shall be provided by the contractor, by
non‐disruptive method, if road cutting is not permitted by the
concerned authorities Cable laying shall be done by Horizontal
Direct drilling method (HDD).
d) The cables shall be suitably protected at entry and exit from the
pipes, so that the outer sheath does not come in contact with
the edges of the pipes / ducts. The pipes and ducts shall have
slope so that the seepage water can drain through the small
opening provided on the lower side of the pipe sealing.
e) The pipes and ducts shall be secured to the base at both ends
and at regular interval, throughout the length, so that at no point
the ducts or pipes get suspended over the threaded cable, and
damage the same, thus defeating the very purpose of providing
the pipe / duct.
Page 10 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
f) At all road crossings at least one spare duct / pipe shall be
provided for future use. The pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned of
obstructions. A draw wire or rope shall be left in each pipe to
facilitate the drawing in of the cables. The duct end shall be
sealed temporarily to prevent the entry of foreign matter. End
caps and permanent markers shall be placed flush with footpath
/ roadways at both the ends. The pipes and ducts shall be
cleaned again immediately before the cables are drawn in.
g) The internal diameter of the pipe / duct should be such that the
cables occupy only 40% of the area of the pipe / duct to avoid
de‐rating.
3.7 Joint Bays The contractor shall provide all help so as to enable jointers to carry out
their work efficiently and expeditiously. The method of securing and
supporting cable joints and cables also the bonding and earthing thereof,
shall be detailed on the drawing. The details shall be approved by BSES
prior to commencement or work. The joint position should be staggered.
3.8 Back filling of a) Filling in of trenches shall not be commenced until BSES has
trenches inspected and approved the cables and accessories at site. The
inspection should be got done on daily basis so that the trenches
do not remain open unnecessarily, to avoid inconvenience to
public.
b) The trench shall be backfilled after putting all protections for
cables.
c) Soft soil shall be backfilled for 300 mm above the cable
protection cover.
d) Caution Tape shall be laid all along the cable route above the soft
soil filling.
e) Complete backfilling shall be done above the caution tape.
3.9 temporary a) Where cables routes are in public highways, footpaths, gardens
Reinstatement etc., the method of reinstatement will be subject to approval by
MCD. All costs incurred will be at the contractor’s expenses.
b) The contractor shall be responsible for proper permanent
reinstatement of the upper levels, which shall be carried out to
the satisfaction of BSES and the MCD authorities concerned.
c) Before finally leaving site, permanent reinstatement shall be
executed by the contractor to the approval of MCD and the
property owners and all costs incurred shall be to the
contractor’s account.
3.10 Permanent a) In public roads and footways the surfaces and foundations shall
Reinstatement be temporarily reinstated by the contractor. After settlement,
of Public Road, temporary reinstatement material shall be removed as necessary
and the permanent reinstatement shall be carried out to the
approval of the appropriate highway authority / MCD. Stone and
pre‐cast concrete paving kerbs and channels shall also be finally
reinstated by the contractor.
b) Temporary reinstatement shall be maintained by the contractor
until commencement of final reinstatement to ensure that the
surface is always safe for the passage of pedestrians and
vehicular traffic.
Page 11 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
3.11 Identification All cables shall be identified below the gland at each end, at joint

position and at approved positions by means of bands engraved or
punched with cable no. feeder name, size of cable, number of cores,
phase colour etc. The bands shall be secured fastened in a permanent
manner, and shall be made of material able to resist corrosion,
dampness and mechanical damage.
3.12 Cable Route All cables routes shall have markers at suitable location with a gap not
Markers exceeding 30 meters. The route markers shall be approved design.
Additional markers shall be provided at joint locations with approved
markings.
3.13 Cable supports a) The contractor shall supply and install all the supports, racks,
/ Clamps trays, cleats, saddles, clips and other parts required to carry and
secure the cables, without risk so that there is no undue
mechanical load or stress due to weight of the cable at each end.
Cleats, saddles and clips shall be of the design as approved by
BSES. No cable shall be laid on the trench floor. They shall be run
in a neat and orderly manner and the crossing of cables within
the trench shall be avoided as far as possible. Where cable runs
unavoidably cross, a suitable supporting arrangement shall be
provided to maintain an adequate gap between the cables
b) Every cable shall be supported at a point not more than 500 mm
from its termination.
3.14 Installation of a) The design of cable support for cables installed in air in cable
Cables in tunnels, basements etc. shall consist of vertical steel members
tunnels / spaced at approved interval and secured to the walls, floors and
basement / ceilings as necessary by means of bolts either cemented in
below the position or expanded into cored holes. Each vertical support shall
panels etc have bolted to it a number of steel brackets spaced at the
intervals and designed to support and retain trays constructed of
galvanized sheet steel of adequate section to carry the weight of
the cables, plus space for an additional quantity of future cables
at least 25% by weight and dimensions in excess of the cables
installed under the contract and an additional load of 100 kg at
the extremity without distortion. The trays shall be designed
with raised edges to retain the cables and shall incorporate an
interlocking feature so as to prevent movement between
supports.
b) The design and construction of all cable cleating and supporting
arrangements shall suit the cable system design. The spacing of
cable supports shall be approved by BSES.
c) Cable run on trays shall be neatly dressed and where not
provided with cleats shall be secured by heavy gauge, type
approved metal reinforced, clips or saddles. Not more than six
cables shall be embraced by one clip.
d) Mild steel of appropriate sections, duly painted in an approved
manner, shall be used for fabrication of cable supports. The steel
shall be free from blisters, scales, laminations or other defects.
Before final painting, the steel sections shall be provided with
double coat of red primer.
Page 12 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
3.15 Cable Where the cables terminate on overhead line poles or towers located

Protection at outside substation compounds the contractor shall provide suitable cable
overhead supporting galvanized steel work attached to the pole or tower and
Towers or comprising backboard, runners, sheet, steel cover of not less than 3.0mm
Poles thickness, stays, cable cleats, anti climbing guard and all incidental items
to provide secure protection for the cables. Isolators and Lightning
arrestor if required to be installed shall be provided as free issue item to
the contractor, however the erection and steel structure required shall
be in scope of the contractor.
3.16 Sun Shades All cables shall be protected from direct solar radiation by ventilated sun
shields as approved by BSES.
3.17 Route Plan a) BSES intents to show all the cable routes, location of joints and
other underground obstructions on a GPS map.
b) During the progress of the contract works the contractor shall
record on a set of route plans and cross section drawings of an
approved form, these details so that the same can be transferred
on the GPS maps. Such particulars will allow an accurate
reference to be made in the case of any fault or projected
modification. These records shall show, amongst other data,
both indoors and outdoors the exact position of every joint,
cable end termination and also the particulars of the depth of
the trench, the arrangement of the cables, with cable numbers
and the position of all obstructions revealed during the course of
excavations. These completed records shall be submitted to BSES
within 15 days of completion of any particular route/feeder. The
final bill shall not be processed by BSES unless this activity has
been completed to the entire satisfaction of BSES
3.18 Site Facilities to a) The contractor shall arrange for all the tools and tackles required
be maintained for cable laying as per this specification. BSES shall arrange for all
by the the material and manpower required for jointing and end
Contractor termination.
b) Illumination and Power supply shall be arranged by the
contractor so that the work can be carried out round the clock.
c) The contractor shall maintain functional dewatering pumping
facility with suitable power supply so as to protect the cables and
the joints from ingress of water due to rain or otherwise
d) The contractor shall make arrangement to provide suitable
scaffolding arrangement to carry out the termination work
e) The contractor shall carry out proper barricading of the dug cable
route and the joint bays and shall take all necessary precautions
to avoid any public hazard
f) Also refer Annexure‐7: Barricading and Safety.
3.19 Type of Roads The typical section of type of Roads (based on width) under PWD and
and guidelines MCD are :‐
for road ‐ 20 Feet Wide road
restoration ‐ 30 Feet wide road
‐ 40 to 60 Feet Road
‐ Other ( which include Kota stone, Agra stone, Cement
concrete, interlocking paving tiles, brick road, chequered tiles
Page 13 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
and asphalted road)

The drawing are shown in annexure IV

The guidelines for road restoration for various type of roads
and surfaces are indicated in annexure V as :‐
‐ Bituminous road Type I (category I & II)
‐ Bituminous road Type II (category III)
‐ Cement concrete road
‐ Kota/Rajasthan stone Road
‐ Brick Road
‐ Interlocking paving tiles.
‐ Agra stone road
‐ Chequered tiles road
‐ Asphalted road

4.0 Testing

No.
4.1 Tests to be Testing of cable before jointing –
carried ‐ Cable shall be tested for Insulation Resistance prior to laying by opening
out during and the end and resealing end properly.
after completion
of Testing on complete Cable Installation –
Cable Laying a) Insulation resistance of each core shall be measured against all
the other cores and the metal screen connected to earth.
b) The resistance of the conductor shall be measured.
c) DC High voltage. For old cables test voltage shall be 1.5 times
rated voltage or less depending on age of cable.(refer annexure #
2 for values)
d) Charging of Cable at No‐Load at Nominal working voltage for 24
Hours.
e) After laying and before termination of cable a sheath test shall
be conducted for 66KV Single core Cable as under :‐

At both ends the cable shall be raised from ground. From the end
graphite coat applied over the outer PVC jacket shall be removed
with a piece of glass for a length of 300mm. A spiked steel rod
with an eye for attaching a wire shall be driven into the ground
and connected to a nearby water or hydrant pipe. Insulation
resistance of PVC jacket shall be measured between the
aluminium wire armour and the spike with a 500/1000V
insulation tester. Measured resistance shall not be less than
2.5M OHM per KM. Thereafter 10KV DC shall be applied for one
minute in the same way. After the test the armour shall be kept
earthed to the steel spike for 15 minutes for discharging residual
charge.
4.2 Statutory a) Road cutting permission
Page 14 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
clearance Road cutting permission shall be taken from competent authority by
vendor. How ever official fees shall be paid by BRPL.
b) Electrical inspector clearance
Electrical Inspector clearance shall be in vendor scope. How ever
official fees shall be paid by BRPL.

5.0 Progress Reporting:

No.
5.1 Detailed Progress Progress report to be submitted by Contractor to BSES once in
report a Week containing
i) Excavation status
ii) Cable laying status
iii) Status of preparedness for Jointing
iv) Reason for any delay in total programme
v) Details of damage to cable during laying.
vi) Progress on final completion / Constraints / Forward path
6.0 Drawing, Data & Manuals:

No.
6.1 To be submitted As the works is completed the following reports in quadruplicate shall be
After Completion submitted to BSES for record purpose and shall be incorporated in the
of the Job ‘As constructed Records’.
a) Feeder details ( sending end, receiving end, SAP number
of project etc)
‐ Type of cables, cross section area, rated voltage. Details of construction,
cable number & drum number.
‐ Year and month of laying.
‐ Actual total route length, cable length, length between joint to joints or
end.
‐ Location of cables and joints in relation to certain fixed reference
points, for example buildings, hydrant, boundary stones etc.
‐ Jointing reports detailing the date, weather conditions, jointers and
supervising Engineers names, details of type of cable and type of joint or
termination, location and joint bay number, ambient temperature.
‐ Results of original electrical measurements and testing on cable
installation.
‐ Full written reports will be required of any damage occurring to cable or
equipment together with remedial action proposed which will be subject
to the approval of BSES.
6.2 Drawing and Standard size paper A0, A1, A2, A3, A4
document sizes

Page 15 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
7.0.0 Deviations

Deviations from this Specification shall be stated in writing by the contractor. Written approval shall
be obtained from BSES by the contractor. In absence of such a statement, it will be assumed by BSES
that the Contractor complies fully with this specification during execution of the job.

Deviation mentioned in any other submitted tender docs like in GTP, QAP, Old PO, old WO, BRPL
Standard, vendor standards etc. shall not be considered as a deviation at any stage of contract.

The format for approval of deviation attached in annexure # 1

Annexure # 1 – DEVIATION REPORT FORMAT

S. Clause No. of Details about Reason for Approved by (Sign &
NO. Specification deviation deviation Name)

Annexure # 2 – DC HIGH VOLTAGE TEST

Rated Voltage Test Voltage Between Duration in Min.
of cable in KV
Any conductor and Conductor to
metallic sheath / conductor (for
Screen / armour unscreened Cables)
0.65 / 1.1 3 3 15 Min
6.35 / 11 18 30
19 / 33 60 ‐‐‐‐
38 / 66 90 ‐‐‐‐

Reference value for DC High voltage Test.
Page 16 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
Annexure # 3 – CABLE TRENCH DETAILS

S. No. Cable Size Trench Cable Trench drawing
reference
Width (mm) Depth (mm)
1 1.1 kV LT Cables
a 3.5Cx150 mm2 ‐ Single 400 875 A – 1 (Drg. # 9)
Circuit
b 3.5Cx150 mm2 ‐ Double 400 875 A – 1 (Drg. # 9)
Circuit
c 3.5Cx150 mm2 ‐ Triple 400 875 A – 1 (Drg. # 9)
Circuit
d 3.5Cx300 mm2 ‐ Single 400 875 A – 1 (Drg. # 8)
Circuit
e 3.5Cx300 mm2 ‐ Double 400 875 A – 1 (Drg. # 8)
Circuit
f 3.5Cx300 mm2 ‐ Triple 400 875 A – 1 (Drg. # 8)
Circuit

2 11 KV Cables
a 3Cx150 / 300 mm2 ‐ Single 400 1055 A – 2 (Drg. # 6)
Circuit
b 3Cx150 / 300 mm2 ‐Double 650 1055 B – 1 (Drg. # 7)
Circuit

3 33 kV Cables
a 3Cx400 mm2 ‐ Single Circuit 400 1235 A – 3 (Drg. # 3)
b 3Cx400 mm2 ‐ Double 650 1235 B – 2 (Drg. # 4)
Circuit
c 3Cx400 mm2 ‐ Quadruple 650 1235 B – 2 (Drg. # 5A)
Circuit
d 3Cx400 mm2 ‐ Quadruple 650 1545 B – 3 (Drg. # 5B)
Circuit
e 3Cx400 mm2 ‐ Quadruple 1200 1235 C – 1 (Drg. # 5C)
Circuit

4 66 kV Cables
a 1Cx630/1000 mm2 ‐ Single 650 1445 B – 4 ( Drg. # 1)
Circuit
b 1Cx630/1000 mm2 ‐ Double 1200 1445 C – 2 (Drg. # 2)
circuit
c 3Cx300 mm2 ‐ Double circuit 1200 1445 C – 2 (Drg. # 2A)

Page 17 of 42

GN101-03-SP-06-R2

Annexure # 4 – Standard Road Profile

Page 18 of 42

GN101-03-SP-06-R2
Page 19 of 42

GN101-03-SP-06-R2
Annexure # 5 – Road Restoration Sectional Drawing

Page 20 of 42

GN101-03-SP-06-R2

Page 21 of 42

GN101-03-SP-06-R2

Page 22 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-R2
Annexure # 6 – DRAWINGS ( CABLE TRENCH AND RCC CABLE COVER)
Page 23 of 42
Page 24 of 42
Page 25 of 42
Page 26 of 42
Page 27 of 42
Page 28 of 42
Page 29 of 42
Page 30 of 42
Page 31 of 42
Page 32 of 42
Page 33 of 42
Page 34 of 42
Page 35 of 42
Page 36 of 42
Page 37 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-02
Annexure-7: Barricading and Safety

1. Dimensions of barricading- Height- 2 mtr, Length- 1.5 mtr. Refer drawing
enclosed with tech spec for more details.
2. There shall not have any gap in between two barricades. Edge to edge shall be
intact.
3. LED Bacon light shall be placed at 1st and 4th barricade and same shall be
continue
4. Name, painting, colour, clean ness etc. shall be done on regular basis.
5. Vendor to ensure that traffic management shall not be excuse of work
execution. The contactor shall not undertake loading and unloading at
carriageways obstructing the free flow of vehicular traffic and encroachment
of existing roads by the contactor applying the excuse of work execution.
6. Full height fence, barriers, barricades etc. shall be erected around the site in
order to prevent the working area from the risk of accidents due to speedy
vehicular movement. Same the way barricades protect the road users from the
danger due to construction equipment and temporary structures.
7. The structure dimensions of the barricades , material and composition, its
colour scheme, BSES logo and details shall be in accordance with
specification and drawing laid down in the tender documents.
8. All the barricades shall be erected as per the design requirements of employer,
numbered painted and maintained in good condition and also barricade in
charge maintain a barricade register at site
9. All barricades shall be conspicuously seen in the dark/night time by the road
users so that no vehicle hits the barricades. Conspicuity shall be ensured by
affixing retro reflective strips of required size and shape at appropriate angle at
bottom and middle portion of the barricades at a minimum gap of 1000 mm. In
addition minimum one red light /red blinker and red beacon light should be
placed at the top of each barricade.
10. No dust deposit at the front side of barricades.
11. Cable drum shall be returnable and vendor shall take it back (by bye back
process) from site at their own risk and cost.
12. Once cable lying complete of a drum, within two days empty drum shall be
removed from site by bye back process.
13. Trained traffic marshal with all PPE and traffic control light (Red and Green)
shall be placed at site for 24x7.
14. No excuse of theft (beyond 6 hrs. of FIR) shall be acceptable.
15. During execution of job, any damage to other agency’s properties shall be
counted in vendor account and necessary action shall be taken by vendor to
recover, repair etc.
16. Excess earth shall be removed from site after back filling. Site to be cleared to
avoid flowing of dust. Barricades to be removed from site with in 24 hrs. after
completion of job.
17. During non working hrs. vendor to ensure presence of supervisor for
controlling any event from locals.
18. PPEs
• Helmets
Page 38 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-02
• Mask
• Jacket
• Shoes
• First Aid Box etc.
Shall be available at site 24x7. Zero tolerance on absence of PPEs to the
working personnel. No excuse shall be acceptable in this regards.
19. EPR/Scanning shall be done by vendor of whole the route and same shall be
submitted to BRPL. This work shall be done by vendor before execution of
job.
20. Jointing TAT- Jointing to start within 48 hrs. and shall be completed by 96
hrs.+1 day.
21. Lifting of cable drums with hydraulic machine, pulling of cable from top end
of drum with pulling machine (hydraulic winch) is mandatory.
22. Violation on barricading guideline and safety norms, a fine of Rs.5000 /day
shall be imposed. BRPL inspector/engineer in-charge shall be empowered to
impose the above penalty.
Page 39 of 42
GN101-03-SP-06-02
Annexure # 8 – ROUTE MARKER AND BARRICADING DRAWING
Page 40 of 42
Page 41 of 42
Page 42 of 42
BSES Bhawan, Nehru Place, New Delhi- 19
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 66KV CONTROL & RELAY PANEL
FOR NEW GRIDS

Specification no – SP-CRP-01-R1
1.0
Prepared by Javed Ahmed Rev: 2
Reviewed by Abhinav Srivastava Date: 29.03.2017
Approved by Vijay Panpalia

Volume – I Technical Specification for 66KV Control & Relay Panel
Revision Record
Item/Clause
S.No. Rev.No. Nature of change Approved By
No.:
1 R1 4 Width of cubicle shall be 1250mm KA
2 R1 5.7 Spare terminal in each type of terminal. KA
3 R1 6 Test terminal block for numerical relays KA
and meter.
4 R1 8 Mimic diagram alignment with KA
discrepancy type control switch.
5 R1 11.4 Multifunction meter with digital output KA
with modbus communication.
6 R1 11.4.3 Communication protocol IEC 61850 KA
metering equipment.
7 R1 12.1.5 Communication protocol IEC 61850 in KA
Numerical Relays.
8 R1 12.1.9 All necessary converters shall be consider KA
for communication of numerical relays in
case of optical fiber.
9 R1 12.1.16 Digital input and output of Numerical KA
relays
10 R1 12.2.1.2 Line current differential with distance KA
relays in Line control and relays panel.
11 R1 12.2 Optical fiber communication in line KA
current differential relays with distance
relays in Line control and relays panel.
12 R1 12.4 Auxiliary relays shall NO/NC contact shall KA
be as per BSES requirement.
13 R1 13.0 Minimum no. of annunciation window KA
shall be 24Nos.
14 R2 18.4.1 Addition of Alstom Make Relays VP
2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY

2.1 This specification covers design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer’s works, packing and
delivery of control and relay panel for substation equipments.

2.2 The control and relay panel shall be complete with all components and accessories, which
are necessary or usual for their efficient performance and trouble free operation under the
various operating and atmospheric conditions as specified in the Annexure A of data sheet.

2.3 Such parts which may have not been specifically included, but otherwise form part of the
CRP as per standard trade and/or professional practice and/or are necessary for proper
operation of control and relay panel, will be deemed to be also included in this specification.
3.0 CODES & STANDARDS:

Control and Relay panel should be designed and manufactured in accordance with the
following standards –
National Standard
Standard Code Standard Description
IS‐1248, Part 1‐ 1993 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring
instruments and their accessories.
IS‐3231, Part 1‐ 1986 Part 2 &3 Electrical relays for power system protection
‐1987
IS‐9000 Part 1 ‐1988 Basic environmental testing procedures for electronics &
electrical items
IS‐13703 1993 Low voltage fuses for Voltages not exceeding 1000V AC or
1500 V DC
IS‐13947 Part 1 ‐ 1993 Low voltage switchgear & control gear
IEC‐60255 ‐ 1989 Specification for electrical relays
IEC 60688 1997 Electrical measuring transducers
4.0 PANEL CONSTRUCTION

Description Requirement / Rating
Simplex panels of standard dimensions. Equipment shall be
4.1 Panel Type mounted on the front of the panel and doors for wiring
access shall be at the back of panels.
Completely metal enclosed and dust, moisture and vermin
4.2 Enclosure type proof. Degree of protection not less than IP‐4X in
accordance with IS 13947
Cold‐rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 2.0 mm.
4.3 Enclosure material
Stiffeners shall be provided wherever necessary.
4.4 Doors Doors shall be at the rear. For panels having width should
be more than or equal to 1250mm, double leaf doors shall
be provided. Doors shall have handles with either built‐in
locking facility or be provided with padlock.
At least two separate gland plates of removable type shall
4.5 Gland Plate be provided for each panel. They shall be of sheet steel of
thickness not less than 3.0 mm.
4.6 Cable Entry Shall be from the bottom
All doors, removable covers and panels shall be gasketed all
4.7 Gaskets
around with neoprene gaskets.
Ventilating louvers, if provided shall have screens and filters.
4.8 Ventilating louvers
The screens shall be made of either brass or GI wires mesh.
The panels shall be fixed on the embedded foundation
channels with intervening layers anti vibration strips made
4.9 Foundation
of shock absorbing materials. Base frames shall be supplied
along with panels.
Equipment on front of panel shall be flush mounted. Cutouts
if any, provided for future mounting of equipment shall be
4. 10 Mounting
properly blanked off with blanking plate no equipment shall
be mounted on the doors.
The center lines of switches, push buttons and indicating
lamps shall not be less than 750mm and that for relays,
4.11 Mounting level
meters and recorders shall be not less than 450 mm from
the bottom of the panel.
The center lines of switches, push buttons and indicating
lamps shall be matched to give a neat and uniform
4.12 Appearance
appearance. Like wise the top lines of all meters, relays and
recorders etc, shall be matched.
5.0 WIRING
1100V grade, single core, stranded copper conductor wires
5.1 Internal wiring
with PVC insulation.
5.2 Size 4 sqmm for CT circuits, 2.5 sqmm for PT and control circuits.
R ph ‐ Red, Yph ‐ Yellow, B ph ‐ Blue, Neutral ‐ Black for CT
5.3 Colour Code
and PT circuits. DC ‐ Grey, AC ‐ Black and Earth ‐ Green
Ferrules marked to correspond with panel wiring diagram
shall be fitted at both ends of each wire. Ferrules shall fit
5.4 Ferrules tightly on the wire. Wires directly connected to trip circuit
shall be distinguished by the addition of red colored
unlettered ferrule.
Fork type, pin type and ring type (as applicable) tinned
5.5 Termination copper lugs to be used. Insulated sleeves shall be provided
at all the wire terminations.
Plastic channels to be used as enclosures. PVC sleeves to be
5.6 Wiring Enclosure
used for inter panel wiring.
Spare contacts of relays and contactors etc. should be wired
5.7 Spare Contacts
upto the terminal block
When panels are arranged adjacent to each other inter
panel wiring of common bus wires between the panels shall
5.8 Inter panel wiring
be furnished. These adjacent inter panel wiring shall be
clearly indicated in the wiring tables.
Auxiliary bus wiring for AC and DC supplies, voltage
transformer circuits, annunciation circuits and other
5.9 Auxiliary supply
common services shall be provided on the same set of
terminals in all the panels with proper segregation.
6.0 TERMINAL BLOCKS

1100 V grade, minimum 10 amps continuous rating, Nylon
66, molded piece, complete with insulated barriers, stud
6.1 Rating and Type type terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. White fiber
markings strip with clear plastic, slip‐on / clip‐on terminal
covers to be provided.
Terminal Blocks (TB) for current transformer and voltage
transformer secondary leads shall be Stud Type provided
6.2 CT & PT Terminals with test links and isolating facilities. Also current
transformer secondary leads shall be provided with short‐
circuiting and earthing facilities.
6.3 Spare Terminals 20% in each type of TB row
Clearance with gland
6.4 Minimum 250mm
plate
Clearance between
6.5 Minimum 150mm
two TBs
Screw driver operated stud type for each type of numerical
6.6 Test Terminal Blocks
relays and metering
Unless otherwise specified, terminal blocks shall be suitable
for connecting the following conductors of cable on each
side:
6.7 Suitability a) All circuits including current / voltage transformer
circuits: 4 sq.mm copper.
b) AC / DC power supply circuits: one no. of 10 mm2 Al./ 6
sq.mm Cu.
Arrangement of the terminal block assemblies and the
wiring channel within the enclosure shall be such that a row
of terminal block runs in parallel and close proximity to
6.8 Arrangement
each side of the wiring duct. The side of the terminal block
opposite the wiring duct shall be reserved for the external
cable connection.
7.0 PAINT
Powder coated. Pure Polyester base Grade‐A, structure
7.1 Paint Type
finish.
7.2 Paint Shade RAL7032 ‘Siemens Grey’
7.3 Paint Thickness Minimum 50 microns
8.0 MIMIC DIAGRAM

Colored mimic diagram and symbols showing the exact
System representation of the system shall be provided in the front
8.1
Representation of control panels and it shall be properly align with all
discrepancy type control switch of panels.
Mimic diagram shall be made preferably of painted
Aluminum or plastic of approved fast color material, which
shall be screwed on to the panel and can be easily cleaned.
8.2 Material
Painted overlaid mimic is also acceptable. The mimic bus
shall be 2‐3 mm thick. The width of the mimic bus shall be
12mm for bus bars and 10 mm for other connections.
Discrepancy type switches are to be used for breaker and
8.3 Mimic Indications isolator control indication and semaphore indicators shall
be used for earth switch position.
9.0 NAME PLATES & MARKINGS
All equipment mounted on front side as well as
equipment mounted inside the panels shall be
provided with individual name plates with equipment
designation engraved. Also, large and bold name plate
carrying the feeder identification numbers shall be
Provision of
9.1 provided for circuit / feeder designation on the top of
Nameplates
each panel on front as well as rear side. All front
mounted equipment shall be also provided at the rear
with individual name plates engraved with tag
numbers corresponding to the one shown in the panel
internal wiring to facilitate easy tracing of the wiring.
Non‐rusting metal or 3 ply lamicoid. Nameplates shall
Nameplate
9.2 be black with white engraving lettering. Stickers are
Material
not allowed.
Each switch shall bear clear inscription identifying its
function. Similar inscription shall also be provided on
each device whose function is not other wise
9.3 Markings identified. If any switch or device does not bear this
inscription separate nameplate giving its function shall
be provided for it. Switch shall also have clear
inscription for each position indicating e.g. Trip‐
Neutral close, ON‐OFF, R‐Y‐B OFF etc.
10.0 EARTHING
All panels shall be equipped with an earth bus securely
10.1 Panel Earthing
fixed.
The material and the sizes of the bus bar shall be 25 x
10.2
Material 6 mm copper flat unless specified otherwise.
All bolted joints in the bus will be affected by
10.3
Earth Bus joints connection of two bolts.
10.4 Hinged Doors Earthed through flexible copper braid.
Instrument and All metallic cases of relays, instruments and other
Relay Earthing panel mounted equipment including gland plate, shall
10.5 be connected to the earth bus by copper wires of size
not less than 2.5 mm2. The color code of earthing
wires shall be green
CT and PT circuit VT and CT secondary neutral shall be earthed at one
10.6
Earthing place only at the terminal blocks through links.
11.0 INSTRUMENTS
11.1 Mounting Flush Mounting
Instruments dial shall be with white
circular scale and black pointer, black
11.2 Scale
numerals and lettering with red marks at
values corresponding to rated values.
11.3 Ammeters and Voltmeters Taut Band, Moving iron type
11.3.1 Size 96x96mm
11.3.2 Provision All panels
11.3.3 Selector switch to be provided
11.3.4 Accuracy Class 0.5 or better.
Multifunction meter Three phase 4 Wire ‐ digital type with
11.4
Modbus Output.
11.4.1 Provision All panels except bus‐coupler
11.4.2 Accuracy Class 0.5 or better.
Provision as per IEC 61850 Protocol with
11.4.3 Communication Capability
serial port communication to be made.
Scrolling facility with LCD display for
11.4.4 Additional facility parameters like power factor, kW, kWh,
kVA, kVAR, current, voltage etc.
12.0 RELAYS
12.1 Protective Relays ‐ General features
Microprocessor based with provision for
multifunction protection and control,
Technology and
12.1.1 metering, monitoring, User machine interface,
Functionality
communication interface, self‐diagnosis
functionalities.
12.1.2 Mounting Flush Mounting, IP5X
Hardware and software architecture shall be
modular and disconnect able to adapt the
12.1.3 Architecture
protection and control unit to the required
level of complexity as per the application.
Relay shall utilize a user friendly setting and
Programming and operating multilingual software in windows
12.1.4
configuration environment with menus and icons for fast
access to the data required.
Serial communication interface for data
transfer and configuration PC and SCADA
using appropriate protocols as per IEC 61850.
12.1.5 Relay Communication
And in case of communication through optical
fiber then necessary converter needs to be
considered.
UMI with an alphanumeric key pad and graphical
LCD display with backlight indicating measurement
12.1.6 User Machine Interface
values and operating messages. Capability to
access and change all settings and parameters.
Relay shall integrate all necessary protections for
different applications in accordance with IS and
12.1.7 Relay Characteristics IEC. Relay shall provide wide setting ranges and
choice of all IEC, IEEE and other tripping curves
through a minimum of two setting groups.
Facility for recording various parameters of faults
12.1.8 Fault recording with option to set the duration of fault record with
maximum no. of data storage facility
Measurement of Event Recording , Disturbance
General Features of Recording, Harmonic Distortion , RMS Current
Numerical Relays values & Frequency, Peak and Rolling Current
Values, Max. and Average current Values, Phase
12.1.9
and or Neutral Angles , Max. and average voltage,
Power and Energy, Apparent Power and Apparent
Power and Apparent Energy with Time
Synchronization.
Relay shall be able to detect internal failures. A
12.1.10 Self diagnosis watchdog relay with changeover contact shall
provide information about the failure.
12.1.11 Reset Contacts Self reset contacts except for lockout relays
12.1.12 Operation Indicators LEDs with pushbutton for resetting.
12.1.13 Auxiliary supply As per requirement
Bidder shall provide the reference list of the type
12.1.13 Operational Data
of relays offered
12.1.14 Spare Contacts Minimum 20% Spare contacts
12.1.15 Test Facility Inbuilt with necessary test plugs.
No. of Digital input / Digital output of any type of
relay which shall be used in control and relay
panel shall be as per BSES requirement and signal
12.1.16 DI / DO of Numerical relay list only. Refer the attached tentative signal list of
all feeders (Incoming/Out going, Trasformer &
Transformer Monitoring Unit, Buscoupler & Bus
PT).
Contacts for Transformer Contacts of NIFPS shall be provided in Transformer
12.1.17
NIFPS panel
12.2 Protective Relays ‐ Requirement
12.2.1 For 66kV
12.2.1.1 Bus Bar Protection Numerical type, mounted on a separate panel
with fault recording. CT wise supervision to be
provided.
12.2.1.2 Line Panel Relay‐1 Line current Differential function suitable
through optical fiber communication, Distance
Protection with multiple characteristics i.e Mho ,
Quadrilateral etc.
Relay‐2 Directional and non‐ Directional 3‐phase
over current and earth fault Protection
Combining the functions of Relays‐1 & Relays‐2 in
single relay is not acceptable
Synchronizing Check Relay
Broken Conductor Protection
12.2.1.3 Bus Coupler 3 Phase Over current protection ,
Earth fault protection
12.2.1.4 Capacitor feeder Three phase over current protection
Earth fault protection
Neutral unbalance (separate relay)
Under voltage relay
Over Voltage relay
Timer for ON time delay.
Under Current protection
12.2.1.5 Transformer Feeder/Panel Relay – 1

• Differential protection, with software based ratio
and vector correction without ICT.
• REF protection for the star side.
Relay – 2
• Overcurrent protection
• Earth fault protection
• Standby Earth fault protection
Relay – 3
Transformer monitoring relay including AVR
Features or equivalent & the no. of DI / DO Shall
be as per BSES Requirement
Relay 1, 2 &3 are separate relays. Combining all
the functions of relay 1, 2&3 in a single relay is not
acceptable
12.3 Auxiliary relays - General Features
12.3.1 Type Static or electromechanical.
12.3.2 Reset Characteristic Self reset contacts except for lockout relays
Hand reset operation indicators or LEDs with
12.3.3 Operation Indicators
pushbutton for resetting.
12.3.4 Lockout relay Manual reset type
12.3.5 Auxiliary supply As per requirement
Bidder shall provide the reference list of the
12.3.6 Operational Data
type of relays offered
12.3.7 Spare Contacts As per requirement of BRPL
12.4 Auxiliary relays ‐ Requirement
To be provided with anti‐pumping (94),
12.4.1 Each Panel Lockout (86), DC fail (80) and trip circuit
supervision (95) relays.
Provision for multiplication of auxiliary contact
of breakers, isolators and earth switches to be
made in each panel using latching relays.
12.4.2 Each Panel Multiplied contacts to be used for interlocks
and indications. NO / NC Contact which shall
be use for contact multiply shall be as per
protection scheme requirement.
Incoming and Outgoing Provision of PT supply supervision and suitable
Feeder Panels automatic selection scheme between Line PT
12.4.3
and Bus PT supplies for uninterrupted
metering.
13.0 ANNUNCIATION
Static type along with alarm. Annunciations shall
13.1 Type be repetitive type and shall be capable of
registering the fleeting signal. Facia test facility
should also be provided

13.2 Mounting Flush mounted
Minimum 24 Nos. Facia along with appropriate
13.3 Facia
labels on each facia.in each panel
Push buttons for test, accept and reset to be
13.4 Push Buttons
provided
13.5 Potential Free Contacts To be provided for event logger
Sequence of operation of the annunciator shall be as follows:
Alarm Visual Audible

S No Fault Contact
Condition Annunciation Annunciation
1. Normal Open Off Off
2. Abnormal Close Flashing On
3. Accept Close Steady on Off
4. Return to normal Open Steady On Off
5. Reset Open Off Off
6. Reset before Close Flashing On
return to normal
14.0 INDICATIONS
Flush mounted Clustered LED type with rear
14.1 Indicating Lamps terminal connections. Lamp Cover to be screwed
type an moulded from heat resistant material
14.1.1 Breaker On Red
14.1.2 Breaker Off Green
14.1.3 Spring Charged Blue
14.1.4 DC control supply fail Amber
14.1.5 Auto trip Amber
14.1.6 Heater Circuit healthy Yellow
14.1.7 Trip Circuit Healthy White
14.1.8 PT supply R, Y, B
14.1.9 Hooter with isolation switch For AC and DC supply failure
Semaphore type indicators shall be provided for
14.2 Position Indicators
mimic diagrams
15.0 SELECTOR SWITCHES & PUSH BUTTONS

All the selected selector switch shall be only
15.1 Selector Switch discrepancy type Flush Mounted with
shrouded terminals
Pistol Grip type, Lockable with spring return to
15.1.1 TNC Switch
normal position
15.1.2 Local/SCADA selector switch 4 pole
15.1.3 Ammeter selector switch 6way 7 position
15.1.4 Voltmeter selector switch 6 way 7 position
15.1.5 Rotary On/Off Switches For heater/illumination circuit

15.1.6 Rating of switches 16 A
15.2 Push button Flush Mounted with shrouded terminals
15.2.1 Accept Push Button Black Color-Trip alarm/DC fail alarm
15.2.2 Reset Push Button Yellow Color- Trip alarm/DC fail alarm
15.2.3 Test Push Button Blue Color
15.2.4 Rating 10A
16.0 ACCESSORIES
16.1 Space heaters Thermostat controlled with switch for isolation
240V, 5A socket to be provided in each panel
16.2 Socket and switch
with on-off switch
Provision for receiving, distribution, isolation
and fusing of DC and AC supplies to various
16.3 MCBs and Fuses
control circuits should be made using MCBs
and Fuses of appropriate ratings.
240V AC illumination lamp controlled by panel
16.4 Panel illumination
door switch to be provided in each panel
17.0 TESTING & INSPECTION

Product must be type tested as per Indian
17.1 Type tests
Standards or IEC
17.1.1 Type test report validity Last five years from the date of bid submission
As per specifications and relevant standards.
Charges of these tests shall be deemed to be
17.2 Acceptance and Routine tests
included in the equipment price. Purchaser
reserves the right to witness all the tests.
Notice to Purchaser for conducting
17.3 At least three weeks in advance
tests
Test reports of acceptance and
17.4 Six copies to be submitted.
routine test before dispatch
Stage and Final Inspection All the Qty. of Panels will be inspected by
17.5
BSES as per approved QAP .
Submission Of QAP QAP will be submitted by suppliers with
17.6
submission of Schematic Drawings.
Deliverable 1.As Built Drawing of panel 6 Sets
2. Maintenance Manuals – 2CD / DVD Soft
Copy , 6 Set of Hard Copy
3. Relay and equipments Catalogues &
17.7
Manuals
4. Relay Settings & Maintenance Manuals
5. Relays software and connection/
communication cables
Training Training on relays and equipment operations
17.8 shall be provided to the officials of BRPL will
be in the Scope of Suppliers.
18.0 DRAWINGS & DATA SUBMISSION

18.1 Submissions along with the bid
Duly filled GTP and copy of specification/
18.1.1 2 copies + 1 soft copy
Bill of material
GA/ Cross sectional drawing of panel/SLDs/
Wiring diagrams
Calculations for MCBs, MCCBs, Fuses and
stabilizing resistors etc
18.1.4 Catalogues and Manuals for all equipments 1 copy
18.1.5 Test Reports 2 copies
18.1.6 Deviations from this specification
For type, size and rating of
18.1.7 Type test report
equipment offered.
For last five years with units of
18.1.8 Reference List of customers
similar design and rating
For five years of operation along
18.1.9 Recommended spares and consumables
with price list
18.1.10 Manufacturer's quality assurance program To be provided
18.2 Submissions after award of contract
Duly filled GTP and copy of specification/
18.2.1 4 copies
Bill of material
GA/ Cross sectional drawing of panel/SLDs/
18.2.2 4 copies
Wiring diagrams
18.2.3 Calculations for sizing of various equipment 4 copies
18.2.4 Catalogues and Manuals for all equipments 1 copy
Approved in writing before award of
18.2.5 Deviations from this specification
contract
18.2.6 Foundation Plan
Calculations for sizing of various
18.2.7 Showing all views and sections
components
18.2.8 Type test reports For all brought out items
18.3 Submissions prior to dispatch
Inspection and test reports/ compliance
18.3.1 1 set
report by manufacturer
As Built drawings/GA/SLDs and Wiring
diagrams
18.3.3 Calculations for sizing of various equipment 6 copies + 1 soft copy
18.3.4 Catalogues and Manuals for all equipments 6 copies + 1 soft copy
18.3.5 Test certificates 6 copies + 1 soft copy
18.4 Drawing and document sizes Standard size paper A3 and A4
18.4.0 Approved Make of components for 66
KV Switchgear Panel
18.4.1 Numerical Relays ABB / SIEMENS/Schneider /Alstom
Note: Approval of Selection of Relay
Type , make and its Cortex code
shall be taken during bid evaluation.
18.4.2 Auxiliary Electromechanical Relays ABB / Areva / Schneider
18.4.3 Contactor / Auxiliary Relays Schneider Electric / Siemens / ABB
18.4.4 Analog Ammeter / Voltmeter AE / Rishabh

18.4.5 Indication Led , Lamp Teknic
18.4.6 Push Button Teknic
18.4.7 Field Terminal Block Phoneix / Elemex / Connect well
18.4.8 MCB Schneider / Siemens / L&T/ABB
18.4.9 Hooter Alan
18.4.10 Panel Light Philips / Bajaj / Surya
18.4.11 Power Socket Anchor / Reputed make
18.4.12 Multifunction Meter Rishab / Socomec
18.4.13 Wires for wiring KEI / Polycab / Finolex
18.4.14 Test Terminal Block Areva / IMP/Nelster
18.4.15 Control Switch Areva / Switron
18.4.16 Annuciator Window Alan / Minilec
18.4.17 Discrepancy switch Multimode/As per approved BRPL
makes during drawing approval.
19.0 INSPECTION
Cost of Inspection including flight tickets and lodging (Hotel minimum 3 Star) shall be in
scope of Vendor
20.0 TRAINING AND COMMISSIONING SUPPORT
a) Supervision of Erection, Testing and Commissioning inclusive of all testing equipment/

instruments shall be included in the bid/proposal.
All Hardware and softwares including Relay setting files and other support shall be in the
scope of Vendor.
b) Training of buyers officials (6 officials) on operation and maintenance including relay
setting/operations at site (after installation) shall be included in the proposal/bid
21.0 DEVIATIONS
Deviation from this specification, if any, shall be clearly brought out in the offer. Unless owner
explicitly accepts such deviations, it shall be considered that the offer fully complies with the
specification.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
STRUCTURAL WORK
Prepared by Rev: 0
Reviewed by Date:
Approved by
Volume – I Technical Specification Structural Work
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 The scope of specification covers design fabrication, proto assembly, supply and erection of
galvanized steel structures for towers, girders, and equipment support structures, towers
which shall be lattice type structures fabricated from structural steel conforming to IS:
2062(latest) The scope shall include supply and erection of all types of structures including
bolts, nuts, washers, hangers, shackles, clamps, anti climbing devices, bird guards, step
bolts, inserts in concrete, gusset plates equipment mounting bolts, structure earthing bolts,
foundation bolts, spring and flat washers, fixing plates and any other items as required to
complete the job.
1.2 The connection of all structures to their foundations shall be by base plates and embedded
anchor/foundation bolts. All steel structures and anchor anchor/foundation bolts shall be
galvanized. The weight of the zinc coating shall be at least 0.610 Kg/m2 for anchor
bolts/foundation bolts and for structural members. One additional nut shall be provided below
the base plate which may be used for the purpose of leveling.
2.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURES
2.1 For design of steel structures loads such as dead loads, live loads, wind loads etc. shall be
based on IS: 802 Part 1 Sec 1
2.2 For material and permissible stresses IS: 802, Part-1, Section-2 shall be followed in general.
However additional requirements given in following paragraphs shall be also considered.
2.3 Minimum thickness of galvanized tower member shall be as follows:
Member Minimum thickness (mm)
Leg members, ground wire 5

Peak members/main members
Other members 4
Redundant members 4
2.4 Maximum slenderness ratios for leg members, other stressed members and redundant
members for compression force shall be as per IS-802
2.5 Minimum distance from hole center to edge to adjacent hole shall be minimum 1.5 X bolt
diameter. Minimum distance between center to center of holes shall be 2.5 x bolt diameter.
2.6 The minimum bolt diameter shall be 16 mm.

2.7 Step Bolts
In order to facilitate inspection and maintenance, the structures shall be provided with
climbing devices. Each tower shall be provided with step bolts not less than 16mm diameter
and 175mm long spaced not more than 450mm apart, staggered on faces on one leg
extending from about 0.5M above ground level to the top of the tower. The step bolt shall
conform to IS: 10238
2.8 Design Criteria
a) All structures be designed for the worst combination of dead loads, live loads, wind loads
as per code IS 802 seismic forces as per code IS : 1893, importance factor of 1.5, loads
due to deviation of conductor, load due to unbalanced tension in conductor, torsion load
due to unbalanced vertical and horizontal forces, erection loads, short circuit forces shall
be calculated considering a fault level of 31.5KA for 3 secs. IEC-865 may be followed for
evaluation of short circuit forces.
b) Switchyard girders structure shall be designed for the two conditions i.e. normal condition
and short circuit condition. In both conditions the design of all structures shall be based
on the assumption that stringing is done only on one side i.e. all the three (phase)
conductors broken on the other side. Factor of safety of 2.0 under normal conditions and
1.5 under short circuit condition shall be considered on all external loads for the design of
switchyard structures, which are of lattice type.
c) Vertical load of half the span of conductors/string and the earth wires on either side of the
beam shall be taken into account for the purpose of design. Weight of man with tools
shall be considered as 150KGs for the design of structures.
d) Terminal / line take off girders shall be designed for a minimum conductor tension of
1000Kg per sub conductor per phase for 66KV. The distance between terminal girders
and the dead end tower shall be taken as per standard. The design of these terminal
girders shall also be checked considering +/- 30 deg deviation of conductor in both
vertical and horizontal planes. For other girders the structural layout requirements shall
be adopted in design.
e) The girders shall be connected with lattice columns be bolted joints.
f) All support structures used for supporting equipments shall be designed for the worst
combination of dead loads, erection load. Wind load/seismic forces, short circuit forces.
Short circuit forces shall be calculated considering a fault level of 31.5KA for 3 seconds.
g) Foundation bolts shall be designed for the loads for which the structures are designed
3.0 DESIGN DRAWINGS, BILL OF MATERIAL & DOCUMENTS
3.1 The contractor shall furnish design, drawing and BOMs to the Owner after award of the
contract. However contractor shall have to prepare and submit any other drawings, bill of
material additionally required during design and construction stage which the Owner feels
necessary. In case Owner feels that any design drawing, BOM are to be modified even after
its approval, contractor shall modify the design & drawings and resubmit the design drawing,
BOM as required in the specification.
3.2 The fabrication drawings are to be provided and furnished by the contractor shall be based
on design approved by Owner. These fabrication drawings shall be based on the design
approved by the Owner. These fabrication drawings shall indicate complete details of
fabrication and erection including all erection splicing details, lacing details, weld sizes and
lengths. BOM in the Performa approved by the Owner shall be submitted. Bolt details and all
customary details in accordance with standard structural engineering practice whether or not
given by the Owner.
3.3 The fabrication work shall start only after the final approval to the design and drawings is
accorded by the Owner. The design drawing should indicate not only profile, but section,
numbers and sizes of bolts and details of typical joints.
3.4 Such approval shall however not relieve the contractor his responsibility for the safety of the
structure and good connections and any loss or damage occurring due to defective
fabrication design or workmanship shall be borne by the contractor.
4.0 FABRICATION OF STEEL MEMBERS
4.1 The fabrication and erection works shall be carried out generally in accordance with IS 802. A
reference however may be made to IS 800 in case of non-stipulation of some particular
provision in IS 802. All materials shall be completely shop fabricated and finished with proper
connection material and erection marks for ready assembly in the field.
5.0 PROTO – ASSEMBLY
5.1 The component parts shall be assembled in such a manner that are neither twisted not
otherwise damaged and shall be so prepared that the specific camber, if any, is provided. In
order to minimize distortion in member the component parts shall be positioned by using the
clamps, Clips, lugs, jigs and other suitable means and fasteners (bolts and weld) shall be
placed in a balanced pattern. If the individual components are to be bolted, paralleled and
tapered drifts shall be used to align the part so that the bolts can be accurately positioned.
5.2 Sample towers, beams and lightning masts and equipment structures shall be trial assembled
in the fabrication shop and shall be inspected and cleared by contractor based on the design
approval accorded by the Owner before mass fabrication.
5.3 Pursuant to above the BOM’s along with proto-corrected fabrication drawing shall be
prepared and submitted by the main vendor to Owner as document for information. Such
BOM, which shall be the basis for the Owner to carry out inspection.
6.0 BOLTING
6.1 Every bolt shall be provided with two flat and one spring washer under the nut so that no part
of the threaded portion of the bolt is within the thickness of the parts bolted together. Locking
nut shall be provided with each grouting bolt.
6.2 All steel items, bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot dip galvanized.
6.3 2.0% extra nuts and bolts shall be supplied for erection.
7.0 WELDING
7.1 The work shall be done as per approved fabrication drawings, which clearly indicate various
details of joints to be welded, type of weld, length and size of weld, whether shop or site weld
etc. Symbols for welding on erection and shop drawings shall be according to IS 813. Efforts
shall be made to reduce site welding so as to avoid improper joints due to constructional
difficulties.
8.0 FOUNDATION BOLTS
8.1 Foundation bolts for the towers and equipment supporting structures and elsewhere shall be
embedded in first stage concrete while the foundation is cast. The contractor shall ensure the
proper alignment of these bolts to match the holes in the base plate.
8.2 The contractor shall be responsible for the correct alignment and leveling of all steel work on
site to ensure that the towers/structures are plumb.
8.3 All foundation bolts for lattice structures are to be supplied by the contractor.
8.4 All foundation bolts shall be fully galvanized so as to achieve 0.610 kg. Per Sq.m. of Zinc
coating as per specifications.
8.5 All foundation bolts shall conform to IS 5624 but the material shall be MS conforming to IS
2062.
9.0 STABILITY OF STRUCTURES
The method of grouting the column bases shall be subject to approval of Owner and shall be such
as to ensure complete uniformity of contact over the whole area of the steel base. The contractor
will be fully responsible for the grouting operations.
10.0 GROUTING
The method of grouting the column bases shall be subject to approval of Owner and shall be such
as to ensure complete uniformity of contact over the whole area of the steel base. The contractor
will be fully responsible for the grouting operations.
11.0 GALVANISING
11.1 All structural steel works and support shall be galvanized after fabrication.
11.2 Zinc required for galvanizing shall have to be arranged by the manufacturer. Purity of zinc to
be used shall be 99.95% as per IS 209.
11.3 The contractor shall be required to make arrangement for frequent inspection by the Owner
as well as continuous inspection by a resident representative of the Owner, if so desired for
fabrication work.
12.0 TOUCH UP PAINTING
The touch up primers and paint shall consist of Zinc phosphate / Zinc chromate conforming to the
requirements of IS 2074 with a pigment to be specified by the Owner.
13.0 INSPECTION BEFORE DESPATCH
13.1 Each part of the fabricated steel work shall be inspected as per approved quality plans and
certified by the Owner or his authorized representative as satisfactory before it is dispatched
to the erection site.
13.2 Such certification shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibility regarding adequacy and
completeness of fabrication.
14.0 TEST CERTIFICATE
Copies of all test certificates relating to material by the contractor for the works shall be forwarded
to the Owner.
15.0 ERECTION
The contractor should arrange on his own all plant and equipment, welding set, tools and tackles,
scaffolding, trestles equipments and all other accessories and ancillaries required for carrying out
erection without causing any stresses in the members which may cause deformation and
permanent damage.
16.0 SAFETY & PRECAUTION
The contractor shall strictly follow at all fabrication, transportation and erection of steel structures,
raw m, materials and other tools and tackles, the stipulations contained in Indian standard code for
safety during erection of structural steel work.
17.0 DEVIATIONS
specification.
FOR
OUTDOOR SWITCHYARD MATERIAL
Prepared by Rev: 1
Reviewed by Date:
Approved by
Volume – I Technical Specification Outdoor Switchyard Material
1.0 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION
1.1 This specification is intended to cover the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at
manufacturer’s works, supply & delivery, properly packed for transport F.O.R site of 66KV
Outdoor Switchyard Material and Hardware complete with all accessories for efficient and
trouble free operation.
1.2 In the event of any discrepancy between listed documents, the stipulation of this specification
shall govern.
1.3 The specification shall be read and constructed in conjunction with other sections of bidding
document.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
2.1 Scope of Supply
Type, rating, connections etc. of the materials shall be as detailed in the drawings and
annexure. The materials shall be furnished in strict compliance with the same.
2.2 Following materials and hardware’s are to be furnished:
a) ACSR ZEBRA Conductor

b) Disc Insulator & Post Insulators
c) Conductor Spacers, Clamps, Connectors.
Any material or accessory, which may not have been specifically mentioned but which is
usual and / or necessary shall be supplied free of cost to the Owner.
3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Codes and Standards
i) All equipment and materials shall be designed, manufactured and tested in

accordance with the latest applicable Indian Standards (IS) & IEC Standard except
where modified and / or supplemented by this specification.
ii) Equipment and material conforming to any other standard, which ensures equal or
better quality, may be accepted. In such cases, copies of the English version of the
standard adopted shall be submitted along with the bid.
iii) The electrical installation shall meet the requirements of Indian Electricity Rules as
amended upto date and relevant IS Codes of Practice. In addition other rules or
regulations applicable to the work followed. In case of any discrepancy, the more
restrictive rule shall be binding.
4.0 DESIGN CRITERIA
4.1 All the ACSR conductors, disc and string insulators, clamps & connectors, hardware’s etc.
will be used in extra high voltage system having characteristics as listed in the annexure.
4.2 All equipments, conductors, hardware’s, insulators & clamps etc. will be installed outdoor in a
hot, humid & tropical atmosphere.
4.3 The maximum temperature in any part of the clamps, connectors, conductors etc at specified
rating shall not exceed the permissible limit as stipulated in the relevant standards.
4.4 All equipments, conductors, clamps, connectors, insulators etc shall be capable of
withstanding the dynamic & thermal stresses of maximum short circuit current without any
damages or deterioration.
4.5 In order to avoid concentration of stresses, all sharp edges of clamps, connectors etc. shall
be rounded off.
4.6 Bi-metallic connectors shall be used for any connection between dissimilar materials.
5.0 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT
5.1 Equipment & Materials
i) Equipment & material shall comply with description, rating etc. as detailed in this
specification and annexure.
ii) All accessories, fittings, supports, bolts etc. which form part of the equipment or
which are necessary for safe and satisfactory installation and operation of the
equipment shall be furnished.
iii) All parts shall be made accurately to standard gauges so as to facilitate replacement
and repair. All corresponding parts of similar equipment shall be interchangeable.
iv) After the treatment of steel surfaces damaged during transit sufficient quantity of anti-
corrosive paint shall be applied and subsequently finished with two coats of final
paint of approved shade.
5.2 ACSR Conductor
i) The Aluminum Standard conductor and steel reinforced shall have the technical
parameters matching with the requirements given in Annexure. ACSR conductors
shall conform to the latest revision of IS-398.
ii) The material for ACSR conductor shall conform to the following:
Aluminum
The Aluminum strands shall be hard drawn from electrolytic Aluminium rods having
purity not less than 99.5% and a copper content not exceeding 0.04%.
Steel
The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel wire rods and shall
conform to the following chemical composition:
Element -% Composition
Carbon - 0.50 to 0.85 Manganese - 0.50 to 1.10 Phosphorous -not more than 0.035
Sulphur -not more than 0.045 Silicon - 0.10 to 0.35
Zinc
The zinc used for galvanizing shall be electrolytic High Grade Zinc of 99.95% purity.
It shall conform to and satisfy all the requirements of IS: 209-1979.
5.3 Clamps and connectors
i) All clamps, connectors and hardware’s shall be designed manufactured and tested
as per relevant standards.
ii) All clamps & connectors for connection with ACSR conductors shall have high tensile
Aluminum alloy grade A6 body. U- Bolt and nut for the clamp shall be made of non-
magnetic material e.g. chromium steel.
iii) Bolt, nut, washer, shackle etc. required for other purpose shall be of forged steel with
adequate strength and the surface shall be so protected as to offer maximum
resistance to corrosion. Malleable iron wherever used for any part shall be of best
quality and shall correspond to latest amendments of relevant IS.
iv) Various fittings & accessories of the clamps & connectors shall be so designed as to
eliminate sharp edges & maintain bright smooth surface. All bolts, nuts, rivets etc.
shall have round profiles.
5.4 Disc Insulator
i) All disc insulators shall be dimensioned appropriately so as to have the required

Electro- Mechanical strength for EHV outdoor duties.
ii) Suspension and tension insulators shall be wet process porcelain with ball and
socket connection. Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown colour, free from
blisters, burrs and other similar defects. Insulators shall be interchangeable and shall
be suitable for forming either suspension or strain strings. Each insulator shall have
rated strength markings on porcelain printed and applied before firing.
iii) When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be no electric discharge between
conductor and insulator which would cause corrosion or injury to conductors or
insulators by the formation of substances due to chemical action. No radio
interference shall be caused when operating at normal rated voltage.
iv) Insulating shall be co-ordinated with basis impulse level of the system. The creepage
distance shall correspond to very heavily polluted atmosphere (31mm/KV)
v) Porcelain used in insulator manufacture shall be homogeneous, free from lamination,

cavities and other flaws or imperfection that might affect the mechanical or dielectric
quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture.
vi) The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses due to expansion and
contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. All ferrous parts
shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with the latest edition of IS: 209. The zinc
coating shall be uniform, adherent, smooth, reasonably bright, continuous and free
from imperfection such as flux, ash, rust stains bulky white deposits and blisters.
vii) Bidder shall make available data on the essential features of design including the
method of assembly of discs and metal parts, number of discs per insulators, the
manner in which mechanical stresses are transmitted through discs to adjacent parts,
provision for meeting expansion stresses, results of corona and thermal shock tests,
recommended working strength and any special design or arrangement employed to
increase life under service conditions.
viii) Insulator hardware shall be of forged steel. Malleable cast iron shall not be accepted
except for insulator disc cap. The surface of hardware must be clean, smooth,
without cuts, abrasion or projections. No part shall be subjected to excessive
localized pressure. The metal parts shall not produce any noise generating corona
under operating conditions.
ix) The insulator hardware assembly and clamps shall be designed for 120KN Tensile
load. The clamps shall be designed for 700 Kg tensile load. Earth wire tension clamp
shall be designed for 1000 Kg tensile load with a factor of safety of two (2).
x) The tension string assemblies shall be supplied along with suitable turn buckle.
6.0 TESTS
6.1 Routine Tests
i) During manufacture and on completion of all equipment, conductors, insulators,

clamps, connectors and accessories shall be routine tested as per applicable
standards at manufacture’s works.
ii) The suspension and tension strings, insulator discs and hardware shall be subjected
to the following, acceptance tests and routine tests:
a) Visual examination
b) Verification of Dimensions as per Cl no. 10.5 of IS: 731
c) Temperature cycle test as per Cl no. 10.6 of IS: 731
d) Puncture test as per Cl no. 10.10 of IS: 731
e) Galvanizing test as per Cl no. 10.12 of IS: 731
f) Mechanical performance test as per IEC-575 Cl. 4
g) Test on locking device for ball & socket coupling as per IEC-372 (2)
h) Porosity test as per Cl no. 10.11 of IS: 731
Acceptance Tests
a) Visual examination as per CI. 5.10 Of IS: 2468 (Part-1)

b) Verification of Dimensions as per CI. 5.8 Of IS: 2468 (Part-1)
c) Galvanizing / Electroplating test as per CI. 5.9 Of IS: 2468 (Part-1)
d) Slip strength test as per CI. 5.4 Of IS: 2468 (Part-1)
e) Shore hardness test for the Elastomer (if applicable as per the value guaranteed
by the Bidder)
f) Mechanical strength test for each component (including grading rings and arcing
horns).
g) Test on locking devices for ball and socket coupling as per IEC: 372 (2)
Routine Tests on Disc Insulator / Long rod Insulator
a) Visual Inspection as per CI No. 10.13 of IS: 731

b) Mechanical Routine Test as per CI No. 10.14 of IS: 731
c) Electrical Routine Test as per CI No. 10.15 of IS: 731
Routine Tests on Hardware Fittings
a) Visual examination as per CI. 5.10 Of IS: 2468 (Part-1)

b) Mechanical strength Test as per CI. 5.11 Of IS: 2468 (Part-1)
Test during manufacture on all components as applicable on Disc Insulator

a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanizing:
Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analyzed as per IS: 209. The
purity of zinc shall not be less than 99.95%.
b) Chemical analysis, mechanical hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection

for malleable casting:
The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for malleable
casting will be as per the internationally recognized procedure for these tests. The
sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch
Test during manufacture on all components as applicable on hardware fittings
a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanizing
Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analyzed as per IS: 209. The
purity of zinc shall not be less than 99.95%.
b) Chemical analysis, mechanical hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection

for malleable casting:
The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for malleable
casting will be as per the internationally recognized procedure for these tests. The
sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch
c) Chemical analysis, mechanical hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection

for fabricated hardware.
The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for fabricated
hardware will be as per the internationally recognized procedure for these tests. The
sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch.
iii) The following, acceptance & routine tests and tests during manufacturing shall be
carried out on the conductor.
Acceptance Tests
a) Visual check for joints, scratches etc. and

length of conductor
Dimensional check on steel and Aluminum
b)
strands
c) Check for lay ratio of various layers
d) Galvanizing test on steel strands
Torsion and Elongation test on steel

e)
strands
Breaking load test on steel and Aluminum
f)
strands
g) Wrap test on steel and Aluminum strands IS: 398(Part-V) 1982
Clauses 12.5.2, 12.7 &
12.8
h) DC resistance test on Aluminum strands
UTS test on welded joint of Aluminum
i)
strands
NOTE: All the above tests except test mentioned at (i) shall be carried out on
Aluminum and steel strands after stranding only
Routine Tests
a) Check to ensure that the joints are as per specification

b) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands
iv) The following type, routine & acceptance tests and tests during manufacturing shall
be carried out on the earth wire.
Acceptance Tests
a) Visual check for joints, scratches etc. and length of Earth wire
b) Dimensional check
c) Galvanizing test
d) Lay length check
e) Torsion test
f) Elongation test
g) Wrap test
h) DC resistance test : IS: 398 (Part lll) 1976
i) Breaking load test
j) Chemical Analysis of steel
Routine Tests
a) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands.

b) Check for correctness of stranding
6.2 Type Test
Test certificates for type tests shall be from CPRI/ERDA/NABL approved lab, as stipulated in
Indian Standards carried out on similar equipment shall be furnished. If test certificate for any
of the type test is not available, the same shall be carried out free of cost from
CPRI/ERDA/NABL.
6.3 Test Witness
Tests shall be performed in presence of Owner’s representative if so desired by the Owner.

The contractor shall give at least fifteen (15) days advance notice of the date when the tests
are to be carried out.
6.4 Test Certificates
i) Certified copies of all tests carried out at works shall be furnished in requisite no. of
copies as stated in the condition of contract for approval of the Owner. The
certificates shall furnish complete identification, date including serial number of each
material and accessory.
ii) Equipment shall be dispatched from works only after receipt of Owner’s written
approval of shop test reports.
iii) Type test certificate on any equipment, if so desired by the Owner, shall be furnished.
Otherwise, the equipment shall have to be type tested, free of charge, to prove the
design.
7.0 SPARES
The Bidder shall submit a list of recommended spare parts for three (3) years of satisfactory
and trouble free operation, indicating itemized price of each item of the spares.
8.0 DRAWING & DOCUMENTS TO BE FURNISHED
8.1 To be submitted with each copy of the Bid
i) Typical general arrangement drawing of the equipment / items.

ii) Technical leaflets on equipment / items expending constructional features.
iii) Type test certificates on similar equipment / items.
8.2 To be submitted for Approval and Distribution
i) Dimensional general arrangement drawing showing disposition of various fittings for

equipment, accessories, components etc.
ii) Assembly drawing for erection at site with part numbers and schedule of materials.
iii) Type & Routine test certificates
iv) Technical leaflets on equipment / items
v) Back-up calculation for:
a) Selection of equipment / material ratings.

b) Sag-Tension of ACSR.
c) Lighting protection system
d) Selection of rigid bus support spacing.
vi) Any other relevant drawing, documents, calculations and data necessary for
satisfactory installation, operation and maintenance.
9.0 DEVIATIONS
specification.
RATINGS & REQUIREMENTS
1.0 CONDUCTORS
1.1 ACSR Conductor
1.1.1 Reference standard : IS 398
1.1.2 Code Name : ZEBRA
1.1.3 Type : ACSR
1.1.4 Overall diameter 28.62mm
1.1.5 Stranding no. of wire and diameter :
54/3.18 (Al) 7/3.18 (St)
Number of strands Core 1
1st Layer 6
2nd Layer 12
3rd Layer 18
4th Layer 24
1.1.6 Sectional area of Aluminum : 428.9 sq.mm
1.1.7 Total Sectional area : 484.5 sq.mm
1.1.9 Ultimate Strength (min) : 130.32 KN
1.1.10 Calculated DC resistance at 20 Deg C : 0.06868 ohm/Km
NOTE – The 66KV Main Bus Shall be with TWIN ZEBRA. The equipment bay shall be Single
Zebra.
2.0 GALVANISED STEEL SHIELD WIRE

2.1 Reference standard : IS 398
Steel core-1, outer Steel
2.2. Number of strands layer-6
2.3 Total sectional area 54.55 sq.mm
2.4 Overall diameter 9.45 mm
2.5 Approximate weight 428 kg/km
2.6 Calculated DC. resistance at 200C 3.37 ohms/km
2.7 Minimum ultimate tensile strength 56 KN
2.8 Direction of lay of outer layer Right hand
2.9 Minimum tensile strength 110 Kgf/mm2
3.0 CONNECTORS / PG CLAMP ASSEMBLY / SPACER
3.1 Reference standard :
3.1.1 Clamp / Connector IS 5561
3.1.2 Spacer IS 10162
3.2 Material Aluminum Alloy A6
Continuous current carrying capacity (r.m.s) at
3.3 50deg C ambient temp. 2000A (min)
3.4 Short time current carrying capacity 31.5KA for 3 sec
3.5 Maximum temperature rise over Ambient of 50 35 deg C
deg C
4.0 INSULATORS
4.1 Reference standard
4.1.1 String Insulators/Insulator fittings IS 731/ IS 2486
4.1.2 Post Insulators IS 2544
4.2 Type Post Insulator-
Cylindrical solid
Core type,
Suspension &
Tension Insulator
4.3 Service Outdoor
4.4 System details
4.4.1 Voltage 66/72.5KV (Nom/Max)
4.4.2 Nos. of phases 3
4.4.3 Frequency 50Hz
4.4.4 System neutral earthing Effectively earthed
4.5 Insulation Level
4.5.1 Dry power frequency withstand 140KV r.m.s
4.5.2 Wet power frequency withstands 140KV r.m.s
4.6 Impulse withstand 325KV
4.7 Creepage 31mm/KV
Bus Post Insulators shall have minimum cantilever strength of 800Kg and minimum torsion moment
of 500 Kg.
FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES OF INSULATORS
Each insulator shall be furnished complete with the fittings and accessories as listed below
according to requirement
1. Suspension top fitting

2. Suspension clamp fitting
3. Conductor suspension clamp
4. Tension end fitting
5. Tension (anchor) clamp adopter
6. Conductor tension (anchor) clamp
7. Top metal fitting
8. Bottom metal fitting
9. Nuts, Cotter pin, security clips etc.
10. Forged pin, studs etc.
Other standard accessories which are not specifically mentioned but usually provided with insulator
of such type and rating for efficient and trouble free operation.
FOR
GROUNDING & LIGHTNING PROTECTION

SYSTEM
Prepared by Pronab Bairagi Rev: 1

Amit
Reviewed by AS Date: 27nd May, 2015
Tomar
Approved by VP
Volume – I Technical Specification Grounding and Lightning Protection
1.0 GROUNDING & LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM:
1.1 GROUNDING SYSTEM
Earthing Installation shall be carried out as per IS 3043/IEEE 80-2000/IEC-517. The Station
Earth mat shall be designed to meet required minimum area of cross section, current Density,
Resistance, Touch & Step voltage criteria’s mathematically before installation and shall be
tested after installation to ensure the resistance of earth mats to be less than 0.5Ohms. Bare
Earthmat conductors (Strips/ Rods) to be installed below the ground as per safe designed to
spacing in a grid pattern. Each junction of the grid shall be bonded by an electric arc welding
process. Each bond has to be painted by Anti corrosive Paint (Bitumen).All ground wires
installed in conduits shall be insulated. Bare ground conductors shall penetrate concrete
through a PVC Sleeve. Equipment shall be generally being furnished with two separate
ground pads with tapped holes, bolts, nuts & spring washers etc. Metallic frame of all
electrical equipment shall be earthed by two separate and distinct connections to earthing
system, each 100% capacity. Steel Columns, metallic stairs, hand rails etc. of the building
housing electrical equipment shall be connected to the nearby earthing grid conductor by one
Earthing. Metallic Sheaths, Screens and armour of all multi core cables shall be earthed at
both ends. Sheaths and armour of single core cables shall be earthed at switch gear end only
All ground wires installed in conduit shall be insulated. Bare ground wires shall penetrate
concrete through a PVC sleeve.
Earthing of equipment shall generally be furnished with two separate ground pads with
tapped holes, bolts, nuts and spring washers etc. Equipment ground connections, after being
checked and tested shall be coated with anti-corrosive paint.
Metallic frame of all electrical equipment shall be earthed by two separate and distinct
connections to earthing system, each of 100% capacity. Steel columns, metallic stairs, hand
rails etc. of the building housing electrical equipment shall be connected to the nearby
earthing grid conductor by one earthing. Metallic sheaths, screens, and armour of all multi
core cables shall be earthed at both ends. Sheaths and armour of single core cables shall be
earthed at switchgear end only unless otherwise instructed by Owner. Every alternate post of
the metallic fence shall be connected to earthing grid by one GS flat and gates by flexible
lead to the earthed post. Rail for transformers within the plant area shall be bonded across
fish plate and connected to earthing grid at several locations.
For prefabricated cable trays, a separate ground conductor shall run along the entire length
of cable tray and shall be suitably clamped on each cable tray at periodic intervals. Each
continuous laid out lengths of cable tray shall be earthed at minimum two places by GS
flats to Owner's earthing system, the distance between earthing points shall not exceed 30
metre. Wherever earthmat is not available Contractor shall do the necessary connections by
driving an earth electrode in the ground.
Neutral points of transformer shall be solidly earthed by means of 2 Nos 75X10mm GI flat.
Neutral Earth Electrode dimension shall be calculated by Long duration overloading of the
Soil (i.e.) 40 A/sq.mtr as per IS 3043-1987 Clause 10.3.a Each earthing lead from the neutral
of the Transformers shall be directly connected to two electrodes in treated earth pits which in
turn shall be connected to station earthing grid.
Neutral connections and metallic conduits/pipes shall not be used for the equipment earthing.
Lightning protection system down conductors shall not be connected to other earthing
conductors above the ground level.
Connections between earth leads and equipment shall normally be of bolted type. Contact
surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before connections.
All ground conductor connections shall be made by electric arc welding and all equipment
earth connections shall be made by bolting with the earthing pads through flexible insulated
cable leads. Ground connections shall be made from nearest available station ground grid
risers. Suitable earth risers approved by Engineer shall be provided above finished
floor/ground level, if the equipment is not available at the time of laying of main earth
conductor
Resistance of the joint shall not be more than the resistance of the equivalent length of
conductor. For rust protection the welds should be treated with red lead compound and
afterwards thickly coated with bitumen compound.
Earthing conductors buried in ground shall be laid minimum 600 mm below grade level
unless otherwise indicated in the drawing. Earthing conductor’s crossings the road shall be
installed at 1000 mm depth and where adequate earth coverage is not provided it shall be
installed in Hume pipes. Earthing conductors embedded in the concrete floor of the building
shall have approximately 50mm concrete cover.
Minimum earth coverage of 300mm shall be provided between earth conductor and the
bottom of trench/foundation/underground pipes at crossings. Wherever earthing conductor
crosses on runs at less than 300mm distance along metallic structures such as gas, water,
steam pipe lines, steel reinforcement in concrete, it shall be bonded to the same.
Earthing conductors along their run on columns, walls, etc. shall be supported by suitable
welding/cleating at interval of 750mm.
Electrodes shall be embedded below permanent moisture level. Minimum spacing electrodes
shall be decided by calculation referred in IEEE-80 based on soil resistivity value .If soil
resistivity is poor and desired reduction in ground resistance is not achieved by adding more
Grid Conductor Earth pits shall be treated with Permanent maintenance free artificial
treatment compounds as per IEEE 80-2000 Clause14.5d.
On completion of installation, continuity of earth conductors and efficiency of all bonds and
joints shall be checked. Earth resistance at each termination shall be measured as per
IEEE81-1983 (Wenner 3 point method). Earth resistance at earth terminations shall be

measured in presence of Owner's representatives. Thickness of galvanizing shall be atleast
610gm/sq.m or 86 microns for all galvanized steel conductors.
1.2 The grounding/Earthing material shall be Terec++ or Marconite.
1.3 Ground Electrode shall be 3M long MS rod of required size. These are to be fabricated and
driven into the ground by the side of mat conductors. All connection to the conductors shall
be done by arc welding process.
1.4 Risers are required for connecting the equipment and structures with the ground mat. These
will be MS rod, laid from ground mat to above ground level properly clamped or supported
along the outer edge of the concrete foundation. Connection to the ground mat shall be done
by arc welding and the other end is to be kept free, at least 300 mm above ground level.
1.5 All steel Structures are required to be grounded at two points from ground mat. Laying
supporting and connection at both end are within the scope of this specification.
All Earth Pits provided at the grid substation shall be interconnected with each other by MS
Rod/Flat of adequate size as per symmetrical fault current.. The GI flat shall be buried in the
earth at a minimum depth of 300 mm. Minimum ground coverage of 300mm shall be
maintained between main earth grid and bottom of trench, tunnels, underground pipes other
services / foundations. The earth grid conductor shall be run along the building column wall
etc. with adequate and suitable supports at 750mm interval, if site conditions warrant so. The
riser for equipment earthing shall be 75X10 mm GI flat. The orientation of these risers shall
be such that minimum earthing strip is consumed for equipment earthing.
All the further joints / connection of GI Flat shall be arc welded.
1.6 To ensure good welding, it should be carried out only after scratching off the galvanization,
dirt, grease etc by thorough cleaning of contact surface. After welding it will be made with
anticorrosive zinc rich paint.
The equipment connection with GI Flat shall be bolted connection. Each bolted connection
shall be taken through two numbers bolts at each joint to ensure tightness and avoid
loosening with passage of time.
In case the GI flat is to cross any obstruction, it shall be laid below the obstruction. At the
crossing of building walls, floors etc the earth conductor shall pass through PVC conduit.
Both ends of conduits shall be sealed after laying of conductor to prevent ingress of water.
Contractor shall use GI strip of following specification: - The GI flat will have minimum 610
gm/mm2 Zinc coating and minimum 86 microns thickness. The galvanization provided shall
be as per IS 2629. The galvanized surface shall consist of a continuous and uniform thick
coating of zinc, firmly adhering to the surfaces of steel. The finished surface shall be clean
and smooth and shall be free from defects like discolored patches, bare spots, and
unevenness of coating, spiky deposits, and blistered surfaces, flaking or peeling off.
All hardware like bolts, nuts, spring and flat washers shall be galvanized; Stainless Steel or
Zinc passivated shall be arranged by contractor.
2.0 EQUIPMENT EARTHING

All the equipment should be grounded with double run earth strip directly connected to earth
mat at two different points.
2.1 The table provides the guidelines for Selection of Cross section of Earth conductor as per
IEEE 80-2000 Clause 11.3.1 Equation 37 & Mild Steel as an Earth Conductor.
S. No Fault current Level (KA) Minimum Required Area of Cross Section (Sq.mm)
2.1.1 5 54
2.1.2 10 108
2.1.3 15 163
2.1.4 20 217
2.1.5 25 271
2.1.6 30 325
2.1.7 35 379
2.1.8 40 433
For various Equipments such as Power Transformer, Station Transformer, 11 KV Switch

gear, 415V Panel, Light panel, Junction box, Street Lighting pole, Metallic fence, Isolator,
Gantry tower & Electronic Earthing different cross sections of Earth conductor shall be
selected as per the fault level. For switch gear rooms, a local earth conductor of adequate
size of G.I flat may be run around the room below floor level to facilitate earthing of
equipments in switchgear room.
2.2 However the table below provides general guidelines for selection of Earth Conductor for
each Equipment
2.2.1 Description/location Size

2.2.2 Earth mat 40 mm (min) to be selected by the contractor based
on the calculations.
2.2.3 Power Transformer 100 X 8mm
2.2.4 Station transformer 50x6mm
2.2.5 11KV Switchgear 50x6mm
2.2.6 415V panel 50x6mm
2.2.7 Lighting panel 25x3 mm
2.2.8 Junction box 7/8 SWG
2.2.9 Street lighting pole 25x3 mm
2.2.10 Metallic fence 25x3 mm
2.2.11 Transformer yard fence and gate 50x6 GI flat with the help of flexible copper braid.
2.2.12 HV/LV/ LV Neutral cable box 50x6 GI flat
2.2.13 OLTC Drive mechanism body 25X3 GI flat
2.2.14 Battery charger panel 25X3 GI flat
2.2.15 DCDB 25X3 GI flat
2.2.16 Capacitor Bank Structure 50 X 6 GI flat
2.2.17 Capacitor unit and reactors 50 x 6 GI flat
2.2.18 Outdoor Circuit breaker, CT, PT & 50 X 6
CVT
2.2.19 Secondary terminal Box of outdoor 25 X 6 mm
CT, PT & CVT
2.2.20 Isolator Mechanism box, earth 25 X 6 mm
switch box
2.2.21 Gantry tower and structure 75 X 10 mm
2.2.22 Electronic Earthing Separate design and installation for all
communication devices and electronic equipments
including SCADA RTU, MOXA, Router/Switch. As
per recommendation of SCADA vendor
The most stringent size of conductor among the two tables above shall be selected
2.3 For switchgear rooms, a local earth conductor of size 50x 6 mm GI flat may be run around
the room below floor to facilitate earthing of equipments in switchgear room. This grid shall be
connected to the main earth grid at minimum two points. Size of the conductor shall be
selected considering the provisions in clause 2.1 and 2.2 above.
2.4 It is to be ensured that all the switchgears and transformers earth points/ connections are
connected to earth grid and all the main and auxiliary earth grids are interconnected at
minimum two points. With the above arrangement, the return path to the respective
transformer neutral will have a predominantly metallic path. (i.e. Cable armour >>switchgear
earth bus>>external earth flat>>earth grid>>transformer neutral.).
2.5 Where a 66 kV overhead line terminates at the substation, a metallic continuity between the
end tower and the substation earth grid should be established with two independent
connections.
2.6 The GI Flat shall be laid minimum 300 mm below the ground level but for the indoor location,
it shall be embedded in the concrete floor; 50mm below the FFL.
.
2.7 The GI flat shall be welded after scratching off the galvanization locally and thorough cleaning
of contact surface. After welding or bolting arrangement the joint shall be provided with
anticorrosive Bitumen compound or zinc Phosphate paint. Wherever bolted connection is
taken, it shall be taken through two bolts at each joint to ensure tightness and avoid
loosening with passage of time.
2.8 Details of welding, bolting arrangement for various types of joints shall be as per Indian
Standard.
2.9 Two separate and distinct earth connections shall be used for safety earthing of non-current
carrying metallic enclosure of all equipments.
2.10 Two separate and distinct earth connections shall be used for earthing of Lightning / surge
absorber.
2.11 Neutral bushing of oil/dry type Station transformer shall be connected to two independent
earth pits by two no’s separate GI strips.
2.12 Transformer yard fence, structures shall also be connected with the earth mat by 50X6 GI
Flat with the help of flexible copper braid.
2.13 All damages to the galvanized finishes shall be made perfect with zinc rich or bitumen paint.
2.14 RTU, marshalling box of SCADA or any other equipment installed in substation for SCADA
shall not be connected to the earth grid, it shall be connected to separate two earth pits
connected at two separate points of the panel.
3.0. LIGHTNING PROTECTION
DESIGN OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION
3.1 Direct stroke lightning protection (DSLP) shall be provided in the EHV switchyard by shield
wires. The final arrangement shall be decided after approval of the DSLP calculations. The
Contractor is required to carry out the DSLP calculations and submit the same to the Owner
for approval of the same at detailed engineering stage after award of contract.
3.2 The lightning protection system shall not be in direct contact with underground metallic
service ducts and cables.
3.3 A 40 mm dia. 3000mm long MS earth electrode with test links, CI frame & Cover shall be
provided to connect down conductor of towers with peak. The test joint shall be directly
connected to the earthing system.
3.4 Conductors of the lightning protection system shall not be connected with the conductors of
the safety earthing system above ground level.
3.5 Down conductors used for lightning protection shall be cleated on the structures at 2000mm
interval.
3.6 Connection between each down conductor and rod electrodes shall be made via test joint
(pad type compression clamp) located approximately 150 mm aboveground level.
3.7 Lightning conductors shall not pass through or run inside G.I. conduits.
3.8 All metallic structures within a vicinity of 2000 mm in air and 5000mm below ground shall be
bound to the conductors of lightning protection system.
3.9 In addition to Earth wires above the EHV switchyard, ESE Lightning conductor shall provides
zone of Protection. Snapping of Earth wire does not make accidental situations during
Lightning.
3.10 This ESE Lightning Protection system requires an Air terminal, down conductor, Lightning
Counter & an Earthing System. If the structure is more than 30m height then 2 no’s of down
conductor shall be used for side flashing. The Earthing system should not exceed more than
10Ω.
3.11 A 40mm dia M.S Earth Electrodes with Test Links, HDPE Cover shall be provided to connect
down conductor. The test Link shall be directly connected to earthing system
3.12 Conductors of Lightning Protection system shall not be connected with conductors of Safety
earthing system above ground level. Lightning Earth Pits shall be connected other earthing
conductor below ground level by using Equipotential bonds which will not allow Surge current
to flow from Lightning pits to other Earth pits
3.13 Connection between each down conductor & Test link shall be located approximately
2000mm above ground Level.
3.14 The Down conductor should be high conductivity bare copper tape with minimum size of 75
Sq.mm
3.15 Constructional Features
3.15.1 Galvanized Steel (Applicable for exposed G.S. flats)
a) Steel conductors shall be galvanized according to IS: 2629.

b) The minimum weight of zinc coating shall be 610gm/sq. m. and minimum thickness
shall be 86 microns.
c) The galvanized surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniformly thick coating of
zinc, firmly adhering to the surfaces of steel. The finished surface shall clean and
smooth and shall be free from defects like discolored patches, bare spots,
unevenness of coating, spelter which is loosely attached to the steel globules,
spiky deposits, blistered surfaces, flaking or peeling off etc. The presence of any of
these defects noticed on visual or microscopic inspection shall render the material
liable to rejection.
3.16 Tests
3.16.1 The Contractor shall perform all tests and inspection to ensure that material and
workmanship are according to the relevant standards. Contractor shall have to demonstrate
all tests as per specification and equipment shall comply with all requirements of the
specification.
a) The galvanized steel shall be subjected to four one-minute dips in copper sulphate
solution as per IS: 2633.
b) Zinc Coating thickness : As per IS: 4759
c) Uniformity of zinc coating : As per IS: 2633
d) Adhesion Test : As per IS: 2629
e) Mass of zinc coating : As per IS: 6745
f) Chemical Analysis: As per IS: 513 & IS: 1079
3.16.2 The accessories for GSS Groundwire such as Tension Clamps, Copper braided wire etc.
shall conform to & meet the test requirements of IS: 2121.
4.0. DEVIATIONS
specification.
NEW GRID
FOR
SCADA INTERFACE WORK & AUTOMATION
K A SENTIL
Prepared by Rev: 4
KUMARAN
Reviewed & Vishal Natani

Date: 30-03-2017
Approved by
Volume – I Technical Specification for SCADA interface work & Automation
1.0 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION:
This specification is intended to cover the supply and execute work related to interface of all
electrical equipments with RTU panel complete with all materials and accessories for efficient
and trouble free operation. In the event of any discrepancy with the listed documents, the
stipulation of this specification shall govern.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK

For substation, it is proposed to lay and terminate panel wirings / control cables if any
between the outdoor equipments such as CT, PT, Circuit Breaker, Isolators, 11 KV
Switchgear, 66,33,11 KV Control & Relay Panels, Power Transformer & its sensors – OTI,
WTI, TPI, AVR, etc, REGDA relay, Capacitor Bank,NIFPS,Smoke Detectors and Battery
Charger.
The scope of work under this category would include:
• Supply of SCADA materials - Bay Control Units, Remote Terminal Units with Basic + PLC
Licenses (Basic License - IEC 870‐5‐101,103,104, Modbus, IEC 61850‐8‐1,IEC ‐104
Master ,IEC 104 Slave + PLC License),Panels for RTU,Data Concentrator Units,Ethernet

Switches with panels,MFM,Cables- FO, CAT-6, RS485, Control Cables,Connectors and
GPS for time synchronization should be in SCADA vendor’s scope.
• Installation,Testing & Commissioning of SCADA equipments.
• Laying and Termination of armored Communication cables (Ethernet, Fiber Optic Patch
Cards/Cable,RS 485 cables) between grid devices (Numerical Relays/BCPU,
Transformer Monitoring Modules, Smoke detector, NIFPS panel, MFM, Battery Charger)
to RTU/DCU/Gateway.
• Laying and termination of control cables between grid equipments (control and relay
panel, NIFPS, Battery Units) to RTU for hardwired signals.
• Installation of cable trays with accessories or trench as required for the cabling work.
• Preparation of cable schedule, Wiring diagrams and Interconnection as built drawings.
• Separate earthing bus bars to be provided for RTU panel and it will be directly connected
to grid earthing.
• Seprate earth pit with connections for Electronic cards,gateway,Switches,DCU.,etc..

earthing.
• All internal wiring between BCU and C&R Panel terminals, All Numerical relays,MFM
(Multifunctional meters) and other grid equipment integration should be under SCADA
vendor’s scope.
• Hardware & software integration of RTU, Bay Control Units along with other equipments
viz. Battery Chargers, Multi Function Meters, Fire Fighting System Signals, Transformer
relays (for OTI, WTI, TPI, AVR, etc.),Smoke Detector Panels, Numerical Relays,
11&33&66KV Control and Relay panel signals etc. shall be in Vendor’s scope.
• FAT and Training arrangements for BSES SCADA team – Travel ,Boarding,
accommodation and local conveyance etc..shall be under SCADA Vendor’s Scope.
2.1 Cables
The following types of cables / wirings will be required for extending signals and commands.
• 2.5 mm2, multi-stranded flexible copper wire, FRLS 1.1KV HRPVC for AC & DC Supply &
1.5 mm2 multi strand cables for other internal wiring for RTU.
• Red(P)and Black(N) color cable core to be used for AC and DC wiring.
• Fiber Optic Cables (GLASS&PLASTIC Types) & Ethernet cables (CAT6) with conduit
pipe for internal connections and Armored Cables for external connections.
• 2 C X 2.5 MM2 cables for external AC / DC Power Supply
• 16 C x 1.5 mm2 for DI (Digital input)
• 3P X 1.5 mm2 for DO (Digital output)
• 2P X 0.5 mm2 Screened Armored PVC cable for external (RTU to BCUs
/MFM/BATT.CHG/Transformer Monitoring Devices) RS 485 connections.
The supplied cable shall be as a latest IS, also refer control cable specification.
Cable Gland
Single Compression cable glands (PVC for RS 485 cables & Brass for Control Cables) of
different sizes for cable entry into the DAU & DCU Panels
Cable Trays and NS cable Support
Perforated / ladder type (galvanized Iron) with cover for laying the cables.
2.2 Multifunction Meters (Accuracy – 0.5)
To extend the current / voltage / active and reactive power, power factor, etc. to RTU, MFMs,
installed in the C & R panel, should be integrated. (Make: RISHABH or Equivalent with
MODBUS). The outputs of these meters (in groups of 5) connections should be made using
twisted pair screened cable (Typically 22gauge Belden 8761 or equivalent) & two wires (A
and B) connections are daisy chained together and integrated with RTUs. All hardware’s or
protocol converters for having Modbus Protocol output should be in Vendor’s scope.
These should be installed in C & R Panel individually for each feeder/ breakers. All CT & PT
wirings to MFMs and its Configuration should be in Vendor‘s scope.
For the protection of MFMs and RTU cards against Surges and electrical leakages, it is
necessary to install Surge Protection Devices in RTU or C&R Panel and placed in between
RTU & MFM serial loops. The typical diagram for this connection is mentioned in the System
Architecture diagram. (5 MFMs per loop with SPD)
The following parameters of MFM must be available for communication with RTU.
Phase Voltages (L1-N, L2-N, L3-N)

Line Voltages (L1-L2, L2-L3, L1-L3)
Line Currents (IL1 , IL2, IL3)
Active Power & Reactive Power
Maximum Demand (KW) & Frequency
Power factor
Active Energy
THD mean current & THD mean Voltage
Neutral Current.
Phase Angles
2.3 Numerical Relays with BCU or Bay Control Protection Units for all feeders (11,33,66KV)
Numerical Relays & Bay Control Units should be integrated with Remote Terminal Units. All
hardware’s and protocol converters if required for compatibility with SCADA shall be in
Vendor’s scope.
The respective BCUs of individual Relays/Breakers will be connected to Data concentrator

Unit/Remote Terminal Units through IEC 61850 compatible industrial grade switches over
IEC 61850 protocol (RSTP Protocol with 61850 – To form a Ring Network b/w relay to relay
connections).
The respective BCU must have dual redundancy communication ports (Fiber or Ethernet
port-RJ45) for SCADA connections.
Hot Standby/Dual Power Supply Unit & Redundancy in power source for BCU/BCPU -
Possibility to increase the BCU availability by having a second power supply card in case the
first one fails , if any one Power supply card fails the other one should keep the bay
control unit continuous live.
The following signals are to be taken from Numerical Relays to the BCUs through internal
hard wiring. This list is indicative and signals should not be limited to this. Additional signals
can be taken based on this. – Refer Para 2.8 for detail signals list with data types.
Online Currents / Voltage & Relay General trip signal

All breaker,Isolators,Control & Relay Panel indications and commands
Fault current and phase indication of faulty phase viz. R,Y,B, Earth, Unbalance(O/C
& E/F Relay).
Fault Differential and Bias current in Line and Transformer Differential Relay
Fault voltage and phase indication of faulty phase viz. R,Y,B (Voltage Protection
Relay).
Post fault currents (R, Y, B phase separately) measured value & Relay Internal Fault
Fault distance (in case of distance relays - R, Y, B Phase separately)
Unbalance Current (in case of neutral displacement relay of capacitor feeders).
2.4 Transformer Signal
OTI, WTI, TPI, AVR and Transformer auxiliary protection signals should be integrated with an
RTU through serial communication (RS 485 cables) via TMD (REGDA, A-EBERLE relays)
having IEC 61850 Protocol output.
All field installations of these sensors and its wiring/cabling and configuration along with
hardware’s or protocol converters, if any, should be in Contractor‘s scope. - Refer Para 2.8
for detail Transformer & Transformer Monitoring Device signal’s list with data types.
2.5 Battery Charger
All signals of Battery Chargers should have MODBUS Protocol output and integrated with an
RTU through serial communication (RS 485) cables.
Laying communication cables through conduit pipe and battery charger signals (Soft & Hard
Signals) integration with an RTU shall be in Vendor’s Scope. - Refer Para 2.8 for detail
Battery Charger signal's list with data types.
2.6 Data Concentrator, Bay Control Units & Remote Terminal Units
For extending the signals from the grid to the Master Control Centre & Backup Control
Centre, BCUs and RTUs are to be installed. BCUs needs to be initially physically integrated
with Numerical relays of respective breakers to enable soft signals and commands for
breakers to be configured there and respectice BCU or BCPU integrated with Remote
Terminal Units through IEC – 61850 protocol. However the options for IEC-60870-103
protocol along with the MODBUS protocol option is required BCUs can be of ABB, Siemens,
Areva,Schneider Electric, etc ., make depending on the type/ make of switch gears. Remote
Terminal Units need to be installed for interface between the BCUs and Control
Centers (Main and Backup) through IEC – 60870 – 104 Protocol. The size of RTU will
depend on the size of the substation, no. of the feeders/ number of signals and command
outputs along with sufficient spares (20%) for future requirement.
All associated equipments and Supply of accessories including software &Operating tool /
multiple user licenses for RTU & BCU, MCBs for DC and AC Supply, DC to DC Converter (in
case station battery voltage level is 220 volts DC), etc. should be in Vendor’s scope.
Hardware & software integration of RTUs, BCU along with other equipments viz. Battery
Chargers, Multi Function Meters, Fire Fighting Systems, Signals, Transformer relays (for OTI,
WTI, TPI, AVR, etc.), Numerical Relays, etc. should be in Vendor’s scope.
In case of more than one BCPU,RTU,DATA Concentrator than these units must be able to
communicate with other units on internal local IPs (Ex – 192.168.0.1) other than LAN IP(Ex-
10.125.107.1) series.
Approved RTU makes – ABB ,Synergy Systems Solution,Siemens and Schneider Electric
India Limited.
RTU,Data Concentrator Unit Features & Performance capabilities
2.6.1 RTU,DCU Size and Expandability
20% Spare for RTU,DCU - Provision for 20 % (Basic IO Count +20% Spare) of the total DI /
DO signals (hard/soft) as a spare should be made available for future requirement.
Spare Ports – 20% Spare ports (Minimum – 3 to 4 No’s Serial ports are essential) for IEC
103/Mod Bus Protocol Connections
20% Spare for BCU,BCPU - Each Control and Relay panel BCU must have 20% (Basic +
20% Spare) of the particular bay DI/DO signals as a spare should be available.
Panel Size & Hardware Capacity - The RTU panel sizing should be capable of
accommodating additional 50% of the basic I/O counts by way of addition of hardware such
as modules, racks, panels, Terminal Blocks of basic I/O counts.
Software Capacity - The RTU software and database generation should be sized to
accommodate for additional 50% of the basic I/O count without requiring software or
database regeneration or License.
2.6.2 Remote database, downloading of RTU from master station/SCADA control center.
2.6.3 RTU shall have the capability of automatic start-up and initialization following restoration of
power after an outage without the need for manual intervention. All restarts shall be reported
to the connected master stations.
2.6.4 Act as a data concentrator on IEC60870-5-101/104/MODBUS/IEC 61850 protocols and

Support for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 61850/MODBUS protocols & ability to
act as a gateway for Numerical relays.
2.6.5 Security
As the SCADA system will use public domain, such LAN/VSAT/GPRS/CDMA etc. therefore it
is mandatory to guard the data/ equipment from intrusion/damage/breach of security & shall
have SSL/VPN based security.
2.6.6 Internal battery backup to hold data in SOE buffer memory & also maintaining the time &
date.
2.6.7 RTU must have the capability of time synchronization with a GPS receiver and the GPS at
the control room will be used for this synchronization purpose. In case of failure of the GPS
receiver, the RTUs time synchronization should be through the Master’s SCADA clock.
2.6.8 GPS for Time Synchronization - The RTU must have inbuilt (or) external GPS with antenna
& internal real time clock to synchronize the IEDs connected to it over their respective
protocol.
2.6.9 Main Processor(CPU in RTU) HOT Retundancy for MCC & BCC communication
Main processor (DCU) /RTU should have adequate capacity for data handling / processing
and main processor/CPU must have required number of communication ports for
simultaneous communication with Master Stations (MCC & BCC), /MFTs and RTU
configuration & maintenance tool.RTU main processor must have HOT redundancy cards
and features for control center communications.
2.6.10 Hot Standby/Dual Power Supply Unit & Redundancy in power source for RTU and
BCU/BCPU - Possibility to increase the RTU,BCU main rack availability by having a second
power supply card in case the first one fails , if any one Power supply card fails the other
one should keep the system continuous live.
2.6.11 CPU/RTU Soft Configuration Future (Communicate to multiple master stations

simultaneously on IEC60870-5-104.)
RTU/DAU must have multiple location (minimum 5 Locations) data transmission facility VAZ
Master Control Centre, Backup Control Centre, etc.
2.6.12 Protection Devices for RTU,BCPU – All modules (all Digital, Analog Input modules) and
ports (Serial and Ethernet ports) must have in-built or external surge protection devices
and optical isolation
2.6.13 Diagnostic Software & Multi user tool/License for RTU/(Numerical Relay) BCU -
Diagnostic Software tool with licensed version shall be provided to continuously monitor the
operation of the RTU and report RTU hardware errors to the connected master stations. The
software shall check for memory, processor, and input/output ports errors and failures of
other functional areas defined in the specification of the RTU. If any system tries to connect
to RTU for download/ Upload files,itshould be stored as a log in RTU.
2.6.14 RTU Panels
At least 50% of the space inside each enclosure shall be unused (spare) space that shall be
reserved for future use. The Contractor shall provide required panels conforming to IEC 529
for housing the RTU modules/racks, relays etc. and other required hardware. The panels
shall meet the following requirements:
Shall be free standing, floor mounted and height shall not exceed 2200 mm.
All doors and removable panels shall be fitted with long life rubber beading.
All non load bearing panels/doors ,top and bottom portion, rear cover shall be fabricated
from minimum 2.0 mm thickness steel sheet and all load bearing panels, frames, top &
bottom panels shall be fabricated from minimum 3.0 mm thickness steel sheet.
Shall have maintenance access to the hardware and wiring through lockable full height
doors.
Shall have the provisions for bottom cable entry.
All panels shall be supplied with 230V AC, 50 Hz, single-phase switch and 15/5A duplex
socket arrangement for the maintenance.
All panels shall be provided with an internal maintenance lamp, space heaters and gaskets.
All panels shall be indoor, dust-proof with rodent protection, and meet IP54 class of Ingress
protection.
FAN with Filters for RTU panel cooling.
There shall be no sharp corners or edges. All edges shall be rounded to prevent injury.
Document Holder shall be provided inside the cabinet to keep test report, drawing,
maintenance register etc.
All materials used in the enclosures including cable insulation or sheathing, wire troughs,
terminal blocks, and enclosure trims shall be made of flame retardant material and shall not
produce toxic gases under fire conditions.
2.6.15 RTU Grounding
The safety ground shall be isolated from the signal ground and shall be connected to the
ground network. Safety ground shall be a copper bus bar. The contractor shall connect the
panel’s safety ground to the grid grounding network. Separate grounding is created for
communication equipments and Signal ground shall be connected to the communication
equipment signal ground.
2.7 Ethernet /Fiber Switch
The Ethernet/Fiber optic switches Should be a managed switch and are intended to be
installed in the control room and shall be complaint to IEC-61850 electrical substation
networks and IEEE 1613 standards. Provisions for additional feeders on the Ring
Configuration should be provided on the same switch.
Laying of Ethernet/Fiber cables for relay/BCU port to the RTU via switch through conduit pipe
and integration with an RTU shall be in Vendor’s Scope.
Switch, Standard Features
Switch design should withstand for power substation automation applications that operate in
extremely harsh environments (High and medium voltage S/Stn environments) and it also
withstands vibration, electrical surges, fast transients, electrostatic discharge, and
extreme temperatures and humidity.
Switch features and configuration should be easy to user interface and it must directly
integrate with any other IEC-61850 devices.
The FO switch shall support Multimode fiber and single mode fiber in 10/100Mbps and 1000
Mbps ports on an SFP (simple form factor pluggable), for ease of functionality and
maintenance.
Hot Standby/Dual PSU & Redundancy in power source - Possibility to increase the switch
availability by having a second power source in case the first one fails & should be available
with 48VDC.Each PSU should be connected with a different power source, if any one power
source or Power supply card fails the other one should keep the switch continuous
operation.
20% Spare ports - Each switch must have 20% spare ports for future/back up
requirements.
Link Failure contact alarm - Failure contact alarm shall be achieved by hardware contact
that is activated when a link problem occurs.
Logs and alarms with Time Stamp - Statistics about link status alarms are to be stored with
the accurate timestamp duly tracing all events.
Advanced security features - The FO switches shall support different user levels with
different passwords, including the facility to work with different VLANs, following the
802.1Q standard, port security based on MAC addresses, possibility to disable unused ports,
authentication protocols shall be provided.
High Speed Implementation of RSTP protocol - The FO switches shall support STP and
RSTP protocols, and shall facilitate for recovery and the fault recovery times shall be within 5
-10msec per switch, always fulfilling the RST protocol.
Time Synchronization to RTU/Server and Connected IED/BCU - The FO switch shall

have an internal clock and shall be synchronized from a network SNTP/NTP server, so all
time stamped events shall be with a reliable time reference.
Tools with License - Diagnostics tool, other necessary tools with a multi user license to be
provided along with the switch.
Mounting Options - Switch should be DIN Rail Mountable & also need to quote for Optional
Wall/Rack Mountable kit.
Local USB port for emergency boot is Mandatory.
Network based distributed security by having a firewall on each port of the switch for all the
standard Industrial protocols like MODBUS, IEC-101, IEC-104, DNP3, IEC-103, IEC-61850
should be available.
The FO switch shall have the facility of Port mirroring and the user shall configure one port to
replicate traffic flows of different ports, so the system administrator can monitor the incoming,
outgoing, or all kinds of traffic that is going through the ports under study.
ITU-T G.8032 support for Ethernet Ring redundancy, ensuring fast failure detection is
preferred.
They FO switches shall sustain the stringent levels in temperature range and
electromagnetic immunity defined in the 61850-3, but also the advanced functional
requirements defined for operation with other IEC-61850 devices. The Switch should be
certified on IEC-61850, functional & Environmental specifications by KEMA.
The FO switches shall have advanced security features to be implemented to avoid

unauthorized access to the system Such as RADIUS/TACACS & VPN gateway support with
IP Sec & SSH.
2.8 SIGNAL LIST (11/33/66KV)
List of Abbreviations
AI ‐ Analog Input/Analog Values
MV ‐ Measured Value
MFM ‐ Multi Function Meter
DCO ‐ Double Command Output
DPI ‐ Double Point Indication
SCO ‐ Single Command Output
SPI ‐ Single Point Indication
RTU ‐ Remote Terminal Units
BCU ‐ Bay Control Units
Signals ‐ 11KV Out Going Feeders Digital Digital Out Put Digital Input Additional Signal
Protocol
N.Relay
Input/AI soft soft through Hard Wire to signals Type
through N.Relay/BCU RTU Hard wire to
N.Relay/BCU RTU for backup
Breaker ON √
√
Breaker OFF √ DPI
Trip Ckt Healthy √ SPI
Spring Charge √ SPI
Breaker in service √ SPI
Breaker in Test SPI
Auto Trip(86) Operated √ √ SPI
Panel DC Fail √ SPI
L/R Switch in Local SPI
√
L/R Switch in SCADA √ SPI
Relay Int Fault. √ SPI
Over Current Operated √ SPI
Earth Fault Operated √ SPI
BKR Close COMMAND
√ √
IEC‐61850
BKR Open COMMAND DCO
AutoTrip(86) relay reset from Remote √ SCO
3Phase R,Y,B ‐ Current &
Voltage,Active
√
Power,Reactive Power,Power
Factor,Max.Demand,Neu.Current
AI/MV
Fault current and phase indication of
faulty phase viz. R,Y,B, Earth,
Unbalance(O/C & E/F
√
Relay).Disturbance Records,
Fault Graphs for Remote diagnosis
purpose
AI
11 DI + Analog ,
Total Signals ‐ BCPU & RTU Measurand 3 DO 2DI 5DI + 2 DO
Values
Essential inbuilt Spare in BCPU,BCU 3 DI 2 DO

Signals ‐ 11KV Incomers Digital Digital Out Put Digital Additional Signal
Protocol
Input/AI soft soft through Input/Output signals Type
N.Relay
through N.Relay/BCU Hard Wire to Hard wire to
N.Relay/BCU RTU RTU for backup
Breaker ON √
√ DPI
Breaker OFF √
Breaker in service SPI
√
Breaker in Test SPI
VT fuse Blown ‐ Metering. √ SPI
VT fuse Blown ‐ Protection √ SPI
√
Over Current Operated(All stages) √ SPI
Earth Fault Operated (All stages) √ SPI
Under Voltage Prot.Operated √ SPI
Over Voltage Prot.Operated √ SPI
REF Operated √ SPI
IEC‐61850
BKR Close COMMAND √
√
BKR Open COMMAND √ DCO
3Phase R,Y,B ‐ Current &
Voltage,Active
√
Power,Reactive Power,Power
Factor,Max.Demand,Neu.Current
AI/MV
Unbalance(O/C & E/F Relay).Fault
voltage and phase indication of faulty
√ AI
phase viz. R,Y,B (Voltage Protection
Relay). Disturbance Records,
purpose
16 DI + Analog ,
Values
Digital Digital Additional
Protocol
N.Relay
Input/AI soft Digital Out Put Input/Output signals
Signals ‐ 11KV Bus Coupler
through soft through Hard Wire to Hard wire to Signal
N.Relay/BCU N.Relay/BCU RTU RTU for backup Type
Breaker ON √
√
Breaker OFF √ DPI
√
Breaker in Test SPI
√
PT MCB ‐ Metering operated √ SPI
PT MCB ‐ Protection operated √ SPI
IEC‐61850
BKR Close COMMAND
√ √
Unbalance(O/C & E/F
√
Relay).Disturbance Records,
purpose
AI
13DI + Analog ,
Values

Additional Protocol
Digital Digital
N.Relay
signals
Signals ‐ 11KV Capacitors Input/AI soft Digital Out Put Input/Output Hard wire to
through soft through Hard Wire to RTU for backup Signal
N.Relay/BCU N.Relay/BCU RTU Type
Breaker ON √
√
Breaker OFF √ DPI
Bank ISO ON
√
Bank ISO OFF DPI
IEC‐61850
√
Breaker in Test SPI
Master Trip(86) Operated √ √ SPI
Bus PT fuse Blown ‐ Metering. √ SPI
Bus PT fuse Blown ‐ Protection √ SPI
L/R Switch in Local √ SPI
L/R Switch in SCADA √ √ SPI
Neg.Phase.sequence Operated √ SPI
Timer Relay operated/Normal √ DPI
BKR Close COMMAND
√ √
BANK ISO OPN
√
BANK ISO CLS DCO
Master trip (86)reset from remote √ SCO
3Phase R,Y,B ‐
Current&Voltage,Reactive √
Power,Neu.Current AI/MV
Unbalance(O/C & E/F Relay).Fault
voltage and phase indication of faulty
√
phase viz. R,Y,B (Voltage Protection
Relay). Disturbance Records,
purpose
AI
18 DI + Analog ,
Values

Additional
Protocol
Digital Digital Spare signals
Signal
Signals ‐ 33 & 66KV Incomers/Out Going Input/AI soft Digital Out Put Input/Output (Hard wire to
Type
through soft through Hard Wire to RTU for
N.Relay/BCU N.Relay/BCU RTU backup)
Breaker ON √
√ DPI
Breaker OFF √
Front Bus (89A) ISO ON(In‐Case of O/D)
√ DPI
Front Bus (89A) ISO OFF (In‐Case of O/D)
Rear Bus (89B) ISO ON (In‐Case of O/D)
√ DPI
Rear Bus (89B) ISO OFF (In‐Case of O/D)
LINE ISO (89L) ON (In‐Case of O/D)
√ DPI
LINE ISO (89L) OFF (In‐Case of O/D)
Earth Switch (89LE) ‐1 ON (In‐Case of O/D)
IEC‐61850
√ DPI
Earth Switch (89LE) ‐1 OFF (In‐Case of O/D)
Earth Switch (89LE) ‐ 2 ON (In‐Case of O/D)
√ DPI
Earth Switch (89LE) ‐ 2 OFF (In‐Case of O/D)
Breaker in service (In‐case of I/D BKR) √ SPI
Breaker in Test (In‐case of I/D BKR) √ SPI
Trip coil Ckt Healthy ‐ 1 & 2 √ SPI
Master trip(86) Operated √ √ SPI
SF6 Pressure Low & SF6 Lock Out √ SPI
VT fuse Fail √ SPI
L/R Switch in Local √
DPI
L/R Switch in Remote √ √
LBB Operated √ SPI
Over Current Operated (All stages) √ SPI
Earth Fault Operated (All stages) √ SPI
DIFF.Prot Operated √ SPI
DIST.Ptot Operated √ SPI
BKR CLS COMMAND √
√ DCO
BKR OPN COMMAND √
Front Bus (89A) ISO OPNCOMMAND

(In‐Case of O/D)
√ DCO
Front Bus (89A) ISO CLS COMMAND

(In‐Case of O/D)
Rear Bus (89B) ISO CLS COMMAND

(In‐Case of O/D)
√ DCO
Rear Bus (89B) ISO OPN COMMAND

(In‐Case of O/D)
LINE ISO (89L) OPN COMMAND

(In‐Case of O/D)
√ DCO
LINE ISO (89L) CLS COMMAND

(In‐Case of O/D)
Master Trip(86) relay reset from Remote √ SCO
3Phase R,Y,B ‐Current&Voltage,Active&Reactive
√ AI/MV
Power,PowerFactor,Max.Demand,Neu.Current etc
Fault current and phase indication of faulty phase
viz. R,Y,B, Earth, Unbalance(O/C & E/F
Relay).Fault voltage and phase indication of faulty
phase viz. R,Y,B (Voltage Protection Relay). Fault
√ AI
Differential and Bias current in Line and
Transformer Differential Relay ,Fault distance (in
Distance Relay) ,Disturbance Records,
Fault Graphs for Remote diagnosis purpose
29 DI + Analog ,
Values
Additional
Protocol
Digital Digital signals

Input/AI soft Digital Out Put Input/Output Signal
Signals ‐ 33 & 66KV Transformer Hard wire to
through soft through Hard Wire to Type
RTU for backup
N.Relay/BCU N.Relay/BCU RTU
Breaker ON √
√ DPI
Breaker OFF √
IEC‐61850
√ DPI
√ DPI
TRF ISO (89T) ON (In‐Case of O/D) √ DPI
TRF ISO (89T) OFF (In‐Case of O/D)
Earth Switch (89LE) ‐1 ON (In‐Case of O/D)
√ DPI
Earth Switch (89LE) ‐1 OFF (In‐Case of O/D)
Earth Switch (89LE) ‐ 2 ON (In‐Case of O/D)
√ DPI
Earth Switch (89LE) ‐ 2 OFF (In‐Case of O/D)
Breaker in service (In‐case of I/D BKR)
√ DPI
Breaker in Test (In‐case of I/D BKR)
Differential Operated √ SPI
REF/SEF Prot Operated √ SPI
DPI
BKR CLS COMMAND √
√ DCO
BKR OPN COMMAND √

(In‐Case of O/D)
√ DCO

(In‐Case of O/D)

(In‐Case of O/D)
√ DCO

(In‐Case of O/D)
Trf ISO (89T) OPN COMMAND

(In‐Case of O/D)
√ DCO
Trf ISO (89T) CLS COMMAND

(In‐Case of O/D)
Mastertrip (86) relay reset from Remote √ SCO
3Phase R,Y,B ‐Current&Voltage,Active&Reactive
√ AI/MV
Power,PowerFactor,Max.Demand,Neu.Current
√ AI
28 DI + Analog ,
Values
Protocol
Digital
Digital Digital Out Put Input/Output Analog Input Signal
Transformer ‐ RTCC/A‐Eberle Signals
Input/AI soft soft through Hard Wire to soft through Type
through TMM TMM RTU TMM
A‐Eberle Unit Faulty/DC Fail √ SPI
Oil Temp Alarm √ SPI
Oil Temp trip √ SPI
Winding Temp Alarm √ SPI
Winding Temp Trip √ SPI
Buchholz Alarm √ SPI
Buchholz Trip √ SPI
PRV TRIP √ SPI
OLTC OSR √ SPI
MOG/LOW Oil level Alarm √ SPI
SPR Trip √ SPI
OSR Main Tank √ SPI
DPI
IEC‐61850
L/R Switch in Remote √
Auto Mode √
DPI
Manual Mode √
Fan Fail √ SPI
Tap Changer Fail √ SPI
OLTC Out of Step/Stuck Up/Motor trip √ SPI
Tap Rise/Tap Low Command √
DCO/RCO
Tap Rise/Tap Low Command √
Oil Temp √ AI
Winding Temp √ AI
Tap Position √ AI
3 Analog ,
Total Signals ‐ BCPU & RTU 19 DI 2 Command 1 DI Measurand
Values
Additional
Protocol
Signals ‐ 33 & 66KV BusCoupler Hard wire to
RTU for backup
Breaker ON √
√ DPI
Breaker OFF √
√ DPI
√ DPI
IEC‐61850
Earth Switch (89AE‐1) ‐ ON (In‐Case of O/D) √
DPI
Earth Switch (89AE‐1) ‐ OFF (In‐Case of O/D)
Earth Switch (89AE‐2) ‐ ON (In‐Case of O/D)
DPI
Earth Switch (89AE‐2) ‐ OFF (In‐Case of O/D)
Earth Switch(89BE‐3) ‐ ON (In‐Case of O/D) √
DPI
Earth Switch(89BE‐3) ‐ OFF (In‐Case of O/D)
Earth Switch(89BE‐4) ‐ ON (In‐Case of O/D)
DPI
Earth Switch(89BE‐4) ‐ OFF (In‐Case of O/D)
Breaker in service (In‐case of I/D BKR)
√ DPI
Breaker in Test (In‐case of I/D BKR)
SF6 Pressure Low √ SPI
SF6 Lock Out √ SPI
VT fuse‐1 Blown √ SPI
VT fuse‐2 Blown √ SPI
DPI
Over Current Operated (All stages) √ SPI
Earth Fault Operated(All stages) √ SPI
BKR CLS COMMAND √
√ DCO
BKR OPN COMMAND √

(In‐Case of O/D)
√ DCO

(In‐Case of O/D)

(In‐Case of O/D)
√ DCO

(In‐Case of O/D)
3Phase R,Y,B ‐ Current ,BUS PT‐01 & BUS PT02
√ AI/MV
3Phase votages.
√ AI
31 DI + Analog ,
Values
Additional
Protocol
Digital Digital
signals Signal
Signals ‐ 33 & 66KV CAP Bank Input/AI soft Digital Out Put Input/Output
Hard wire to Type
through soft through Hard Wire to
RTU for backup
Breaker ON √
√ DPI
Breaker OFF √
√ DPI
√ DPI
CAP Bank ISO ON (In‐Case of O/D)
√ DPI
CAP Bank ISO OFF (In‐Case of O/D)
Earth Switch ON (In‐Case of O/D)
√ DPI
Earth Switch OFF (In‐Case of O/D)
VT fuse Blown √ SPI
Cap Discharge Time √ SPI
Netural Displacement √ SPI
L/R Switch in Local/Remote √ √ DPI
IEC‐61850
BKR CLS COMMAND √
√ DCO
BKR OPN COMMAND √

(In‐Case of O/D)
√ DCO

(In‐Case of O/D)

(In‐Case of O/D)
√ DCO

(In‐Case of O/D)
CAP Bank ISO OPN COMMAND

( In‐case of O/D)
√ DCO
CAP Bank ISO CLS COMMAND

( In‐case of O/D)
3Phase R,Y,B ‐ Current&Voltage,Reactive
√ AI/MV
Power,Neu.Current
√ AI
26 DI + Analog ,
Values
Additional
Protocol
Signals ‐ BUS PT‐1&2 Hard wire to
RTU for backup
BUS A (89A) ON
√ DPI
BUS A (89A) OFF
BUS B (89B) ON
√ DPI
BUS B (89B) OFF
Earth Switch (89LE) ‐ 1 ON
√ DPI
Earth Switch (89LE) ‐ 1 OFF
Earth Switch (89LE) ‐ 2 ON
IEC‐61850
√ DPI
Earth Switch (89LE) ‐ 2 OFF
BUS‐A ISO OPN COMMAND
√ DCO
BUS‐A ISO CLS COMMAND
BUS‐B ISO OPN COMMAND
√ DCO
BUS‐B ISO CLS COMMAND
Total Signals ‐ BCPU & RTU 8 DI 4 DO
Essential Spare in BCPU,BCU 2 DI 1 DO
Signals ‐ Smoke Detector ‐ ALL Soft Signals Signal Protocol

Sensors,Manual Call Points Type
Integration with RTU over
MODBUS TCPIP Protocol.
All Sensors Alarm operated Signals √
( 10 to 20 Sensors) SPI
All Manual Call Points ‐ MCP‐
√
1,MCP‐2.etc… SPI MODBUS TCP/IP Protocol.
Signals ‐ Battery Digital Digital Signal Protocol

Charger Input/AI soft Input Type
through RTU Hard
Wire to
RTU
Battery CHG Mains AC Fail √ SPI
Charger A AC MCCB Trip √ SPI
Charger A DC MCCB trip √ SPI
Charger B AC MCCB Trip √ SPI
Charger B DC MCCB Trip √ SPI
Charger A/B In boost √ SPI
Charger A /B rectifier Capacitor
√
Fuse Blown SPI
Battery MCCB Trip Modbus
DC system Earth √ SPI
Insulation fault √ SPI
Charger A Current √ AI
Charger A Voltage √ AI
Charger B Current √ AI
Charger B Voltage √ AI
Battery Current √ AI
Battery Current √ AI
Signals ‐ LT Board Digital Input MFM Signal

Hard Wire to data Type
RTU through
Modbus
protocol
LT AC Fail √ SPI
R,Y,B Phase Current √ AI
Signals ‐ Fire Fighting(All Digital Input Signal

Transformers) Hard Wire to Type
RTU
SYSTEM OPERATED √ SPI
SYSTEM OUT OF SERVICE √ SPI
TCIV CLOSED √ SPI
FIRE DETECTOR TRIP √ SPI
N2 CYLINDER PRESSURE LOW √ SPI
FIRE SYSTEM ALARM √ SPI
DC SUPPLY FAIL √ SPI
MFM ‐ BUS PT ‐1 ,2 Signals (Front Data Type Protocol

& Rear BUS)
R‐Phase Current MV/MFI Modbus

Y‐Phase Current MV/MFI
B‐Phase Current MV/MFI
Neutral Current MV/MFI
R‐Y Phase Voltage MV/MFI
Y‐B Phase Voltage MV/MFI
B‐R Phase Voltage MV/MFI
MFM ‐ Signals ‐ All Feeders Data Type Protocol

(Including Bus Section/Coupler)
R‐Phase Current MV/MFI
Y‐Phase Current MV/MFI
B‐Phase Current MV/MFI
Neutral Current MV/MFI
R‐Y Phase Voltage MV/MFI
Y‐B Phase Voltage MV/MFI
B‐R Phase Voltage MV/MFI
Active Power MV/MFI
Active Energy MV/MFI Modbus
Reactive Power MV/MFI
Power Factor MV/MFI
Maximum Demand MV/MFI
Phase angle 1 MV/MFI
THD Mean Current MV/MFI
THD Mean Voltage MV/MFI
2.8.1.Comments -
Analog signals (Fault Current levels,Disturbance records, Fault graphs for remote diagnosis, etc,)
from Numerical relays needs to be confirmed by vendor before finalize the tender documents.
All the above mentioned signals are compulsory and additional signal (10%) will be considered
during detailed engineering.
Following indications data format should be configured as a DPS (Double point Status) in
Relay(BCPU).
• All Feeders Circuit Breaker ON & Circuit Breaker OFF
• All Feeders BUS Isolators (89A,89B,89L,89T) - ON & OFF
• All Earth Switches ON & OFF
Following command data format should be configured as a DPC (Double point control) in
Relay(BCPU).
• All Feeders Circuit Breaker - Open & Close
• All Feeders BUS Isolators (89A,89B,89L,89T) - Open & Close
• All Earth Switches – Open & Close.
3.0 Key Points -

1 All SCADA equipments viz DAU / DCU, MFM, Battery Charger, A-Eberle relays, etc. Should be
powered through auxiliary supply of 48 V DC.
2 Space for Energy Meter – Only Space (Length - 185 mm & Height - 256 mm with CT, PT,
Auxiliary Supply terminals & wiring) without cut out is required to install energy meters.
3 Power Supply for Routers/ Gateway (IT Equipments) through an existing battery bank via DC to
DC Converters (Input: 48 VDC/220 VDC, Output: 12 Volt DC) or as per the requirements of
Routers.
4 Any other wiring / cabling if required due to non availability of serial communication
/MODBUS/IEC 61850 protocols (with justified reason) should be hardwired and that is in
Contractor’s scope.
5 Suitable transducers with an output of 4-20 mA have to be installed in the RTCC /Battery
charger if required and the outputs of these transducers should be extended to terminal for
further extension to the RTU.
6 The C & R ,RTCC,Battery Charger Panel should have additional spare contacts (potential free)
for all SCADA signals – Refer Signal List 2.8
7 Warranty (5 Years) for SCADA products - All Supplied SCADA material should cover
warranty for the duration of 5 years & Warranty period will start after successful
commissioning of the SCADA equipments at site. If any SCADA materials found faulty
during warranty period should be replaced within two weeks.
8 Training should be provided on configuration, installation, commissioning aspects of

RTU,DCU,BCU and Numerical Relay - BCPU at your training/work center to the BSES SCADA
team (3 to 4 persons approx) & Training Expenses (Air & Local Travel, boarding and
Lodging for 3 to 4 persons) at factory/training center(4 days) comes under Vendor’s scope.
9 FAT expenses for BSES SCADA team (2 Persons) – Air & Local Travels, boarding and
Lodging to be arranged by vendor during FAT inspections.Complete expenditure (Air & Local
Travel, boarding and Lodging) comes under vendor scope.
10 Loose Spares (5%) - loose Spare Materials for following items with below mentioned quantity
to be supplied for emergency back up/maintenance purpose.
• CPU (Main Processor) Card in DCU – 1 No
• CPU in Bay Control Units – 5% of supplied qty.
• Communication Extended Module/Serial Ports for Modbus & IEC-103 protocols– 5%
• DO Contactots – 5% of supplied qty.
• DI/DO/AI/ Cards – 5% of the total IO signals
• PSU Cards in RTU – 5% of supplied qty.
• PSU Cards in Switches – 5% of supplied qty.
• Ethernet Switches – 2 No’s
• LIU Unit – 1 No
• Fiber Optic Patch Cards with Connectors - 10% of total installed cables.
• MFM – 5% of Supplied Qty.
• DC to DC converters if any for RTU Supply – 1 No.
11 Protection devices for all SCADA Equipmentes –
• Surge Protection devices installation between RTU & MFM Serial loops.
• All modules (All Digital, Analog Input modules in BCPU and RTU) and ports (Serial
and Ethernet ports) must have in-built or external surge protection devices and optical
isolation.
12 All the above features are indicative only and detailed engineering and deviation will be
analyzed just before actual procurement and with discussion through a supplier/ vendor.
4.0 System Architecture Diagram
The Tentative System Architecture diagram is enclosed for reference.
5.0 DEVIATIONS
Deviation from this specification, if any, shall be clearly brought out in the offer. Unless the
owner explicitly accepts such deviations, it shall be considered that the offer fully complies with
the specification.
85E:5
Technical Specification for
66 kV 3-CORE CABLE
Specification no - SP-EWH2-3C-OO
Preparep by: Checked by : I Approved by: Rev Date

Name Sign I Name I Si9{l7 1)Nal)1e I Sign
~--NI~ r1\. ~~ l\~J/
Supriya f?
L
I MeenakshN .~r \
,
I K.K.Alla !~\JP o 03.09.2014
Page I of 19
66 kV 3-CORE CABLES– SP-EWH2-3C-00
1.0 Scope
This specification covers technical requirements of design, manufacture, testing at
manufacturer’s works, packing, forwarding, supply and unloading at stores/site, performance of
66 kV 3Cx300 sq. mm cable complete with all accessories for trouble free and efficient
operations.
2.0 Applicable Standard

The equipment covered by this specification shall unless otherwise stated, be designed,
manufactured and tested in accordance with latest revisions of relevant Indian Standards /IEC
and shall conform to the regulations of local statutory authorities.
Indian Standards
IS 7098 (Part-3)- Specification for Cross-linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed

1993 Cables Part: 3 - For working voltages from 66 kV upto and including
220 kV
IS 8130-1984 Specification for Conductor for insulated electric cables & flexible
Cords
IS 5831-1984 Specification for PVC insulation and sheath of electric Cables
IS : 3975 -1999 Mild steel wires, formed wires and tapes for Armouring of Cables
IS: 5216 Guide for Safety procedures and practices in electric works
IS: 10418-1982 Specification for Drums for Electric Cables
IEC Standards
IEC-60228: 2004 Conductor for insulated cables

IEC-60502 (Part- Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated
2): 2005 voltages for rated voltages from 6 kV (Um = 7,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um=
36 kV)
IEC-60811: 1990 Test methods for insulations and sheaths of electric cables and cords.
IEC 60840: 2004 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories. Test
methods and requirements.
3.0 Cable Design Features
S.NO DESRIPTION REQUIREMENT

3.1 Manufacturing The cable shall be manufactured by “Triple head extrusion
process process”. The conductor screen, Insulation & Insulation screen
shall all be extruded in tandem to ensure homogeneity and
reduction of voids, in the insulation and the screening system of
the cable, whereby enhancing the life of the cable.
The cable shall be strictly manufactured by “Dry Cured and Dry-

Cooled” process.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 2 of 19
3.2 Conductor Electrolytic grade Aluminum conductor shall H2 grade, class-2 in

accordance with IS 8130/IEC 228. The shape of conductor shall
be compacted, stranded, and circular.
3.3 Longitudinal Shall be achieved by water swelling yarns/tapes in the interstices

water sealing of of the conductor. The fiber/yarn shall turn into jelly/swell, when in
conductor contact with water making the conductor water tight as per IEC
60502-2.
3.4 Semi Semi-conducting water blocking tapes shall be applied over the
conducting conductor, suitable for continuous operating conductor
water blocking temperature of 90 deg C.
tape
3.5 Conductor The conductor screen shall consist of extruded semi conducting
Screen compound which shall be fully compatible with the conductor and
extruded insulation.
Outer surface of semiconductor screen shall be super smooth,

and firmly bonded to the overlaying insulation.
The minimum Thickness of conductor screen shall be 0.8 mm
3.6 Insulation The extruded XLPE insulation shall TREE-RETARDANT and of

very high degree of purity with nominal thickness of 11 mm. The
minimum thickness at any point shall not be less or more than
10% of the nominal value. Percentage eccentricity of the
insulation shall not be more than 10%.
The insulation properties shall be stable under Thermal

conditions arising out of continuous operation at conductor
temperature of 90 deg C rising momentarily to 250 Deg C under
short circuit conditions.
3.7 Insulation The insulation screen shall consist of extruded semi conducting
Screen Compound which shall be fully compatible with extruded
insulation. Insulation screen shall be firmly bonded to the
insulation
The minimum Thickness of insulation screen shall be 0.8 mm
3.8 Make of TR-XLPE of Dow or Borealis (any deviation to above shall not be
insulation and acceptable unless and until it has been specially approved by
semi BSES prior to sourcing of compounds and manufacturing of
conducting cable).
screen
3.9 Core The ovality of the core shall not be more than 5%.
3.10 Inner Semi-conducting water swellable tapes shall be applied over the
Longitudinal extruded semi-conducting core screening.
water sealing
bedding Nominal Thickness of the Swellable Tape = 0.3 mm
The swell speed shall be greater 12mm/minute
3.11 Metallic Screen The metallic Screen shall consist of a layer of annealed copper
tape of minimum 0.1mm thickness and shall be applied over the
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3 of 19
semi-conducting water-swellable tape with minimum 10%

overlap.
3.12 Inner Semi-conducting water swellable tapes shall be applied over the
Longitudinal metallic screen again with a minimum overlap of 10 %.
water sealing
bedding (2nd Nominal Thickness of the Swellable Tape = 0.3 mm
layer) The swell speed shall be greater 12mm/minute
3.13 Core Cores shall be identified by coloured strips (Red, Yellow, Blue),
Identification applied helically / longitudinally over the copper tape.
The coloured strips shall carry the name of manufacturer

permanently printed at close intervals; this is to provide additional
identification of manufacturer of the cable.
3.14 Optical Fiber 30-Fiber optical Fiber cable, with such a construction to facilitate
Cable (as one to continuously operate at 80 deg C to be used without any
of the fillers) increase in loss beyond permissible limit.
The cable manufacture to give confirmation from the optic-fiber

manufacturer that the proposed construction is suitable to
operate continuously at 80 deg C
The OF cable will have:

a) 24 Nos Single Mode fiber as per ITU-T G.657. A1 (low
bend sensitive) with 12 Nos per loose tube for
SCADA/communication
b) 6 Nos Multi Mode Fiber as per OM-2 (50/125) in a single

loose tube for optical-DTS
The manufacturer must have adequate acceptance testing

facilities of testing optical fiber cable performance of the
complete 3-Core Power Cable post manufacturing. The minimum
acceptance test would constitute:
1. Length and Continuity of Fiber inside Power Cable

2. Attenuation at defined wavelengths (Refer Annexure E)
3.15 Fillers Balance fillers used in 3-Core cables shall be of Polyethylene

ST7 grade along with sufficient water blocking yarn to make it
water tight construction.
3.16 Laying up of All the 3-Core, along with Fillers, water-blocking yarn and optical
Cores fiber cable shall be laid in the suitable right hand lay.
3.17 Inner Sheath Pressure Extruded PE ST7 confirming to requirements of IEC

60502-2 with latest amendments.
The minimum thickness of the inner sheath shall be 1.5 mm.
A non-conducting water blocking tape with approx. 10% overlap

shall be applied over the inner sheath.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 4 of 19
3.18 Armour The armour shall be of galvanized round steel wires of minimum
4 mm dia complying the requirements of IS 3975:1999 with latest
amendments.
The armour wires shall be applied with minimum 90% coverage.
The joints in the armour round wires shall be made by brazing or

welding and the surface irregularities shall be removed. A joint in
the wire shall be at least 300 mm from the nearest joint in any
other armour wire in the completed cable.
The short circuit capacity of armour shall be 26.3 kA for 3

second.
3.19 Binder Tape Rubberized cotton tape shall be wrapped with approx. 10%
overlap over armour
3.20 Outer Sheath The outer sheath shall consist of extruded black colored HDPE
type ST 7 as per IEC 60502-2 with anti termite protection. The
minimum thickness shall be 3 mm at any point.
Semi conductive layer either extruded or graphite coating shall
be provided over the Outer Sheath.
3.21 Cable Rating The cable size shall be suitable to carry rated load current on 66
kV continuously without exceeding the maximum conductor
temperature of 90 deg. C.
3.22 Drum Length 250m ± 5 % (short lengths not acceptable except the last length
and minimum acceptable short length shall be 100m). The
overall quantity tolerance shall be as purchase order.
Manufacturer shall not be allowed to put two cable pieces of

different short length in same cable drum.
3.23 Embossing The extruded outer sheath shall be embossed with meter
marking at interval of 1 metre. The ”A” end meter marking and
“Z” end meter marking and the drum lengths shall be printed on
the drum flange along with other markings. The outer sheath
shall also be embossed with (min.)
a) Voltage designation
b) Type of construction/cable code (i.e. A2XW2Y)
c) Number of core and nominal cross sectional area.
d) Type of cable “Electric Cable”.
e) Manufacturers name & trade mark
f) Name of buyer (e.g. BSES)
g) Month & year of manufacturing
h) Batch no / Lot no.
i) Sequential length marking.
j) Purchase Order Number and Date
3.24 Joints and The 3-Core Joints and Terminations to be used with the cable
Terminations shall be with proven design and fully type tested as per IS 60840.
The Joints and Terminations match or exceed all technical
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 5 of 19
performance parameters of the specified cable.
The Joints and Terminations would be either Heat Shrink, Cold-

Shrink or Pre-moulded type.
The Joints and Terminations should have provision for

splicing/terminating Optical Fiber Cable and manufacturer to give
design for the same along with bid.
4.0 Quality Assurance
4.1 Vendor quality plan To be submitted for purchaser approval

4.2 Inspection points To be mutually identified & agreed in quality plan
5.0 Inspection & testing
5.1 Routine test Each drum length of cable shall be subjected to the following
tests
- Measurement of the electrical resistance of the conductor shall

be carried out as per the provisions of Clause 10.5 of IEC 60840/
IS 10810 part 5 The measurement shall be made on the
conductors of each cable length. The D.C. resistance of the
conductor at 20 deg. C shall not exceed the maximum value
specified in IEC 60228 / IS 8130.
- High voltage test as per clause 9.3 of IEC-60840/ 20.17 of IS

7098(Part-3):1993
- Partial discharge test shall be carried out as per clause 9.2 of

IEC Publication No.60840/20.10 of IS 7098(Part-3):1993
- Measurement of capacitance as per clause 10.10 of IEC60840/

20.18 of IS 7098(Part-3):1993
- Measurement of length, continuation and attenuation in Optic

Fiber as defined in Annexure – E.
- Test on the outer jacket as per Clause 3 of IEC 60229

5.2 Type test The cable and the associated accessories like Joints and
Terminations of same voltage, design and number of cores shall
be of Type Tested from CPRI/ERDA as per IEC 60840:2004
/IS7098-III:1993 with latest amendments .
Type test report of not more than five (5) years shall be
submitted for the same type, size and rating of the cable offered,
along with the bid.
All type tests shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 12 of

IEC-60840 / Clause 19.1 of IS 7098-III and in accordance with
the sequence prescribed therein.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 6 of 19
5.3 Short Circuit The bidder shall furnish short circuit test report of 26.3 kA for 3
Test of Armour seconds from CPRI/ERDA for the same voltage, size and design
of cable.
This short circuit test shall be preceded and succeeded by high
voltage, Partial Discharge, Armour Resistance and Conductor
Resistance Test. Test report shall not be more than five (5) years
old.
5.3 Acceptance Shall be conducted as per IEC: 60840: 2004 / IS: 7098-III: 1993
Tests and approved QA plan for each lot of cable.
5.4 Special Tests The following tests shall be carried out as special tests
Conductor examination as per Clause 10.4 of IEC-60840 for

conformance of IEC 60228/IS 8130.
Measurement of thickness of insulation as per Clause 10.6 of

IEC- 60840 and Clause 8 of IEC-60811-1-1./ IS 10810 part 6
Measurement of thickness and overall dimensions as per Clause

8 of IEC-60811-1-1./ IS 10810 part 6
Measurement of dimensions of Armour as per Clause 10.7 of

IEC-60840/IS 10810 part 36
Measurement of external diameter as per Clause 8.3 of

IEC-60811-1-1
Hot set test for XLPE insulation as per Clause 10.9 of IEC-
60840/ IS 10810 Part 30
Degree of cross-linking as per ASTM D 2768-01, void and

contamination as per 20.1 of IS 7098 (Part-3), abrasion
resistance as per BS 7835
Sheath Integrity Test

5.5 Inspection The buyer reserves the right to witness all tests specified on
completed cables
The buyer reserves the right to inspect cables at the Seller’s

works at any time prior dispatch, to verify compliance with the
specifications.
In-process and final inspection call intimation shall be given in

advance to purchaser.
In the event of any discrepancy in the test reports i.e test reports
not acceptable or any type tests(including special / assitional
tests,if any) not carried out , same shall be carried out without
any cost implication to BSES before dispatch of cable.
5.6 Test certificates Three sets of complete test certificates shall be submitted along
with the dispatch documents.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 7 of 19
6.0 Drawings, Data & manuals
6.1 To be The seller has to submit:

submitted a) Cross sectional drawing of cable.
along with bid b) Completely filled GTP
c) Type test certificates
d) Dimensional drawing for pulling eye
e) Fault level calculation
f) Complete cable catalogue and manual
g) Armour Coverage Calculations
f) Short Circuit Test Certificate
6.2 Within 15 days, the seller has to submit four sets of above
mentioned drawings along with one soft copy for buyer’s
approval.
6.3 Submittals a) Inspection and test reports, carried out in manufacturer’s
required works (R)
prior to dispatch
b) Test certificates of all bought out items.
6.4 Drawing and Standard size paper A0, A1, A2, A3, A4
document sizes
6.5 No. of drwgs. / As per Annexure – A
Documents
required
at different
stages
7.0 Shipping, Handling and Site support
7.1 Packing The cable shall be wound on non-returnable steel drums of

suitable size of minimum hub diameter of 15D (where D is the
overall diameter of the cable) and packed conforming to
international standards. The drum shall be fully enclosed by
suitable packing preferably PP sheeting. Cable shall have sea
worthy packing in case cables are dispatched by shipping lines.
7.2 Pulling eye & A cable pulling eye shall be provided at “Z” end of cable on each
sealing of drum. Suitable fillings/putty shall be used for sealing gap
Cable ends between outer sheath and pulling eye. Heat shrinkable sleeves
with the pulling eye shall also be provided. The pulling eye shall
be directly connected to the conductor and be capable to
withstand a tensile load of 30N / sq mm of conductor area. The
“A” end of the cable shall be sealed with heat shrinkable cap.
Drawing of the pulling eye shall be submitted along with the bid
for review.
7.3 Drum The following information shall be marked on the drum:

identification
label
- Drum identification number.
- Trade name or trade mark; if any
- Name of manufacturer and buyer
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 8 of 19
- Nominal sectional area of the conductor of the cable

- Type of cable and voltage for which it is suitable
- Length of the cable on the drum, with “A” end and “Z” end
markings.
- Purchase order number with SAP item code.
- Year and month of manufacturing.
- Direction of rotation of drum (an arrow) and
- Net weight of cable in drum and gross weight of cable with
drum.
- Batch no or Lot no.
7.4 Shipping The seller shall give complete shipping information concerning
the gross weight, size of each packing.
7.5 Handling & Manufacturer instruction shall be followed. Detail handling &
Storage storage instruction sheet / manual needs to be furnished before
commencement of supply.
7.6 Transit damage The seller shall be responsible for any transit damage due to
improper packing.
8.0 Progress reporting
8.1 Outline To be submitted for purchaser approval for outline of production,

Document inspection, testing, packing, dispatch, documentation
programmer.
8.2 Detailed To be submitted to Purchaser once a month containing

Progress report a) Progress on material procurement.
b) Progress on internal stage inspection
c) Reason for any delay in total program
d) Details of test failures if any in manufacturing stages
e) Progress on final box up.
f) Constraints / forward path
9.0 Deviations
9.0 Deviation from Deviations from this Specification shall be stated in writing with
the the tender by reference to the Specification clause/GTP/Drawing
Specification. and a description of the alternative offer. In absence of such a
statement, it will be assumed by the Buyer that the Seller
complies fully with this specification.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 9 of 19
Annexure – A: Scope of supply
1.0 The scope of supply shall include following
1.1 Design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer works before dispatch, packing, delivery
including unloading and stacking at site/store of 38/66kV 3Cx300 sq. mm cable as per BOQ and
submission of all documents.
1.2 BOQ as following –
Sr Purchaser Material/Equipment Location Unit Quantity

No Equipment Tag description
No / SAP code
1 e.g. Delhi km e.g. 10
2 e.g. Goa km e.g. 10
3
4
5
6
7
2.0 Submission of documents
Along with For Approval Final after Remarks

offer after award of approval
contract
Detailed 3 copies (Typical 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft
dimensional drgs) copy in CD
cross-sectional
drawing of the
cable
Type test 2 copies (Type 6 copies + 1 soft Type test and
certificates. Test, Short copy in CD sample Routine
Circuit Test test reports
Certificate and
sample
Routine Test)
Guaranteed 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft
technical copy in CD
particulars of
each type of
cable
Dimensional 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft

drawing for pulling copy in CD
eye.
Rating factors 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft

copy in CD
Complete cable 1 copy 6 copies + 1 soft
catalogue and copy in CD
Manual
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 10 of 19
3 Sec rating 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft

calculation for (Typical) copy in CD
Armour
Armour Coverage 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft

Calculations (Typical) copy in CD
List of Sub- 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft

Vendors (Typical) copy in CD
Optic Fiber Cable 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft

Manufacturer’s (Typical) copy in CD
declaration for no
increase in losses
till 80 deg
operations
Data Sheet of 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft

Optic Fiber Cables (Typical) copy in CD
a) Single
Mode
Cable (G
657.A1)
b) Multi Mode
Cable
3.0 Delivery schedule

3.1 Delivery period start date - from date of LOI
3.2 Delivery period end date - as agreed with supplier
3.3 Material dispatch clearance - after inspection by purchaser
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 11 of 19
Annexure – B: Service Conditions
1.0.0 Delhi Atmospheric conditions

a) Average grade atmosphere : Heavily polluted, dry
b) Maximum altitude above sea 1000 M
Level
c) Ambient Air temperature Highest 50 deg C, Average 40 deg C
d) Minimum ambient air Deg C
Temperature
e) Relative Humidity 90 % Max
f) Thermal Resistivity of Soil 150 Deg.C cm/W
g) Seismic Zone 4
h) Rainfall 750 mm concentrated in four months
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 12 of 19
Annexure – C: Guaranteed Technical Particulars (Data by Supplier)
Sr. Description Unit Data specified Data to be

by the filled by the
purchaser manufacturer
1 Name of manufacturer
2 Country of manufacturer
3 Type of cable
4 Standard according to which
cable is manufactured
5 Rated voltage kV 38/66
6 Highest system voltage kV 72.5
7 System frequency Hz 50
8 No of phases per circuit Nos 3
9 System earthing Solidly
Grounded
10 Rated short time current of kA
Conductor
11 Rated short time current of kA 26.3 for 3 sec
Armour
metal screen
armour and screen
14 Duration of short circuit Sec 1
current
Impulse withstand voltage kVp 325
15 1.2/50 micro sec wave
16 Power frequency withstand kV(rms) 95 for 30 minutes
Voltage
17 Conductor
a Nominal cross sectional area sqmm 300
b Type class of conductor. Compacted
Stranded
Circular
C Material of conductor Aluminum
D Flexibility class of conductor Class -2
E Minimum numbers of strands Nos
F Diameter of strands before Mm / mm
compaction. (nominal /
Minimum)
G Material of longitudinal water
sealing filling of conductor
18 Details of semi conducting
tape
over the conductor
19 Conductor Screen
a Material and type
b Minimum thickness mm 0.8
Make and grade of semi
conducting compound.
20 Insulation
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 13 of 19
Material of Insulation TR-XLPE

Nominal thickness Mm 11
Minimum thickness 9.9
Make and grade of insulation
Compound
Maximum dielectric stress at kV/mm
the conductor surface
21 Insulation screen
a Material and type
c Make and grade of semi
22 Inner water swellable semi
conducting tape
a Nominal thickness mm 0.3
b Minimum swell height in one mm 12 mm in one

minute. Minute
c Overlap % 10 min
23 Min thickness of copper tape mm 0.1
a width of copper mm
tape
b Overlap of copper tape % 10 min
24 outer water swellable
semiconducting tape

minute. Minute
c Overlap % 10 min
25 Nominal diameter over Laying mm
up
26 a Optic Fibers Cable used as Yes/No
per OF Cable specifications
defined
I. No. of Single Mode No.
fiber (G 657.A1)
II. No. of Multi Mode – No.
OM-2
26 b No. & Material of balance No./material / PE ST 7

fillers
27 No. of water blocking yarns No./material
and denier
28 Material of the inner sheath PE ST 7
29 Method of Extrusion mm Pressure
30 Minimum thickness of inner mm 1.5
sheath
31 Nominal diameter over inner mm
Sheath
32 Non conducting water
blocking tape over inner
sheath
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 14 of 19

b Overlap % 10 min
33 Armour
Nominal Diameter mm 4
No. of wires
Armour coverage
Area of Armour
Short circuit capacity of kA/3 sec 26.3
Armour
Binder tape over Armour RC tape
34 Outer jacket
Material and type HDPE type ST 7
Minimum thickness mm 3
Colour Black
35 Semiconducting coating outer Extruded/Graphite
jacket coating
36 AC test voltage at works for kV(rms) 95
insulation.
37 DC test voltage for outer kV(DC) 25
jacket
38 Overall dia of completed mm
single
core cable
39 Weight per metre of complete kg/m
Cable
40 Short circuit capacities with kA
maximum conductor
temperature of 250Deg C :
(conductor temperature of 90
Deg C at the commencement
of short circuit)
0.5 second duration
1 second duration
2 second duration
3 second duration
41 Minimum radius of bend mm
round:
which cable can be laid
a) Direct burial in ground
b) In ducts
42 Maximum D.C .resistance of Ohm/km 0.100
:
conductor per KM at 20 deg.
C
43 Maximum AC resistance of Ohm
:
conductor per KM at 90 deg.
C
44 Equivalent star reactance per Ohm
KM:
of 3 phase circuit at 50 Hz
Maximum electrostatic pf
capacitance :
Per KM of cable
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 15 of 19
45 Maximum continuous current Amp

carrying :
Capacity per circuit when laid
in ground as per the following
parameters
-Maximum continuous
conductor temperature of
90Deg C
-Maximum conductor
temperature during short
circuit of 250 Deg C
-Ground temperature of 30
Deg C
-Soil resistivity of 150
DegCcm/
Watt
-Depth of laying of 150cm

carrying :
Capacity per cable when laid
in air with ambient
temperature of
40DegC and other
parameters as per Sl no 49
47 Rating factors for ambient air

temperature
attached(Yes/No)
48 Rating factors for ground
temperature
attached(Yes/No)
49 Rating factors for phase
spacing in flat formation
attached(Yes/No)
50 Rating factors for grouping of
cable laid in ground in
horizontal
formation attached(Yes/No)
cable laid in ground in tri-foil
touching formation
attached(Yes/No)
52 Rating factors for thermal
resistivity of soil
attached(Yes/No)
53 Rating factors for depth of
laying attached(Yes/No)
54 Max. power factor of charging
KVA of :
cable when laid direct in the
ground at normal voltage
frequency at conductor
temperature at 90Deg .C
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 16 of 19
55 Max. dielectric power loss of Watt/km

cable per :
KM of 3 phase circuit laid
direct in ground at normal
voltage,
frequency and maximum
conductor temperature of 90
Deg C
56 Impedance per KM of 3 Ohm
phase
circuit :
at 50 C/s and maximum
conductor temperature.
a) Positive and negative
sequence
b) Zero sequence
57 Standard drum length of Metres 250 +/- 5%
cable (short lengths
not acceptable
except the last
length
58 The overall quantity tolerance %
59 Cable to be wound on non Yes / no Yes
returnable steel drum.
60 Normal delivery length Metres
61 Cable pulling Eye to be
provided at “Z” end
62 Tensile load withstand 30 N / sqmm
capacity for pulling eye
63 Approximate shipping weight kg
for the normal deliver length
with the drum size (flange dia.
in mm and width in mm):
64 Drum size ( Flange dia X
flange width X hub dia)
65 Embossing details on outer
jacket
66 Sequential marking at every Provided
meter.
67 Process of cross linking of

polyethylene.
68 Maximum Optic Fiber losses
i) Each Joint
ii) Per km (excluding
Joint)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 17 of 19
Annexure –D: Cross Sectional Drawing (Data by Supplier)
Pictorial Reference Description Nominal Nominal

Label Clause No Thickness Diameter in mm
No. in mm
1 4.2 & 4.3 Compacted, stranded, circular

water blocked aluminium
conductor
2 4.4 Semi-conducting water
blocking tape
3 4.5 Conductor screen
4 4.6 XLPE insulation
5 4.7 Insulation screen
6 4.8 Semiconducting water blocking
tape
7 4.9 Metal screening of a copper
tape applied in helical form
8 4.10 Semiconducting water blocking
tape
9 4.11 OFC
10 4.12 PE Fillers
11 4.13 Water blocking yarn
12 4.14 PE ST 7 Pressure extruded
inner sheath
13 4.15 Non conducting water blocking
tape
14 4.16 G.S Round Wire Armour
15 4.17 RC Tape
16 4.18 HDPE outer jacket
Net weight of cable: …………… kg/m
Name of manufacturer:
Drawing No and date:
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 18 of 19
Annexure –E: Specifications of Optic Fiber
A. Single-Mode Fiber (G 657.A1-Low Bend Sensitive Fiber)
Attenuation ≤ 0.33 dB/km at 1310 nm

< 0.31 dB/km at 1383 nm or less than attenuation at 1310 nm#
≤ 0.20 dB/km at 1550 nm
≤ 0.21 dB/km at 1625 nm
Mode field diameter 8.8 ± 0.4 μm at 1310 nm

10.3 ± 0.5 μm at 1550 nm
Zero dispersion wavelength 1300 nm to 1324 nm
Dispersion at 1550 nm ≤ 17.5 ps/nm.km
PMD Individual Fiber* ≤ 0.1 ps/√km
Cladding diameter 125.0 ± 0.7 μm
Core-clad concentricity error ≤ 0.5 μm
Cladding non-circularity ≤ 0.7 %
Coating diameter (uncoloured) 242 ± 5 μm
Coating-cladding concentricity error ≤ 12 μm
Zero dispersion slope ≤ 2 0.090 ps/nm .km
PMD LDV ≤ 0.06 ps/√km
* Individual PMD values may change when cabled

# After hydrogen aging according to IEC-60793-2-50 regarding the B1.3 fiber category
B. Multi-Mode Fiber (OM -2)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page 19 of 19
Specification for HT Cable
(38/66kV : Single Core)

Specification no – SP-EWH2-01-00
Prepared by: Reviewed Approved by: Rev Date
Tarun Dey Devendra Sharma Debabrata Guha 00 5-Jan-10

SPECIFICATION FOR HT CABLE
Index
1.0.0 Codes & standards ..............................................................................................3
2.0.0 Cable design features........................................................................................3
3.0 Quality assurance ..............................................................................................6
4.0 Inspection & testing...........................................................................................6
5.0.0 Drawings, Data & manuals................................................................................7
6.0.0 Shipping, Handling and Site support...............................................................8
7.0.0 Progress reporting.............................................................................................9
8.0 Deviations .........................................................................................................10
Annexure - A Scope of supply................................................................................11
Annexure – B Service Conditions .........................................................................13
Annexure – C Guaranteed Technical Particulars (Data by Supplier) ...............14
Annexure –D Cross Sectional Drawing (Data by Supplier) .................................19
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Specification No – SP-EWH2-01-00 Page 2 of 19
1.0.0 Codes & standards
Materials and methods used in the manufacture of Cables shall conform to the latest edition of
following –
Indian Standards
IS–8130 Conductor for insulated electric cables & flexible cords

IS-5831 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables
IS-3975 Mild steel wires strips and tapes for armoring cables
IS-5216 Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical works
IS-7098 (Part – III) Cross-linked polyethylene insulated thermoplastic sheathed
cables specification.
IS – 10810:1984 Methods of test of cables
IEC Standards
IEC-60811 Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of

electric cables and optical cables
IEC-60228 Conductor for insulated cables
IEC-60840 Power cable with extruded insulation and their accessories for
rated voltage above 30kV up to 150kV- Test methods and
requirements
2.0.0 Cable design features

(Refer Annexure – “D”)
2.1.0 Manufacturing process The cable shall be manufactured by “Tripple head
extrusion process”. The conductor screen , Insulation &
Insulation screen shall ALL be extruded in SINGLE
POINT AT ONE TIME PROCESS to ensure
homogeneity and reduction of voids, in the insulation
and the screening system of the cable, whereby
enhancing the life of the cable. The cable shall be
strictly manufactured by “DRY CURED” process.
2.2.0 Conductor Electrolytic grade aluminium conductor shall consist of
flexibility class-2 in accordance with IS 8130/IEC 228.
The shape of conductor shall be compacted, stranded,
and circular. Milliken type construction will be preferred
for cable size of 1000 sqmm or greater.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2.3.0 Longitudinal water sealing Shall be achieved by water swelling powder/fibres in the
of conductor interstices of the conductor. The powder/fibre/yarn shall
turns into jelly, when in contact with water
2.4.0 Semi conducting separator Semi-conducting separator tapes shall be applied over
tape the conductor, suitable for continuous operating
conductor temperature of 90 deg C.
2.5.0 Conductor screen The conductor screen shall consist of extruded semi-
conducting XLPE which shall be fully compatible with
the conductor and extruded insulation. Outer surface of
semiconductor screen shall be supper smoothing,
cylindrical and firmly bonded to the overlaying
insulation.
2.6.0 Insulation The extruded XLPE insulation shall be of very high
degree of purity. The average thickness shall not be
less than nominal value as given in annexure C. The
minimum thickness at any point shall not be less by
more than 10% of the nominal value. Percentage
eccentricity of the insulation shall not be more than
10%.
2.7.0 Insulation Screen The insulation screen shall consist of extruded semi-
conducting XLPE which shall be fully compatible with
extruded insulation. Insulation screen shall be firmly
bonded to the insulation
2.8.0 Make of insulation and DOW – TR XLPE or equivalent of Borealis
semi conducting screen (any deviation to above shall not be acceptable unless
and until it has been specially approved by BSES prior
to sourcing of compounds and manufacturing of cable.
2.9.0 Core The ovality of the core shall not be more than 5%.
2.10.0 Inner Longitudinal water Semi-conducting water swellable tapes shall be applied
sealing bedding over the extruded semi-conducting core screening.
2.11.0 Metal screening (if The metallic screen shall consists of a layer of copper
required to meet the short wires, followed by a copper tape applied in helical form
circuit rating)
2.12.0 Outer Longitudinal water Semi-conducting water swellable tapes shall be applied
sealing bedding (when over the metallic screening.
metallic screening is
___________________________________________________________________________________________
provided)
2.13.0 Characteristic of water a) Nominal thickness = 0.3mm
swellable bedding b) Swell height shall be >= 12mm in one minute.
2.14.0 Metallic sheath The metallic sheath shall consist of EITHER lead alloy
‘E’ seamless sheathing with minimum thickness in
accordance with Table-6 of IS 7098 Part – III (1993) OR
corrugated aluminium sheathing with minimum
thickness of 1.75mm and nominal thickness of 1.8mm,
provided with high-viscosity bitumen-based compound
coating, in conjunction with textile tape as carrier
material for corrosion protection of the outer surface of
corrugated aluminium sheathing. Further the
corrugations shall be filled with compatible filler material
to provide smooth round surface over the aluminium
corrugated sheathing, so as to prevent ingress /
traveling of water along the corrugations.
2.15.0 Outer Jacket The outer jacket shall consist of extruded black colored
HDPE type ST 7 with anti termite protection. The
minimum thickness at any point shall not fall below 85%
of the nominal thickness by more than 0.1mm. Nominal
thickness shall be 4mm.
2.16.0 Semi conductive layer over Semi conductive layer shall be either extruded or
the outer jacket graphite coating
2.17.0 Cable Rating The cable size shall be suitable to carry rated load
current on 66KV continuously without exceeding the
maximum conductor temperature of 90 deg. C.
2.18.0 Drum Length 500 Mtr +- 5 % (short lengths not acceptable except the
last length and minimum acceptable short length shall
be 250 mtrs.). The overall quantity tolerance shall be as
purchase order.
Manufacturer shall not be allowed to put two cable
pieces of different short length in same cable drum.
2.19.0 Embossing The extruded outer sheath shall be embossed with
meter marking at interval of 1 metre. The ”A” end meter
marking and “Z” end meter marking and the drum
lengths shall be printed on the drum flange along with
___________________________________________________________________________________________
other markings. The outer sheath shall also be

embossed with (min.)
a) Voltage designation
b) Type of construction/cable code (e.g. A2X2Y)
c) Number of core and nominal cross sectional
area.
d) Type of cable “Electric Cable”
e) Manufacturers name & trade mark
f) Name of buyer (e.g. BSES)
g) Month & year of manufacturing
h) Batch no / Lot no.
i) Sequential length marking.
3.0 Quality assurance
3.1.0 Vendor quality plan To be submitted for purchaser approval

3.2.0 Inspection points To be mutually identified & agreed in quality
plan
4.0 Inspection & testing
4.1.0 Routine test Each drum length of cable shall be subjected to the following tests
- Measurement of the electrical resistance of the conductor shall be
carried out as per the provisions of Clause 10.5 of I.E.C.
Publication No.60840 The measurement shall be made on the
conductors of each cable length. The D.C. resistance of the
conductor at 20 deg. C shall not exceed the maximum value
specified in I.E.C. Publication No.60228.
- High voltage test with power frequency alternating voltage applied

between conductor and sheath as per clause 9.3 of IEC-60840
- Partial discharge test shall be carried out as per clause 9.2 of IEC
Publication No.60840.
- Test on outer jacket as per Clause 3 of IEC 60229
- Measurement of capacitance as per clause 10.10 of IEC60840
4.2.0 Type test -The cable shall be of “type tested” quality. Type test report of not
___________________________________________________________________________________________
more than five (5) years shall be submitted for the type, size and
rating of the cable offered, along with the bid.
-If the manufacturer’s lab is accredited by govt./authorized body
then it shall be acceptable for type testing.
-All type tests shall be carried out in accordance with Clause 12 of
IEC-60840 and in accordance with the sequence prescribed
therein.
4.3.0 Acceptance Shall be conducted as per IEC: 60840 / IS: 7098 (P-3) and
Tests approved QA plan for each lot of cable.
4.4.0 Special Tests The following tests shall be carried out as special tests
- Conductor examination as per Clause 10.4 of IEC-60840.

- Measurement of thickness of insulation as per Clause 10.6 of IEC-
60840 and Clause 8 of IEC-60811-1-1.
- Measurement of thickness and overall dimensions as per Clause
8 of IEC-60811-1-1
- Measurement of thickness of metallic sheath as per Clause 10.7
of IEC-60840
-Measurement of external diameter as per Clause 8.3 of
IEC-60811-1-1
- Hot set test for XLPE insulation as per Clause 10.9 of IEC-60840
4.5.0 Inspection -The buyer reserves the right to witness all tests specified on
completed cables
-The buyer reserves the right to inspect cables at the Seller’s works
at any time prior dispatch, to verify compliance with the
specifications.
-In-process and final inspection call intimation shall be given in
advance to purchaser.
4.6.0 Test certificates Three sets of complete test certificates shall be submitted along
with the dispatch documents.
5.0.0 Drawings, Data & manuals
5.1.0 To be submitted The seller has to submit:

along with bid a) Cross sectional drawing of cable.
b) Completely filled GTP
c) Type test certificates
___________________________________________________________________________________________
e) Fault level calculation

f) Complete cable catalogue and manual
5.2.0 Within 15 days, the seller has to submit four sets of above
mentioned drawings along with one soft copy for buyer’s
approval.
5.3.0 Submittals required a) Inspection and test reports, carried out in manufacturer’s
prior to dispatch works (R)
b) Test certificates of all bought out items.
5.4.0 Drawing and Standard size paper A0, A1, A2, A3, A4
document sizes
5.5.0 No. of drags. / As per Annexure - A
Documents required
at different stages
6.0.0 Shipping, Handling and Site support
6.1.0 Packing -The cable shall be wound on non-returnable steel

drums of suitable size of minimum hub diameter of 20D
(where D is the overall diameter of the cable) and
packed conforming to international standards. The drum
shall be fully enclosed by continuous metallic cladding.
Cable shall have sea worthy packing in case cables are
dispatched by shipping lines.
6.2.0 Pulling eye & sealing of -A cable pulling eye shall be provided at “Z” end of
Cable ends cable on each drum. Suitable fillings/putty shall be used
for sealing gap between outer sheath and pulling eye.
Heat shrinkable sleeves with the pulling eye shall also
be provided. The pulling eye shall be directly
connected to the conductor and be capable to withstand
a tensile load of 30N / sqmm of conductor area. The “A”
end of the cable shall be sealed with filling
material/putty and heat shrinkable cap.
6.3.0 Drum identification label The following information shall be marked on the drum:
- Drum identification number.
- Trade name or trade mark; if any
___________________________________________________________________________________________
- Name of manufacturer
- Nominal sectional area of the conductor of the cable
- Type of cable and voltage for which it is suitable
- Length of the cable on the drum, with “A” end and “Z”
end markings.
- Purchase order number with SAP item code.
- Year and month of manufacturing.
- Direction of rotation of drum (an arrow) and
- Net weight of cable in drum and gross weight of cable
with drum.
- Batch no or Lot no.
6.4.0 Shipping The seller shall give complete shipping information
concerning the gross weight, size of each packing.
6.5.0 Handling & Storage Manufacturer instruction shall be followed. Detail
handling & storage instruction sheet / manual neds to
be furnished before commencement of supply.
6.6.0 Transit damage The seller shall be responsible for any transit damage
due to improper packing.
7.0.0 Progress reporting
7.1.0 Outline Document To be submitted for purchaser approval for outline of

production, inspection, testing, packing, dispatch,
documentation programmer.
7.2.0 Detailed Progress report To be submitted to Purchaser once a month containing
a) Progress on material procurement.
c) Reason for any delay in total programme.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
8.0 Deviations
8.0.0 Deviation from the Specification. Deviations from this Specification shall be
stated in writing with the tender by
reference to the Specification
clause/GTP/Drawing and a description of
the alternative offer. In absence of such a
statement, it will be assumed by the Buyer
that the Seller complies fully with this
specification.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Annexure - A Scope of supply
1.1 Design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer works before dispatch, packing, delivery
including unloading and stacking at site/store of 38/66kV single core cable as per BOQ
and submission of all documents.
1.2 BOQ as following -
Sr Purchaser Material/Equipment Location Unit Quantity
No Equipment Tag description
No / SAP code
1 e.g. Delhi km e.g. 10
2 e.g. Goa km e.g. 10
3
4
5
6
7

Along with offer For Approval Final after Remarks
after award of approval
contract
Detailed 3 copies (Typical 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft
dimensional drgs) copy in CD
cross-sectional
drawing of the
cable
Type test 2 copies (Type 6 copies + 1 soft Type test and
certificates. test and sample copy in CD sample Routine
Routine Test) test reports
Guaranteed 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft
technical copy in CD
particulars of
each type of
cable
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Dimensional 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft

drawing for copy in CD
pulling eye.
Rating factors 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft

copy in CD
Complete cable 1 copy 6 copies + 1 soft
catalogue and copy in CD
Manual
1 Sec rating 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 soft

calculation for (Typical) copy in CD
metal sheath
and copper
screen (if
applicable)

___________________________________________________________________________________________
Annexure – B Service Conditions
1.0.0 Mumbai Atmospheric conditions

a) Average grade atmosphere : Heavily polluted , salt Laden, dusty, humid with
possibility of condensation
Maximum altitude above sea 1000 M
level
b) Ambient Air temperature Highest 45 deg C, Average 35 deg C
Minimum ambient air deg C
temperature
c) Relative Humidity 95 % Max
d) Thermal Resistivity of Soil 150 Deg.C cm/W
e) Seismic Zone 3
f) Rainfall 3000 mm concentrated in four months

Maximum altitude above sea 1000 M
level
Minimum ambient air Deg C
temperature
d) Thermal Resistivity of Soil 150 Deg.C cm/W
e) Seismic Zone 4
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Annexure – C Guaranteed Technical Particulars (Data by Supplier)

2 Country of manufacturer
3 Type of cable
4 Standard according to which cable
is manufactured
5 Rated voltage kV 38/66
6 Highest system voltage kV 72.5
7 System frequency Hz 50
8 No of phases per circuit Nos 3
9 System earthing Solidly
grounded
conductor
11 Rated short time current of metal kA
sheath (alone)
12 Rated short time current of metal kA
screen (if provided)
13 Rated short time current of metal kA 19
sheath and screen
14 Duration of short circuit current Sec 1
15 Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50 kVp 325
micro sec wave
16 Power frequency withstand kV(rms) 140
voltage
17 Conductor
a Nominal cross sectional area sqmm 1000 / 630
b Type class of conductor. Compacted
Stranded
Circular
c Material of conductor Aluminum
d Flexibility class of conductor Class -2
e Minimum numbers of strands Nos
f Diameter of strands before Mm / mm
compaction. (nominal / Minimum)
g Material of longitudinal water
sealing filling of conductor
18 Details of semi conducting tape
over the conductor
19 Conductor Screen
a Material and type
___________________________________________________________________________________________

19 Insulation
a Material of Insulation XLPE
B Nominal thickness Mm 11
C Minimum thickness 9.9
Make and grade of insulation
compound
Maximum dielectric stress at the kV/mm
conductor surface
20 Insulation screen
a Material and type
21 Inner water swellable tape
a Minimum swell height in one mm 12 mm in one
minute. minute
22 Copper wire screening and the
copper tape (if required to meet
the short circuit rating)
a Number of wire Nos
B Diameter of wire mm
c Thickness and width of copper mm / mm

tape
23 outer water swellable tape (if mm
required)
minute. minute
24 Nominal diameter under metal mm
sheath
25 Material of the metal sheath Lead alloy E
or
corrugated
aluminium(with
corrosion
protection &
corrugation
filling)
26 Minimum thickness of lead alloy mm 2.2
“E” sheath
27 Minimum thickness of Corrugated mm 1.75
Aluminium sheath
28 Nominal radial clearance allowed mm As per mfg.
under metal sheath ( in case of stnd.
corrugated aluminium sheathing)
29 Nominal diameter over metal mm
sheath
___________________________________________________________________________________________

30 Outer jacket
a Material and type HDPE type ST 7
c Nominal thickness mm 4
d Anti termite treated? Yes / No
31 Material of semi-conductive Extruded
coating/extrusion over the outer or
jacket Graphite
coating
32 AC test voltage at works for KV(rms) 90
insulation.
33 DC test voltage at works for outer KV (DC) 25
jacket.
41 Overall dia of completed single mm
core cable
42 Weight per metre of complete Kg/m
cable
43 Short circuit capacities with kA
maximum conductor temperature
of 250Deg C :
(conductor temperature of 90 Deg
C at the commencement of short
circuit)
0.5 second duration
1 second duration
2 second duration
3 second duration
44 Minimum radius of bend round mm

:
which cable can be laid
a) Direct burial in ground
b) In ducts
45 Maximum D.C .resistance of Ohm/km 0.0469 for 630

: sqmm and
conductor per KM at 20 deg. C 0.0291 for
1000 sqmm
Cable.
46 Maximum AC resistance of Ohm
:
conductor per KM at 90 deg. C
47 Equivalent star reactance per KM Ohm
:
of 3 phase circuit at 50 Hz
48 Maximum electrostatic pf
capacitance :
Per KM of cable

___________________________________________________________________________________________

carrying :
Capacity per circuit when laid in
ground as per the following
parameters (with screens cross
bonded)
-Maximum continuous conductor
temperature of 90Deg C
-Maximum conductor temperature
during short circuit of 250 Deg C
-Ground temperature of 30 DegC
-Soil resistivity of 150DegC-
cm/Watt
-Depth of laying of 150cm
a. In tri-foil touching formation

b. In flat formation with d+70cm
carrying :
Capacity per cable when laid in air
with ambient temperature of
40DegC and other parameters as
per Sl no 49 (with screens cross
bonded)
a. In tri-foil touching formation

b. In flat formation with d+70cm
51 Rating factors for ambient air
temperature attached(Yes/No)
52 Rating factors for ground
temperature attached(Yes/No)
53 Rating factors for phase spacing
in flat formation attached(Yes/No)
cable laid in ground in horizontal
formation attached(Yes/No)
cable laid in ground in tri-foil
touching formation
attached(Yes/No)
56 Rating factors for thermal
resistivity of soil attached(Yes/No)
57 Rating factors for depth of laying
attached(Yes/No)
58 Max. power factor of charging
KVA of :
cable when laid direct in the
ground at normal voltage
frequency at conductor
temperature at 90Deg .C
___________________________________________________________________________________________

59 Max. dielectric power loss of cable Watt/km
per :
KM of 3 phase circuit laid direct in
ground at normal voltage,
frequency and maximum
conductor temperature of 90 Deg
C
60 Sheath loss of cable per KM of 3 Watt/km
phase :
circuit at normal voltage frequency
at maximum continuous current
rating.
a) Laid direct in ground
b) Drawn into ducts
c) Installed in air
61 Impedance per KM of 3 phase Ohm
circuit :
at 50 C/s and maximum conductor
temperature.
a) Positive and negative
sequence
b) Zero sequence
62 Standard drum length of cable Metres 500 +/- 5%
(short lengths
not acceptable
except the last
length
63 The overall quantity tolerance %
64 Cable to be wound on non Yes / no Yes

returnable steel drum.
65 Normal delivery length Metres
66 Cable pulling Eye to be provided
at “Z” end
67 Tensile load withstand capacity for 30 N / sqmm
pulling eye
68 Approximate shipping weight for kg
the normal deliver length with the
drum size (flange dia. in mm and
width in mm):
69 Drum size ( Flange dia X flange

width X hub dia)
70 Embossing details on outer jacket
71 Sequential marking at every Provided
meter.
72 Process of cross linking of
polyethylene.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Annexure –D Cross Sectional Drawing (Data by Supplier)
Pictorial Reference Description Nominal Nominal

Label No. Clause No Thickness Diameter in mm
in mm
1 4.2 & 4.3 Compacted, stranded,
circular aluminium conductor
2 4.4 Semi-conducting separator
tape
3 4.5 Conductor screen
4 4.6 XLPE insulation
5 4.7 Insulation screen
6 4.8 Inner longitudinal water
sealing bedding
7 4.9 Metal screening of copper
wire followed by a copper
tape applied in helical form
(if required)
8 4.10 Outer longitudinal water
sealing bedding (if required)
9 4.11 Metallic sheath (Lead Alloy
“E” sheath or corrugated
aluminium sheathing with
coating and filling)
10 4.12 HDPE outer jacket
11 4.13 Semi-conductive
extrusion/Graphite coating
Net weight of cable : …………… kg/m
Name of manufacturer:
Drawing No and date:
___________________________________________________________________________________________
SP-EWHP-01- R4
Index [R4]
Page
Revision Record …………………………… 3
General Specification ……………………… 5
Annexures:
Annexure A: ………………………… 18
Scope, Documentation and Delivery Schedule
Annexure B: ………………………… 20
General Technical Particulars (GTP)
Annexure C: [R4] ………………………… 27

List of R-Infra approved Sub-Vendors
Annexure D : [R4] ………………………… 29

Service Conditions
Annexure E: ………………………… 30
(Attachments)
a) General Arrangement Drawing for

Pulling-eye Assembly
b) General Arrangement Drawing for

End-sealing Cap
Annexure F: [R4] ………………………… 33

(Attachment)
R-Infra format (typical) for
Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) for H. T. Cables
Annexure G: [R4] ………………………… 42

Testing and manufacturing process
requirements w. r. t. TR- XLPE insulation
Page 2 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
Revision Record
Note:
Revisions made in R4 are marked by symbol [R4] at the respective text or drawing
throughout the Specification.
[R4]
Rev. Revision Item/ clause Page No. Nature of Change Approved

No. Date no: by
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 1.0.0 , 5 IS 0462 (Part1)/1983 - added AM
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 1.0.0 , 5 IEC 332 - added AM
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.0.0 , 5 Cable Code AM

GTP 5.0 - added
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.0.0 , 5 For 33 kV 3-core Cables only AM
armour strips (not armour wires).
GTP 5.0
(Annexure-B)
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.0.0 5 1c x 630 sq. mm. Cables AM
- added.
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.1 7 Copper conductor - deleted. AM
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.1 7 Conductor Al grade H4 - deleted AM
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.1, 7 “Longitudinal Water Blocking AM
GTP 8.0 Arrangement” within conductor -
added
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.3, 7 Eccentricity check with regard to AM
GTP-10.0 Insulation - added
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.4, 8 Ovality check on core (over outer AM
GTP-11A.0 semi-con) - added
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.4A , 8 For 11 kV Cables also : AM
GTP 28.0 “Dry-cure process only”
(no moisture cure)
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.6 , 9 Colour strips to carry AM
GTP 11C manufacturer’s name also.
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.6 9 Copper tape arrangement - AM
added
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.7 9 Properties of PP filler - added AM
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.10 9 Zero negative tolerance for AM

diameter of armour wire - added
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.12 10 Anti-rodent properties for outer AM
sheath - added
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.12 10 Ovality check over completed AM
cable - added.
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.12, 10 FRLS properties for outer sheath, AM
GTP 15.0 when required - added
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.12 10-11 Details of Embossing AM
- revised
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 4.0.0 12 R- Infra QAP detail added AM
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 4.0.0 12 Strippability Test added in AM
Routine Test and Acceptance
Test.
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 4.0.0 12 Minimum lot size of Cables for AM
Page 3 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
raising Inspection Call - added

R4 09.03.12 Cl. 4.0.0 13 Water Penetration Test (WPT) AM
- added
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 4.0.0 13 Make & Grade of critical items AM
used during manufacture to be
stated in TC - added
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 5.0.0, 14 Cross-sectional drawing AM
GTP 18A.0 - added
(required details mentioned)
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 7.0.0 , 15-16 a) Required Packing details AM
GTP 18.0 mentioned.
b) Drum Identification markings -
revised
c) M. S. Spindle required for
drums - added
f) Cable drum handling added
R4 09.03.12 Annexure - A 18 a) Document Submission AM
- revised
b) Delivery Schedule - added
R4 09.03.12 Annexure-B 20 One consolidated GTP format is AM
(GTP) prepared, instead of earlier
separate GTPs for different types
of cables.
R4 09.03.12 Annexure-B 20 GTP generally revised as per AM
(GTP) revised clauses.
R4 09.03.12 Annexure-B 21 Longitudinal Water blocking AM
GTP 8H.0 arrangement added
R4 09.03.12 Annexure-B 21 Conductor Screen thickness AM
GTP 9.0 revised to 0.5 min.
R4 09.03.12 Annexure-B 22 Approval for Pre-slitted w. s. AM
(GTP) – tapes from sub-vendors
11B.0 necessary. - added
R4 09.03.12 Annexure-B 22 Thickness of Copper Tape AM
GTP – 11D.0 increased from 0.06 to 0.1 mm
R4 09.03.12 Annexure-B 23 Inner Sheath – min thickness for AM
(GTP) - 13.0 11 kV, 1cx1000 sq.mm. increased
from 0.6 to 0.7 mm
R4 09.03.12 Annexure-B 24 Overall order tolerance - added AM
(GTP) –
17A.0
R4 09.03.12 Annexure-C , 27 R-Infra Approved Sub-Vendors AM
Cl. 2.1.3 , List - added
GTP-31.0
R4 09.03.12 Annexure-D 29 Service Conditions AM
– added.
R4 09.03.12 Annexure-E 31-32 For Pulling-eye Assembly and AM
Sealing-end Cap, new drawings
added.
R4 09.03.12 i) Annexure-F 34 to 41 QAP format - added. AM
(QAP)
ii) Cl. 4.0.0
iii) GTP-30.0
R4 09.03.12 Cl. 2.1.3 8 Introduction of “water-tree AM
retardant” property for XLPE
GTP 10.0-G 21 insulation
R4 09.03.12 Annexure-G 42 Introduction of “water-tree AM
retardant” property for XLPE
insulation
Page 4 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
1.0.0 Codes & Standards
The cables shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the
following National Standards and IEC Standards.
National Standards
IS 7098 Part-2 Cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated PVC sheathed cables
for working voltages from 3.3 kV up to and including 33 kV.
IS 5831 : 1984 PVC insulation & sheath of electric cables.
IS 10810 : 1984 Methods of test for cables.
IS 8130 : 1984 Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.
IS 3975 : 1999 Mild steel wires, formed wires and tapes for armouring of cables.
IS 0462 (Part 1) / 1983 Fictitious Calculation Method for determination of dimensions of
protective covering of cables
International Standards
IEC 60183 Guide to the selection of high voltage cables

IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables. Guide to the dimensional limits of
circular conductors.
IEC 60332 - 3 Tests on electric cables under fire conditions.
Part 3: Tests on bunched wires or cables.
IEC 60502 - 2 Power cables for rated voltages from 6 kV (Um = 7.2 kV) up to 30
kV (Um = 36 kV)
IEC 60811 Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of
Pts 1 through 5
electric cables.
IEC 885 Electric test methods for electric cables.
Pts 1 through 3
IEC 28 International Standard of Resistance for Copper
IEC 332 Test on Electric Cables under fire conditions
2.0.0 Cable Construction Features
This Specification generally covers following types / sizes of XLPE H. T. Cables

used in R-Infra network in Mumbai Discom area, mostly under-ground (buried, with
Page 5 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
chances of flooding by water) or for laying on racks, in ducts, trenches, conduits,

and so on.
Note: (Ref.: Table stating Cable sizes given below.)
Cable Code: [R4]

As per IS, cable designations comprise of following codes / options, as applicable
for this Specification:
(N.A. - Not applicable for Specification)
- (with Copper conductor) (N.A.) [R4]

A Aluminium conductor
--------------------------------------------------------
2X XLPE insulation
--------------------------------------------------------
W Steel round Wire armour (N.A.)
WW Double steel round Wire armour (N.A.)
Wa Non-magnetic round Wire armour
F Steel formed wire (strip) armour
FF Double steel formed wire (strip) armour (N.A.)
Fa Non-magnetic formed wire (strip) armour (N.A.)
- (“un-armoured” or without armour) (N.A.)
--------------------------------------------------------
Y PVC outer sheath
Conductor Cable Code
Sr.
Description
No. Material
[R4]
1. 11 kV, 3c x 150 sq. mm. Al A 2X F Y
2. 11 kV, 3c x 300 sq. mm. Al A 2X F Y
3. 33 kV, 3c x 400 sq. mm. Al A 2X F Y
4. 33 kV, 1c x 630 sq. mm. [R4] Al A 2X Wa Y
5. 11 kV, 1c x 1000 sq. mm. Al A 2X Wa Y
6. 33 kV, 1c x 1000 sq. mm Al A 2X Wa Y
Page 6 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
Description of each item mentioned in the Specification (the text, BOQ, GTP or any
site specific requirement) shall be followed, along with IS: 7098 – Part 2.
2.1.1 Conductor a) Electrolytic Grade Stranded Aluminium

Conductor
[R4]
b) Grade: H2 as per IS: 8130 / 1984 (For Al)
[R4]
c) Stranded, compacted and circular in shape
d) Class 2
e) “Longitudinal Water-Blocking Arrangement” (or
water-tight construction or water barrier
protection) shall be provided within the
Conductor. [R4]
i) As per manufacturer’s procedures, 100 %
water-tight conductor shall be achieved.
iii) Make & Type of materials to be used (i.e.
Water-swellable tapes / yarn / powder,
etc.) shall also be stated in the List of Sub-
Vendors for pre-order approval.
f) All detailed constructional features shall be shown
in the cross-sectional drawing.
2.1.2 Conductor Screen Extruded semi-conducting material.

(Also refer Cl. 2.1.3.)
(Tapes are not acceptable)
2.1.3 Insulation a) Extruded XLPE (Cross-Linked Poly-Ethylene)

Insulation, with water-tree retardant (WTR)
property[R4]
b) The required compound used shall be from R-
Infra-approved sub-vendors and not from any
other (refer Annexure – C). [R4]
c) Uniform thickness of insulation shall be within
the permissible values as per IEC Standards;
Page 7 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
eccentricity check shall be carried out to ensure

this. [R4]
d) Insulation Color : natural
2.1.4 Insulation Screen a) Freely-strippable semi-conducting screen, which

should not require application of heat for its
removal.
(Refer Cl. 2.1.3.)
b) Text “Do not Heat - Freely Strippable” to be
printed on insulation screen (at every 600 mm
interval).
c) Round shape over the outer semi-con shall be
within the permissible limits as per IEC
standards; Ovality check shall be carried out to
ensure this. [R4]
d) Compound used shall be suitable for the
operating temperature of the Cable and shall be
compatible with the insulation used. [R4]
2.1.4A XLPE Process

2.1.4A-1 11 KV Dry Cure process only. [R4]
2.1.4A-2 33 KV Dry Cure process only.
2.1.4A-3 Extrusion It is desirable that Conductor Screen, Insulation and
[R4] Insulation Screen shall be extruded simultaneously,
in a Single One-Time Process (i.e. as a triple-head
extrusion) to ensure homogeneity of layers over the
conductor, and absence of voids.
However, Tandem Extrusion (1+2) is also acceptable
2.1.4A-4 Make of Compounds for Any deviation from Approved Makes mentioned in
Insulation and Semi- Annexure-C shall not be acceptable, unless the
conducting deviation has been specifically approved by R-Infra,
prior to sourcing the compounds and taking up
manufacturing of cable.
2.1.5 Water-Swellable Tape a) Semi-Conducting Water-Sellable Tape shall be

provided, under the copper tape, on each core.
Page 8 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
b) Nominal thickness : 0.3 mm

c) Weight: 118 gm / sq. m apprx.
d) Swell height: ≥ 12 mm in 1 min.
e) Compatible to strippable / non-strippable semi-
con, over which it is applied.
2.1.6 Core Identification a) For 3-core cables, cores shall be identified by

coloured strips (Red, Yellow, Blue), applied
helically / longitudinally below the copper tape.
The coloured strips shall carry the name of
manufacturer permanently printed at close intervals;
this is to provide additional identification of
manufacturer of the cable. [R4]
2.1.6A Copper Tape Copper Tape shall be applied helically over the layer
formed after application of insulation screen, water-
swellable tape and identification strip. [R4]
2.1.7 Filler a) All interstices, including center interstices shall

be filled by PP filler.
b) PP Filler shall be non-hygroscopic, not having
any effect on other compounds used, stable at
cable temperatures, etc. [R4]
c) PVC filler is not acceptable.
d) Filler is not applicable for single-core cables.
2.1.8 Binder Tape As per manufacturer’s standard
2.1.9 Inner Sheath Extruded Inner Sheath of Black PVC type ST-2
(IS 5831)
2.1.10 Armour a) For 3-core Cables :

Galvanised Steel flat strip armour
b) For 1-core Cables :
Non-magnetic round wire armour
Page 9 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
(hard-drawn aluminium wire)

c) Minimum area of coverage of armouring shall be
90 % (min.). At any time, the gap between any
two adjacent armour strips / wires shall not be
more than the width of strip / diameter of wire.
d) Zero negative tolerance is for :
• Thickness of armour strip
• Diameter of armour wire [R4]
2.1.11 Binder Tape Rubberised cotton tape
2.1.12 Outer Sheath a) Extruded outer sheath of PVC (ST-2 as per IS

5831) with termite-repellant and anti-rodent
properties. [R4]
(Outer Sheath shall be FRLS-type, if chosen by
purchaser.) [R4]
b) Shape of the cable over the outer sheath shall
be circular, when manufactured / completed.
Regular Ovality check shall be carried out at
factory, to detect any abnormality.
Manufacturing quality shall be such that cable
will retain its circular shape, even after it is laid
at site. [R4]
c) The Outer Sheath shall be embossed with
following minimum text : [R4]
1. The voltage designation
2. Type of construction / cable code
(e.g. A2XFY)
3. Manufacturer’s Name and Trade-mark
4. Number of cores and nominal cross-
sectional area of conductor
5. Progressive (sequential) length of cable at
every metre, starting from zero for every
drum.
Colour filled in for the progressive marking,
Page 10 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
shall be with proper contrast in colouring.

6. Name of buyer / purchaser, R-Infra
(Reliance Infrastructure Ltd.)
7. Month & Year of manufacturing
8. IS reference, i.e. IS : 7098
9. Batch No. / Lot No.
(For traceability purpose, in case of any, in
case of any manufacturing defect or
otherwise arising in the cable in future.)
10. Purchase Order Number & date
11. Word ‘ FRLSH ’, in case the cable is of
FRLSH type. [R4]
2.1.13 Pulling-eye Assembly a) A cable pulling-eye assembly Drg. No.

and MISC/E/4-1131/1698 (see Annexure-E) shall be
Sealing-end Cap provided at the loose end (outer end) of the
(for Cables) cable on each drum. Sealing material shall be
filled in inside the spaces / gaps between the
pulling-eye assembly and cable outer sheath.
Further, a heat-shrinkable sleeve shall be
provided over the pulling-eye assembly and
outer sheath of cable.
b) Other end (inner end) of the cable shall be
sealed as per MISC/E/4-1131/1699 (see
Annexure-E.) One PVC cap with Polyurethane
compound shall be provided as primary sealing
and heat-shrink end-cap shall form a secondary
sealing over the PVC cap.
3.0.0 (This number not used.)
4.0.0 Testing & Inspection Tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS 7098
(Part-2).
a) Type Tests 1. Cables must be of type tested quality. Type Test
Reports shall be submitted for the type, size and
Page 11 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
rating of cable offered in the bid.

2. If the manufacturer’s laboratory is accredited by
govt. /authorized body, then it shall be
acceptable for type testing.
3. Type test on one cable drum of each type/rating,
from the first lot, shall be conducted at Govt.-
approved / Internationally accredited labs.
b) R-Infra QAP In general, all tests mentioned in the R-Infra QAP
(Typical) (Characteristics – Typical) mentioned in Annexure-F
[R4] shall be included in the Routine Tests, Type Tests
and Acceptance Tests stated above.
c) Routine Tests 1. Measurement of Electrical Resistance
2. HV Test with power frequency AC voltage
3. PD test
4. “Strippability Test” at both the ends of cable for
each drum, to check the freely-strippable
property of the Insulation Screen (outer semi-
con). [R4]
Test results from the above tests must appear in
the documents forwarded by the vendor for
Inspection call / waival.
d) Inspection 1. The Buyer reserves the right to witness all tests
specified on completed cables.
2. The Buyer reserves the right to inspect cables at
Sellers works at any time prior to dispatch, to
verify compliance with the specifications.
3. In-process (stage inspection) and final
inspection call intimation shall be given
sufficiently in advance to the purchaser.
4. Minimum lot size of Cables to be offered for
inspection shall be mutually agreed between
Purchaser and Vendor, before placing the order.
Vendor shall raise inspection call only after a
minimum lot size is ready and with due factory
routine tests already carried out. [R4]
e) Acceptance Tests Acceptance Tests shall be conducted as per Cl. 18.2
Page 12 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
of IS 7098 (Part-2) and the approved Quality

Assurance Plan (QAP) for each lot of cables.
Following tests shall also be carried out during the
Acceptance Tests :
a) “Wafer Boil Test” for checking integrity of semi-
conducting layers.
b) “Void-and-contamination Test” for the Insulation
c) “Strippability Test” at both the ends of cable for
each drum, to check freely-strippable property of
the Insulation Screen (outer semi-con). [R4]
d) “Water Penetration Test (WPT)”, as per
applicable IEC standards, to check adequacy of
water-blocking arrangement provided inside the
conductor. [R4]
Number of times WPT is to be carried out,
during Acceptance Test, shall be mutually
agreed and generally determined as follows :
a) For the order Qty. < 50 kms
: One no. WPT
b) For the order Qty. < 50 kms
: Two times WPT [R4]
f) Test Certificates (TC) Three sets of complete Test Certificates (Routine
tests and Acceptance tests) shall be submitted along
with the delivery of cables.
Soft copy of the TCs shall be separately e-mailed to
the Purchaser. [R4]
Note : [R4]
Make/grades of critical materials (such as, for
conductor screen, insulation, insulation screen, etc.),
actually used during manufacturing of cables for
order-on-hand, shall be clearly stated in the TCs
forwarded by the Manufacturer, enabling references
in future.
5.0.0 Drawing, Data and a) Refer Annexure-A regarding Document

Manuals Submission.
Page 13 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
b) Cross-Sectional Drawing shall show every

feature of construction, including the thickness /
diameter over every layer. This drawing shall
also state the text to be embossed over the
outer sheath - i.e. type/size, etc. of the cable,
drum no./lot no., sequential marking over every
meter, printing text on outer semi-con (“Do Not
Heat-Freely Strippable”), font sizes to be used,
additional text, if any, etc. Also, drum details,
markings to be made on both sides of the drum,
and so on. [R4]
5.0.1 Documents to be The vendor shall submit :

submitted along with bid a) Cross-sectional drawing [R4]
b) GTP (all data to appear)
c) Type Test certificates
e) Fault Level Calculation for armour and copper
tape screen
f) Complete Cable Catalogue and Manual
g) Armour Coverage Calculation
5.0.2 Documents after award Within 15 days, the seller has to submit four sets of
of contract above-mentioned drawings, along with one soft copy
for buyer’s approval.
5.0.3 Final As-Built Drawings One soft copy of all documents, including type &
routine test certificates.
6.0.0 Drum length & Cable length per drum

tolerance
6.0.1 a) 11 KV, Three core a) 300 mtr +/- 5 %
b) 33 KV, Three core b) 200 mtr +/- 5 %
c) 11 KV, Single core c) 500 mtr +/- 5 %
d) 33 KV, Single core d) 500 mtr +/- 5 %
6.0.2 Overall tolerance +/- 2 % for the total cable length for the entire order.
Page 14 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
6.0.3 Short length of cables Manufacturer shall take prior approval from
Purchaser for any supply of short length cables.
For 33 KV, 3-core/1-core cables, minimum

acceptable short length cable can be 150 meter and
250 meter respectively. Similarly, for 11 KV cables,
minimum acceptable short length cables can be 250
meter.
In any case, manufacturer shall not put two cable

pieces of different short lengths in same cable drum.
7.0.0 Packing, Shipping,

Handling
& Storage
a) Packing [R4]
1. Both the ends of the cables shall be properly

sealed to prevent any deterioration of the cable,
due to ingress of water, etc.
2. Cable inner end (starting end) shall project,
outside the completely wound cable, by
sufficient length enabling verify cable details,
including the initial length marking.
3. Similarly, outer end of the cable shall be saddled
/ secured to the drum properly to prevent any
external damage to the end at any time.
4. Before putting on wooden planks, protective
covers (thick plastic sheets, etc.) shall be
secured over the wound cable, to avoid any
abrasion by wooden planks, over the outer
sheath of the cable.
5. After providing the protective covers, the cable
drums shall be finally closed by wooden planks
(with saddles), without leaving any gaps
between the planks; i.e. 100 % covering shall be
Page 15 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
ensured.
b) Drum Identification Direct marking (i.e. text painting through stencils,
Markings: etc.) shall be done on the drums, instead of attaching
labels, which may be misplaced/lost over a period of
time. [R4]
1. Drum identification number
2. Cable voltage grade
3. Cable code (e.g. A2XFY, etc.)
4. Number of cores and cross sectional area
5. Cable quantity, i.e. cable length (metre)
6. Purchase order number & date
7. SAP item code
8. Total weight of cable and drum (kg)
9. Manufacturer’s Name
10. Buyer’s name
11. Month & Year of Manufacturing
12. Direction of rotation of drum
13. Cable length final end-markings
(i.e., reading at the inner end and reading at the
outer end, just before packing, shall be marked
on the drum.)
c) Shipping information The seller shall give complete shipping information
concerning the weight, size of each package
d) Transit damage The seller shall be responsible for any transit
damage due to improper packing.
e) Type of Drum Steel / wooden drums, as per relevant IS / IEC.
(Wooden drums shall be with M.S. spindle plate with
nut-bolts)
f) Cable Drum handling The drums shall be with M.S. spindle plate (with nut-
bolts) of adequate size to suit the spindle rods,
normally required for handling the drums, according
to expected weight of the cable drums. [R4]
8.0.0 Quality Assurance Plan

(QAP)
8.0.1 Vendor’s QAP Manufacturer shall submit QAP in line with R-Infra
Page 16 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
QAP format (Annexure-F) for purchaser’s approval.

[R4]
8.0.2 Inspection Points To be mutually identified and agreed upon in QAP.
9.0.0 Progress Reporting

9.0.1 Outline Document To be submitted for purchaser’s approval for outline
of programmes for production, stage-inspection,
testing, final inspection, packing, dispatch and
documentation.
9.0.2 Detailed Progress Report To be submitted to Purchaser once a month
containing :
i) Progress on material procurement
ii) Progress on fabrication (as applicable)
iii) Progress on assembly (as applicable)
iv) Progress on internal stage-inspection
v) Reason for any delay in total programme
vi) Details of test failures, if any, during
manufacturing stages.
vii) Progress on final box-up Constraints / Forward
Path
10.0.0 Deviation a) Deviations from this specification are only

acceptable, where the Seller has listed in his
quotation the requirements he cannot, or does
not, wish to comply with, and the Buyer has
accepted, in writing, the deviations before the
order is placed.
b) In the absence of any list of deviation, it will be
assumed by the Buyer that the Seller complies
fully with this specification.
Page 17 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
Annexure – A
Scope, Documentation and Delivery schedule
1. Scope
A. Scope Design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer’s works

before dispatch, packing, delivery, unloading, stacking at
stores/site of H.T. Power cables, as per Purchaser’s
BOQ (Bill of Quantity).
B. Delivery Schedule To be filled up on a case-to-case basis.
a) Document Submission
Submission of drawings, calculations, catalogues, manuals, test reports shall be as
follows. (Also refer clause 5.0.0 – Drawings, Data and Manuals.)
Legend:
GTP : Guaranteed Technical Particulars

TTR : Type Test Report
RTR : Routine Test Report
[R4]
Documents After award of contract Final documents
Along with offer - for Approval (after Approval)
GTP 3 copies ** 1 soft copy ** 1 soft copy + CD
Drawings 3 copies ** 1 soft copy ** 1 soft copy + CD

Calculations 3 copies ** 1 soft copy ** 1 soft copy + CD
Catalogues & 1 copy each ** 1 soft copy + CD
Manual
Test Report 1 copy each of TTR ** 1 soft copy + CD
and sample RTR
** Soft copy and CD shall contain documents duly approved, signed and scanned.
Page 18 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
3. Delivery Schedule [R4]
a) Delivery period Start Date : from date of LOI / LOA

b) Delivery period End Date : as agreed with supplier
c) Material dispatch Clearance : after inspection by purchaser
Page 19 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
Annexure - B
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

(GTP) [R4]
Note: [R4]
1) For every type / size of cable, every data shall be mentioned.

2) Seller may submit separate GTP for every type / size of cable, as suitable.
3) GTP requirements are generally as per IS : 7098 (Part-II).
4) GTP shall be read in line with purchaser’s Project Site Specific Requirement.
Sr. Description Buyer’s Unit Seller’s Data

No. requirement
1.0 Purchase Req. No. -

2.0 Guarantee Period (Min.) 60 Months (from date
of commissioning) /
66 Months (from date
of receipt at
purchaser’s store)
whichever is earlier
3.0 Applicable IS / IEC Standard IS 7098 Part-2
followed by vendor / IEC 60502-2
4.0 Make -
5.0 Type
[R4]
(as required by purchaser)
a) 11 kV, 3c x 150 sq. mm. A2XFY
b) 11 kV, 3c x 300 sq. mm. A2XFY
c) 33 kV, 3c x 400 sq. mm. A2XFY
d) 33 kV, 1c x 630 sq. mm. A2XWaY
e) 11 kV, 1c x 1000 sq. mm. A2XWaY
f) 33 kV, 1c x 1000 sq. mm. A2XWaY
6.0 Voltage Grade

a) 11 kV, 3c or 1c 6.35 / 11 kV
b) 33 kV, 3c or 1c 19 / 33 kV
7.0 Maximum Conductor

temperature
A Continuous 90 deg. C
B Short time 250 deg. C
8.0 Conductor
A Material and Grade As per Cl. 2.1.1

B Size As shown under 5.0
above
Page 20 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
C Wires in each conductor As per Table 2 of IS Nos.

8130
D Conductor Shape As per Cl. 2.1.1 c
E Dia. of wires in each Manufacturer mm
conductor before compaction Standard
F Diameter over conductor mm
G Maximum Conductor
resistance at 20 ° C
a) 11 kV, 3c x 150 sq. mm. 0.2060 ohm/km
b) 11 kV, 3c x 300 sq. mm. 0.1000 ohm/km
c) 33 kV, 3c x 400 sq. mm. 0.0778 ohm/km
d) 33 kV, 1c x 630 sq. mm. 0.0469 ohm/km
e) 11 kV, 1c x 1000 sq. mm. 0.0291 ohm/km
f) 33 kV, 1c x 1000 sq. mm. 0.0291 ohm/km
H Longitudinal Water Blocking Is it provided and
Arrangement within shown in the cross-
conductor [R4] sectional drawing?
(Yes / No)
I Short circuit current-carrying kA
capacity of conductor for 1 sec.
9.0 Conductor Screen

(inner semi-con)
A Material & type As per Cl. 2.1.2
B Thickness (min) 0.50 mm
[R4]
C Diameter over conductor mm
screen
D Make and grade of semi-
conducting compound
10.0 Insulation
A Insulation Material As per Cl. 2.1.3
B Nominal thickness
a) 11 kV, 3c or 1c 3.6 mm
b) 33 kV, 3c or 1c 8.8 mm
C Minimum thickness
a) 11 kV, 3c or 1c 3.14 mm
b) 33 kV, 3c or 1c 7.82 mm
D Diameter over Insulation mm

(Approx.)
E Make and grade of Insulation
compound
F Eccentricity [R4] As per IEC standards %
G Water-tree retardant property Required [R4]
11A. Insulation Screen

(outer semi-con)
Page 21 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
a. i) Thickness of freely mm
0.50
strippable Semi conducting
screen
ii) Make and grade of semi-
conducting compound
iii) Printing As per Cl. No. 2.1.4
(Yes / No)
iv) Ovality of the core %
As per IEC Standards
[R4]
b. Diameter over Insulation mm
Screen (apprx.)
11B. Water-Swellable Tape

(if required by Purchaser)
a) Thickness a) 0.3 mm
b) Weight b) 118 gm / sq. m
c) Swell height c) ≥ 12 mm in 1 min.
d) Compatible to strippable / d) Yes / No
non-strippable semi-con,
over which it is applied.
e) Make & Grade e) Pl. state
f) Pre-slitted packed tapes f) Yes / No
from sub-vendors
approved by R-Infra
[R4]
11C. Cable Core identification
a) By coloured strips over

cores applied helically /
longitudinally
b) Manufacturer’s name
shall be permanently
printed on the strips, at
close intervals. [R4]
11D. Copper Tape
i) Dimensions a) Thickness : Mm
0.1 +/- 5 %
b) Width : 50 mm
C) Overlap: 20%
[R4]
ii) Fault current-carrying Manufacturer’s … kA

capacity of copper tape Standard for …
(Calculation sheet sec.
shall be attached)
11E. Diameter over laid up core mm

(apprx.)
Page 22 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
12.0 Filler As per Cl. 2.1.7

(Material and type) (Specify no. & size of
filler at center & core
interstices)
a) 11 kV, 3c x 150 sq. mm.
b) 11 kV, 3c x 300 sq. mm.
c) 33 kV, 3c x 400 sq. mm.
d) 11 kV or 33 kV, 1core Not applicable
12A.0 Binder Tape over laid-up cores
13.0 Inner Sheath
A Material and type As per Cl. 2.1.9

B Minimum thickness
a) 11 kV, 3c x 150 sq. mm. 0.6 mm
b) 11 kV, 3c x 300 sq. mm. 0.7 mm
c) 33 kV, 3c x 400 sq. mm. 0.7 mm
d) 33 kV, 1c x 630 sq. mm. 0.6 mm
e) 11 kV, 1c x 1000 sq. mm. 0.7 [R4] mm
f) 33 kV, 1c x 1000 sq. mm. 0.7 mm
C Approx. dia. over inner mm

sheath
14.0 Armour As per

Manufacturer’s
Standard and as per
purchaser’s site-
specific requirements
A Material
a) 11 kV, 3c G. I. Strip No.
b) 33 kV, 3c G. I. Strip No.

[R4]
c) 11 kV or 33 kV, 1c non-magnetic No.
wire armour
(Aluminium wire)
B Armour – Wires As per Table 4 of IS

7098 Part-2
a) Diameter of wire (zero negative mm.
tolerance for diameter)
b) Number of wires
no.
(min.)
Page 23 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
C Armour – GI strips
a) Width of strip & 4 x 0.8 mm
Thickness of strip (zero negative
tolerance for thickness)
b) Number of strips
no.
(min.)
D Approx. Equivalent Area sq. mm.
E Area covered by armour Min. 90 % %
Calculation shall be
attached.
F Dia. over armour - apprx. Mm
G Fault current carrying Calculation sheet … kA
capacity of armour shall be attached. for …
sec.
15.0 Outer Sheath

A Material and type As per Cl. 2.2.12
B Thickness (min.) ** As per Table-5 of
IS 7098 Part-2
a) 11 kV, 3c x 150 sq. mm. ** mm
b) 11 kV, 3c x 300 sq. mm. ** mm
c) 33 kV, 3c x 400 sq. mm. ** mm
d) 33 kV, 1c x 630 sq. mm. ** mm
e) 11 kV, 1c x 1000 sq. mm. ** mm

f) 33 kV, 1c x 1000 sq. mm. ** mm
C Color Blue
D Embossing Yes / No
(details as per Cl. 2.1.12)
E FRLS Properties [R4] As per customer’s
requirement
16.0 Approx. overall diameter mm
17.0 Standard drum length

with tolerance
a) 11 kV, 3c x 150 / 300 300 +/- 5% meters
sq. mm.
b) 33 kV, 3c x 400 200 +/- 5% meters
sq. mm.
c) 33 kV, 1c x 630 500 +/- 5% meters
sq. mm.
d) 11 kV or 33 kV, 500 +/- 5% meters
1c x 1000 sq. mm.
17A Overall order tolerance + / - 2 % for the total

[R4] cable length for the
entire order.
18.0 Cable Drum

a. Type of drum Steel / Wooden
Page 24 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
(Specify the relevant

IS / IEC followed for
drum design)
b. Markings on the drum On both faces
(as per Cl. 7.0.0) [R4]
18A.0 Cross-Sectional Drawing Is drawing submitted,

(ref. Cl. 5.0.0) showing every
[R4] feature of
constructions?
(Yes / No)
19.0 a. Pulling-eye Assembly Is manufacturer’s /

(provided at one running Sub-vendor’s
end) drawing submitted?
Refer drawing in Annexure-E (Yes / No)
[R4]
b. Sealing-end Cap Is manufacturer’s /

(provided at the other Sub-Vendor’s
end) drawing submitted?
Refer drawing in Annexure-E (Yes / No)
[R4]
20.0 Weights
a) Net weight of cable kg / km
(apprx.)
b) Weight of empty drum Kg
c) Weight of Cable with drum kg
21.0 Continuous current rating for

standard I. S. condition laid
Direct
a) In ground 30° C Amp
b) In duct 30° C Amp
c) In air 40° C Amp
22.0 (not used)
23.0 Electrical Parameters at

Maximum Operating
temperature:
A AC Resistance ohm / km
B Reactance at 50 c/s ohm / km
C Impedance ohm / km
D Zero sequence impedance ohm / km
E Positive sequence ohm / km
impedance
F Negative sequence ohm / km
impedance
G Capacitance micro-
farad
/ km
Page 25 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
24.0 Recommended minimum --- x O. D. mm

bending radius
25.0 De-rating factor for following Ground / Air

Ambient Temperatures :
a) At 30° C
b) At 35° C
c) At 40° C
d) At 45° C
e) At 50° C
26.0 Group factor for following Touching Trefoil

numbers of cables laid :
a) 3 Nos.
b) 4 Nos.
c) 5 Nos.
d) 6 Nos.
27.0 Recommended pressure for 30 N / mm2 N / sq.

laying cable using power mm.
winch
28.0 Process of Cross-linking of

Polyethylene
a) 11 kV, 3c or 1c Dry Cure process
only [R4]
b) 33 kV, 3c or 1c Dry Cure process
only
29.0 Type test Is copy of latest valid

(TTR - Type Test Report) TTR for respective
sizes enclosed?
(Yes / No)
30.0 Quality Assurance Plan Is QAP Format

(QAP) (Annexure-F), duly
[R4] filled in and
enclosed?
(Yes / No)
31.0 List of Sub-Vendors Is this list enclosed

for construction items for R-Infra approval?
(Annexure-C) [R4] (Yes / No)
Page 26 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
Annexure - C
List of Sub-Vendors
for critical items
[R4]
Vendor to state sub-vendors’ names for other items, wherever approved names are not
mentioned, for purchaser’s approval during pre-order / post-order stages.
R-Infra
Ser.
Description of Material Approved Sub-Vendors
No.
@
@ Dow Chemicals , U.S.A.

1. XLPE Compound @ Borealis , Sweden
@ Hanwha , Seoul , South Korea
@ Dow Chemicals , U.S.A.

2. Semi-Conducting Compound @ Borealis , Sweden
@ Hanwha , Seoul , South Korea
@ Lantor
Conductor Water-Blocking @ Geca
3.
tapes / yarn / powder @ Freudenberg
@ Scapa
@ Lantor
@ Geca
Water-Swellable Tapes @ Freudenberg
4.
(Pre-slitted) @ Scapa
@ Miracle
@ Tekstilna (Slovenia)
5. E.C. Grade Aluminium Rod @ Bharat Aluminium Co. Ltd. (BALCO)

@ Hindustan Aluminium Co. Ltd. (HINDALCO)
@ National Aluminium Co. Ltd. (NALCO)
Page 27 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
6. Aluminium Alloy
7. E.C. Grade Copper Rod
8. H.T.G.S. Wire
9. PVC Compound
10. PVC Resin
Galvanised Steel Wires /
11.
Strips
12. Copper Tape (for screening)
13. P. P. Fillers
Page 28 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
Annexure - D
Service Conditions [R4]

(Atmospheric / Soil conditions at Site)
A. Mumbai
a) Average grade atmospheric Heavily polluted, salt-laden, dusty, humid
condition with possibility of condensation
b) Average grade soil condition Water-logged
c) Maximum altitude above sea 1000 M
level
d) Ambient Air temperature i) Highest : 45 deg C
ii) Average : 35 deg C
iii) Minimum : 15 deg C
f) Thermal Resistivity of Soil 150 deg. C . cm / W max.
g) Seismic Zone 3
B. Delhi
a) Average grade atmospheric Heavily polluted, dry
condition
b) Average grade soil condition
c) Maximum altitude above sea 1000 M
level
d) Air temperature Ambient i) Highest : 50 deg C
ii) Average : 40 deg C
iii) Minimum : 0 deg C
e) Relative Humidity 100 % max
f) Thermal Resistivity of Soil 150 deg. C . cm / W max.
g) Seismic Zone 4
Page 29 of 42
SP-EWHP-01- R4
Annexure E
1. General Arrangement Drawing for

Cable Pulling Eye
[R4]
2. General Arrangement Drawing for

End-sealing Cap
[R4]
Both the above drawings are given on next pages.
Page 30 of 42
PRODUCED BY AN AUTODESK EDUCATIONAL PRODUCT
Welding tack
APPRX.30 APPRX.90
60 15 (Typical)
15 THIS PART (SPHERE) WELDED
Ø16 Ø8 Thread 30° Welding tack
53 2Nos.Ø8hole TO PULLING EYE SHALL
OUTSIDE (Typical)
15 Standerd
SWIVEL FREE AT ANY ANGLE.
Threaded for
Hole to let air out locking M8 screw
Thread ROTATING PART
15 15.0 Ø8
THREAD THROUGH 360°
'A' 'A'
Ø48
Ø130 Ø118 Ø90 Ø102 Ø90 APPRX.
Ø110 Ø90
Ø60
Apprx.
Ø90
THREAD
3NOS-Ø18 HOLES
Ø102
ROTATING PART

THROUGH 360°
20.0 30° FIXED PART
PULLING EYE
6 30.0
CAP
3.0
To accommodate M8 screw
40 20
CONDUCTOR CAP SOCKET FIXING BLOCK 3 no threading required
PULLING EYE 1
SOCKET
(Made of apprx.Ø12mm rod)
260 CAP 2 OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
PULLING BLOCK HOUSING 4
15
THREAD
Ø8 INSIDE 30.0
125 10 LOCKING SCREW
'A' 50 45 30
'B' (Suitably long to fix CAP (2)
Ø31
with socket fixing block (3)
Ø25
15
Ø16
THREAD
M16 THREAD
'A' 10 'B' INSIDE
VIEW-A VIEW-B
CONDUCTOR SOCKET 5
(for crimping on conductor) SECTIONAL VIEW
Exploded View 10
Hole for
pouring P.U.Compound Hole to let air out
SUITABLE FOR M16 BOLT
10 LOCKING SCREW 2 M.S.Zinc-Plated
9 LOCK NUT 3 M.S.Zinc-Plated
8 NUT 3 M.S.Zinc-Plated
7 SPRING. WASHER 3 M.S.Zinc-Plated
6 PLAIN WASHER 3 M.S.Zinc-Plated
5
6 7 8 9 1 5 CONDUCTOR SOCKET 3 AL.
3 4 PULLING BLOCK HOUSING 1 M.S.Zinc-Plated
2
4 3 SOCKET FIXING BLOCK 1 M.S.Zinc-Plated
EXAMPLE: 2 CAP 1 M.S.Zinc-Plated
This space shall be filled with P.U.Coumpound
1) For cable size 33kV, 3/C X 400sq mm Al XLPE.
1 PULLING EYE 1 M.S.Zinc-Plated
2) Diameter over conductor : 23.8mm apprx.
Overall diameter : 108±3mm apprx.
NO. DISCRIPTION QTY. MATERIAL
Pulling force applicable on the cable : 30 N/sq mm
CONDUCTOR Pulling eye shall withstand total force of : 36000N+Safety margin
CABLE
NOTE: MISC/E/4-1133/1699
1) All Dimensions are in mm, unless otherwise stated.
CONDUCTOR
2) This drawing is typical / indicative.Separate dimensioned drawing for cable
CABLE PULLING EYE ASSEMBLY
pulling eye assembly, suitable for required size & rating of cables, shall be
submitted for approval,prior to manufacturing.
(TYPICAL)
3) After fixing cable pulling eye, P.U.(Poly-Urethane) Compound shall be
poured to occupy inner spaces to avoid ingress of Water / Moisture.
4) After P.U.Compound oozes/flows out from the cable side,the same edge
CRIMPING Final Assembly shall be sealed with suitable sleeve/Tape.
SP-EWHP-01- R4
Annexure- F
QAP Format
(Quality Assurance Plan)
For H. T. Cables (Typical)
(Page 1 to 10)
[R4]
Typical Characteristics are mentioned in the above QAP format, which is

appearing on the next pages.
Vendor shall submit the QAP, duly filled in, in accordance with IS / IEC
standards and manufacturer’s standards/procedures, for Purchaser’s approval,
during pre-order / post-order stages.
Page 33 of 42
QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN (QAP)
FOR H. T. CABLES 09.03.2012
(Typical Format)
Legend : SV : Sub-Vendor of Cable Manufacturer, MFR : Cable Manufacturer, R-Infra : Reliance Infra-Structure Ltd., PS : Purchase Specification of Cable Vendor, R-Infra Spec. - R-Infra Specification
P - Perform , V - Verify , W - Witness
Sr. COMPONENT CHARACTERISTICS & UNIT CLASS Measuring TYPE OF QUANTUM OF REFERENCE ACCEPTANCE FORMAT OF AGENCY Remarks
Equipment / CHECK SV MFR R-
No. OPERATIONS CHECK DOCUMENT / NORMS RECORD
Technique
TEST Infra
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
A. RAW MATERIALS
1 Aluminium / Copper a) Tensile strength kg P P/V V/W

Rod b) Resistivity at 20 Deg C ohm- P P/V V/W
mm2/km
c) Diameter mm P P/V V/W
d) Chemical composition P V V
e) Surface finish -- P P V/W
f) Purity of Aluminium / Copper One sample P P V/W
per PO
2 PVC Compound a) Tensile Strength N/sq.mm. P P/V V

b) Elongation at break % P P/V V
c) Thermal stability min. P P/V V
d) Additional test
(for FRLS Sheathing compound
only)
i) Oxygen Index test P P/V V
ii) Temperature Index test P P/V V
iii) Smoke generation test P P/V V
iv) Acid gas generation test P P/V V
3 XLPE Compound a) Packing P V V

b) Tensile Strength N/sq.mm. P P/V V
c) Elongation at break % P P/V V
d) Hot set test % P P/V V
e) Volume Resistivity ohm-cm P P/V V
f) Cure Curve (Max. Torque) lb-in - P V
g) Density g/cc P P/V V
4 Semi-conducting a) Packing P V V
Compound b) Volume Resistivity P P/V V
c) Tensile Strength N/sq.mm. P P/V V
d) Elongation at break % P P/V V
e) Cure Curve (Max. Torque) lb-in - P V
f) Density g/cc P P/V V
g) Firmly bonded over conductor P P/V V
h) Easly strippable over XLPE P P/V V
insulation
5 Copper Tape a) Thickness & width mm x mm P P/V V

b) Tensile Strength N/sq.mm. P P/V V
c) Elongation at break % P P/V V
d) Resistivity ohm-mm2/km P P/V V
Page 1 of 8
(Typical Format)
Technique
TEST Infra
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
6 Armour wires/strips a) Dimensions mm x mm P P/V V

(Galvanised Steel) b) Surface condition/finish -- P P/V V
c) Tensile Strength N/sq.mm. P P/V V
d) Elongation at break % P P/V V
e) Torsion test for round wire P P/V V
f) Wrapping test P P/V V
g) Mass of zinc coating g/sq.m. P P/V V
h) Uniformity of zinc coating dips P P/V V
i) Adhesion test P P/V V
j) Resistivity test ohm-mm2/km P P/V V
7 Water Swellable a) Dimensions mm x mm P P/V V

Tape b) Swelling height mm P P/V V
(Non-Woven) c) Resistivity P P/V V
d) Mass g/sq.m. P P/V V
8 Steel / Wooden a) Dimension mm As per IS - P P V

Drum b) Finish & workman ship -- - P P V
9 Cable Pulling Eye a) Dimensions & Material mm R-Infra approved - P P V

drawing
b) Finish & workman ship -- - P P V
c) Tension test on pulling eye N/sq.mm. R-Infra approved drawing - P P V
10 Binder Tape Dimensions & material mm - P P V
11 Poly-propylene Net Size - P P V

Filler
12 Heat-shrinkable End a) Bore diameter mm R-Infra approved - - P V

Cap drawing
b) Length of end cap mm R-Infra approved - - P V
drawing
c) hot melt adhesive
B. IN-PROCESS INSPECTION
1 Wire Drawing a) Diameter mm - P V/W

b) Surface finish -- - P V/W
c) Tensile test (for Al) N/sq.mm. IS: 8130/84 IS: 8130/84 - P V/W
d) Elongation test (for Cu) IS: 8130/84 IS: 8130/84 - P V/W
e) Wrapping test (for Al) IS: 8130/84 IS: 8130/84 - P V/W
f) D.C. Resistance at 20 deg C ohm-cm P V/W
2 Stranding a) No. of wires/strands no. - P V

b) Lay length & Lay direction mm - P V
c) Dia of conductor mm - P V
d) Surface finish -- - P V
e) Mass of conductor kg IS 8130/84 - P V
Page 2 of 8
(Typical Format)
Technique
TEST Infra
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
3 Core Extrusion a) Compound Make/Grade -- - - P V

(CCV) b) i) Thickness of Conductor mm IS 7098 (Part IS 7098 (Part 2) - P V
Screen 2) / 85 / 85
ii) Thickness of Insulation
Conductor Screen iii) Thickness of Insulation Screen
+ c) Surface finish -- - P V
d) Printing on outer semi-conducting “DO NOT HEAT, FREELY - P V
layer STRIPPABLE”
Insulation
e) Tensile Strength IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V
(XLPE with water-
2)/85 2)/85
tree retardant
f) Elongation at break IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V
property) 2)/85 2)/85
g) Hot set test % IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V
+ 2)/85 2)/85
h) Eccentricity of insulation % - P V
Insulation Screen i) Core diameter mm - P V
and Ovality check on core
j) Void & contamination test for no. - P V/W
insulation (Silicon Oil test)
k) Condition of Triple Extrude - P V/W
l) CCV tube pressure (N2) and bars & - P V/W
temperature deg. C
m) Temperature of Extruder (65 mm, deg C - P V/W
80 mm, 150 mm)
n) Haul off / Line Speed m/min - P V/W
o) Dimensions and Condition of dies mm - P V/W
& nipple
p) Freely strippable insulation screen IS:7098/3, 93 IS:7098/3, 93 Cl. - P V/W
(Strippability Test) Cl. No. 20 No. 20
q) Water boil test for extruded semi- BIS draft BIS draft Specn - P V/W
conducting layers Specn
r) Longitudinal Water-Blocking Test IEC 60502-2 IEC 60502-2 - P V/W
4 Water Swellable a) Dimensions (thickness x width) mm x mm - P V

Semi-conducting b) Tape Application (Overlap) % - P V
c) Lay direction --
5 Copper Tape a) Diameter under copper tape mm - P V

- taping b) Dimensions (thickness x wid mm x mm - P V
c) Number of tapes - P V
d) Tape application (Overlap) % - P V
e) Diameter over copper tape mm - P V
6 Laying up a) Identification of cores -- - P V

b) Direction of lay & core sequence Measuring IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V
tape 2)/85 2)/85
c) Lay length Scale - P V
d) Shape of laid up assembly -- - P V
e) P. P. Filler size mm - P V
f) Diameter over Lay-up mm - P V
Page 3 of 8
(Typical Format)
Technique
TEST Infra
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
7 Inner Sheath a) Material & type -- - P V

b) Thickness mm IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part 2) / - P V
2) / 85 85
c) Surface finish -- - P V
d) Colour of inner sheath - P V
e) Diameter over Inner Sheath mm - P V
8 Armouring a) Dimension of wires/strips mm - P V

b) No. of wires/strip no. - P V
c) Armour coverage % IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V
2)/85 2)/85
d) Direction of lay IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V
2)/85 2)/85
e) Lay length/Gear setting mm - P V
f) Surface finish -- - P V
g) Diameter over Armour mm - P V
h) Rubberised cotton tape over
armour
9 Outer Sheath a) Material & type - - P V

b) Anti termite additives - P V
c) Thickness mm - P V
d) Overall diameter of the Cable mm - P V
e) Surface finish & colour of sheath -- - P V
f) Cable length verification - P V
g) Embossing / Printing / Sequential As per R-Infra’s approved - P V
Marking GTP/Cross-sectional drawing
10 Cable Winding over a) Cable appearance -- - P V

the drum b) Ovality check over completed - P V
cable
c) Drum appearance, -- - P V
including fixing of M. S. Spindle
Plates
d) Winding -- - P V
e) Packing -- - P V
f) Embossing / Printing -- - P V
g) Surface finish -- - P V
C. TESTING & INSPECTION
1. Type Tests Type Tests at Vendor's works
a) Tests on conductor One sample

i) Annealing test for copper IS 8130/84 IS 8130/84 - P V
ii) Tensile test for aluminium N/mm2 IS 8130/84 IS 8130/84 - P V
iii) Wrapping test for aluminium IS 8130/84 IS 8130/84 - P V
iv) Conductor resistance test ohm/km IS 8130/84 IS 8130/84 - P V/W
Page 4 of 8
(Typical Format)
Technique
TEST Infra
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
b) Tests on armouring wires/strips

One sample
i) Dimensions of wire/strip mm IS 3975, IS 10810 Pt. 36 - P V/W
ii) Tensile strength & Elongation at N/mm2 IS 3975 IS 3975 - P V/W
break
iii) Torsion test for round wire IS 3975 IS 3975 - P V/W
iv) Winding test for strip IS 3975 IS 3975 - P V/W
(Wrapping Test for Al wires/formed
wires only)
v) Uniformity of zinc coating dips IS 3975 IS 3975 - P V/W
(for GS)
vi) Mass of zinc coating g/mm2 IS 3975 IS 3975 - P V/W
(for GS)
vii) Adhesion Test IS IS - P V/W
viii) Resistivity of wire/strip ohm-cm IS 3975 IS 3975 - P V/W
c) Test for thickness of insulation & mm One sample IS 7098(Part 2)/85 - P V/W
sheath
d) Physical tests on insulation One sample

i) Tensile strength & Elongation test N/mm2, % IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
(before and after ageing) 2)/85 2)/85
ii) Ageing in air oven IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W

2)/85 2)/85
iii) Hot set test % IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
2)/85 2)/85
iv) Shrinkage test IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
2)/85 2)/85
v) Water absorption test (gravimetric) IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
2)/85 2)/85
vi) Eccentricity test - P V/W
e) Physical tests on outer sheath One sample

i) Tensile strength & Elongation test IS 5831/84 IS 5831/84 - P V/W
at break
(before and after ageing)
ii) Ageing in air oven IS 5831/84 IS 5831/84 - P V/W
iii) Shrinkage test % IS 5831/84 IS 5831/84 - P V/W
iv) Hot deformation test IS 5831/84 IS 5831/84 - P V/W
v) Loss of mass test in air oven IS 5831/84 IS 5831/84 - P V/W
vi) Heat shock test IS 5831/84 IS 5831/84 - P V/W
vii) Thermal stability test deg C, IS 5831/84 IS 5831/84 - P V/W
time
viii) Cold Bend Test IS 5831/84 IS 5831/84 - P V/W
ix) Cold Impact Test IS 5831/84 IS 5831/84 - P V/W
Page 5 of 8
(Typical Format)
Technique
TEST Infra
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
f) Electrical Tests One sample

i) Partial discharge test pC IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
2)/85 2)/85
ii) Bending test IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
2)/85 2)/85
iii) Partial discharge test pC IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
2)/85 2)/85
iv) Dielectric power factor test IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
(as a function of voltage) 2)/85 2)/85
v) Dielectric power factor test IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
(as a function of temperature) 2)/85 2)/85
vi) Heating cycle test deg C, IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
hrs., nos. 2)/85 2)/85
vii) Dielectric power factor as a IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
function of voltage 2)/85 2)/85
viii) Partial discharge test pC IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
2)/85 2)/85
ix) Impulse withstand test IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
2)/85 2)/85
x) High voltage test kV, min. IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
2)/85 2)/85
g) Insulation Resistance test (Volume ohm-cm One sample IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
Resistivity test) 2)/85 2)/85
h) Flammability Test One sample IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W
2)/85 2)/85
i) Water Penetration Test (WPT) One sample IEC 60502-2 IEC 60502-2 - P V/W
on core
(Longitudinal Water-Blocking test)
j) Freely strippable insulation screen - P V/W

(Strippability Test)
k) Ovality check on core - P V/W
l) Ovality check on completed Cable - P V/W
m) Check on fixing of M.S. Spindle - P V/W

Plates
o) Additional tests on FRLS-type

cables only
1) Tests on FRLS outer sheath One sample
i) Oxygen Index test - P V
ii) Temperature Index test - P V
iii) Acid gas generation test - P V
iv) Smoke density test - P V
2) Flammability test on a piece of One sample IS 7098 IS 7098 - P V/W
completely ready FRLS cable (Part 2)/85 / (Part 2)/85
IEC 332 (Part
3- Category
B)
Page 6 of 8
(Typical Format)
Technique
TEST Infra
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
2. Routin Tests a) High Voltage kV, min. 100 % IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V

2)/85 2)/85
b) Conductor Resistance ohm/km 100 % IS 8130/84 IS 8130/84 - P V
c) Partial Discharge pC 100 % IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V
2)/85 2)/85
d) Freely strippable insulation screen - P V
3. Acceptance Tests a) Annealing test for copper IS 8130/84 IS 8130/84 - P V

b) Tensile test for aluminium IS 8130/84 IS 8130/84 - P V
c) Wrapping test for aluminium IS 8130/84 IS 8130/84 - P V
d) Conductor resistance test ohm/km IS 8130/84 IS 8130/84 - P W
Appendix A to IS
e) Test for thickness of insulation & IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P W
7098(Part 2)/85
sheath 2)/85 2)/85
f) Eccentricity test on insulation
g) Hot set test for insulation % IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P W
2)/85 2)/85
h) Tensile strength & Elongation at N/mm2, % IS 7098 (Part 2 ) / 85 & IS - P W
break of insulation & outer sheath 5831/84 (Type ST2)
i) Partial discharge test pC IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P W

2)/85 2)/85
j) High voltage test kV, min. IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P W
2)/85 2)/85
Appendix A to IS
k) Insulation resistance (Volume ohm-cm IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P W
7098(Part 2)/85
resistivity) test 2)/85 2)/85
l) Tests for dimension and number of mm IS 3975, IS 10810 Pt. 36 - P W
armour wires/strips
m) i) Test for anti-termite property of - P W
outer sheath
ii) Test for anti-rodent property of - P W
outer sheath
n) Winding of cable on drum One drum from - P W
To check : offered lot
i) cable appearance
ii) drum appearance
iii) cable winding
iv) packing
v) embossing / printing
vi) length verification
vii) mass of cable
viii) ovality check on completed
cable
x) Fixing of M. S. Plates
Page 7 of 8
(Typical Format)
Technique
TEST Infra
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
o) Water Boil test to check the - P W

integrity of semiconducting layer
p) Void and Contamination test for - P W
insulation
q) Swell Height of water-swellable Appendix A to IS - P W
tape 7098(Part 2)/85
r) Lay Ratio of armour - P W
s) Mass of Zinc coating for armour IS 3975, IS 10810 Pt. 36 & - P W
t) Uniformity of Zinc coating IS 3975, IS 10810 Pt. 36 - P W
u) Printing over semicon - P W
v) Water Penetration Test (WPT) IEC 60502-2 IEC 60502-2 - P W
on core (i.e. Longitudinal Water-
Blocking Test)
w) Freely strippable insulation screen - P W
x) Ovality check on core - P W
y) Additional tests for FRLS cables

1) Tests on FRLS sheath
i) Oxygen Index test - P W
ii) Temperature Index test - P W
iii) Acid gas generation test - P W
iv) Smoke density test - P W
2) Flammability test on finished cable - P W
D. PACKING & MARKINGS
1 Packing & a) Cable end sealing 100 % IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V/W

Marking 2)/85 2)/85
b) Pulling eye at leading end 100 % - P V/W
c) Stencilling / Marking on drum 100 % IS 7098(Part IS 7098(Part - P V
2):85 2):85
Note :
1. Checks specified above for Raw Material, In-Process and Final Inspection shall be as relevant to the specific cable construction.
2. Number of samples shall be selected as per Factory Standard/Agreement wherever ‘sample’ is indicated for extent of check.
3. Plant standards shall be followed in case Technical Data Sheet does not include requirements for characteristics to be checked.
4. R-Infra's may witness Raw materials and In process Inspections, in addition to Type/Routine/Acceptance tests, at any time/stage of manufacturing.
5. R-Infra’s Inspector shall randomly select a cable drum for type testing at vendor's premises / CPRI / ERDA among the lot offered for inspection.
6. For each of the offered lot for inspection, R-Infra may randomly select one cable drum for testing of end cap “Destructive testing” to verify
adhesion of sealing cap to cable outer sheath. Similarly, pulling eye shall be tested with 30N/mm2 pressure.
Page 8 of 8
SP-EWHP-01- R4
Annexure- G
Testing and manufacturing process requirements w. r. t. TR- XLPE insulation
All cables made with TR-XLPE Insulation should be tested and/or certified to meet the
following performance parameters as per ANSI /ICEA S-94-649 after one year AWTT.
Property Units Requirements Values

Min. Avg. Electrical Kv/mm > 25
Breakdown Strength(qual. test)
Impulse Strength Kv/mm > 83

Water Tree Length mm 0.25
Max. Bowtie Tree Density (Number per Maximum 15
16.4 cu. cm) (0.12-0.25 mm range)
Manufacturing processes to produce high-quality cables with the following characteristics:
• Cure consistency with hot set/creep less than 100%

• No voids larger than 75 microns per 16.4 cubic cm
• No ambers larger than 250 microns per 16.4 cubic cm
• No contaminants larger than 125 microns and less than 5 between 50-125 microns per
cubic 16.4 cubic cm tested.
• Neutral indent on cable is less than 375 microns
• Cable insulation concentricity greater than 90% tested
• No protrusions greater than 75 microns at the conductor shield and 125 microns at the
insulation shield
Page 42 of 42
SP-LALU-01-R0
Index
1.0 General Specification…………………………………………………………………. 03-08
2.0 Annexure – A : Scope & Documentation………………………………………… 09-10
3.0 Annexure – B : Ambient Conditions…………………………………………….....11-11
4.0 Annexure – C1 : Guaranteed Tech. Particulars for 66KV Lightning Arrester......12-14
5.0 Annexure – C2 : Guaranteed Tech. Particulars for 33KV Lightning Arrester….. 15-17
6.0 Annexure – D : Recommended spares (Data by supplier)……………………18-18
Page 2 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0
Materials, equipment and methods used in the manufacture of Lightning Arresters

shall conform to the latest edition of following –
National Standards

Indian Electricity Rules
Indian electricity act
CBIP manual
IS : 3070 – Part 3 Lightning Arresters for Alternating Current Systems
IS : 2071 - Part I Method of high voltage testing
IS : 2629 - 1985 Recommended Practice for Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Iron and Steel
IS : 5621 - 1980 Hollow insulators for use in electrical equipment
IS : 6639 - 1972 Specification for Hexagon Bolts for Steel Structures

IEC 60099-4-2001 Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters without gaps for AC Systems
Important Note :
In the event of direct conflict between various order documents, the precedence of authority of
documents shall be as follows –
i. Specification including applicable codes, standards

ii. Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP)
iii. Approved Vendor Drawings
Page 3 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0
Sr. Description Requirement / Rating

No.
2.0.0 Design Features Common for both 66KV and 33 KV Lightning Arresters
2.1.0 Application To be used for protection of transformers, circuit breakers and

other sub-station equipment against lightning and switching
surges.
2.2.0 Type of Lightning Gap-less metal oxide type (ZnO Type).

Arrester
2.3.0 Pressure relief Pressure relief device of class 40 KA shall be provided.
device
2.4.0 Accessories Refer Annexure-A : Scope of Supply.
2.5.0 Mounting LA mounting vertically on steel structures with insulating bases.
Surge counters in weather proof enclosures suitable for

mounting on structure of lightning arrester.
2.6.0 Line side Terminal Suitable for ACSR Zebra/ Goat conductor (Refer GTP)
Connectors
2.7.0 Ground Terminal Suitable for 50x6 mm GS flat
Connectors
2.8.0 Surge Counter Non-resettable type
2.9.0 Name plate Following minimum information must be marked –
Marking i) Name of the manufacturer
ii) Type and serial No.
iii) Model No.
iv) Rated voltage
v) Max. continuous Operating Voltage
vi) Nominal discharge current
vii) Pr. Relief Class
viii) Identification mark on each separately housed unit to
enable it to be replaced in correct position after the
multiunit arrester has been dismantled.
3.0.0 Approved Make of Common for both 66KV and 33 KV Lightning Arresters
Components
3.1.0 Insulators JSI / WSI/ BHEL/ Modern/ Saravana
Page 4 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0

No.
4.0.0 Testing & Inspection
4.1.0 Internal Test Manufacturer shall carry out comprehensive inspection
and testing during manufacture of the equipment.
4.2.0 Type test The product must be of type tested quality. Type test
reports shall be submitted for the type, size & rating of
equipment offered along with bid. If the manufacturer’s
lab is accredited by govt./ authorised body then it shall
be acceptable for type testing.
4.3.0 Routine test As per relevant IS / IEC.
4.4.0 Acceptance test As per relevant IS / IEC.
4.5.0 Test Witness

4.5.1 The Buyer reserves the right to witness all tests specified
on completed product.
4.5.2 The Buyer reserves the right to inspect the product at the
Sellers works at any time prior to dispatch, to verify
compliance with the specifications.
4.5.3 In-process and final inspection call intimation shall be

given in advance to purchaser.
4.6.0 Tests on fitting and As per Manufacturer’s Standards and relevant IS / IEC.
Accessories
5.0.0 Drawing, Data &

Manuals
5.1.0 To be submitted along The seller has to submit :
with bid
i) Tentative GA / cross sectional drawing of product
showing all the views / sections.
ii) Detailed reference list of customers already using the
offered product during the last 5 years with particular
emphasis on units of similar design and rating.
iii) Completely filled GTP
iv) Deviations from this specification. Only deviations

approved in writing before award of contract shall
be accepted.
v) Details of manufacturer's quality assurance
standards and program and ISO 9000 series or
equivalent national certification.
Page 5 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0

No.
vi) Type test reports shall be submitted for the type, size &
rating of product / equipment offered along with bid. In
case the type test report for identical product is not
available then type test report of nearby size/ rating shall
be submitted for review. They shall be considered valid
for 5 years from date of test performed on product
/equipment.
vii) Complete product catalogue and Manual along with
the bid.
viii) Recommended spare parts and consumable items for five
years of operation with prices and spare parts catalogue
with price list for future requirements
ix) Bill of material with make, model & quantity of items.
5.2.0 To be submitted after The seller has to submit : for buyer’s Approval (A) /
award of contract Reference (R)
i) Program for production and testing (A)
ii) Guaranteed Technical Particulars (A)
iii) Calculations to substantiate choice of electrical, structural,
mechanical component size / ratings (A)
iv) a) Detailed dimension drawing for all components, ge

b) Drawings of major components (A)
c) Rating and diagram plate (R)
v) Detailed loading drawing to enable the buyer to
design and construct foundations (as applicable) (R)
vi) Transport / Shipping dimensions with weights (R)

vii) Detailed Bill of Materials for all fittings and
accessories with their make, model & tag no. etc.
(A)
viii) Detailed installation and commissioning instructions (R)
ix) Quality plan (A)
5.3.0 Submittals required prior The seller has to submit :

to dispatch
i) Inspection and test reports, carried out in manufacturer’s
works (R)
ii) Test certificates of all bought out items
iii) Operation and maintenance Instruction as well as trouble
shooting charts/ manuals
5.4.0 Drawing and document Standard size paper A0, A1, A2, A3, A4
sizes
5.5.0 No of drgs. / Documents As per Annexure- A
required at different
stages
Page 6 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0

No.
6.0.0 Packing
6.1.0 Packing Against corrosion, dampness, heavy rains, breakage and
Protection vibration
6.2.0 Packing for Robust wooden non returnable packing case with all the above
accessories and protection & identification Label
spares
6.3.0 Packing In each packing case, following details are required :
Identification
Label
i) Individual serial number
ii) Purchaser's name
iii) PO number (along with SAP item code, if any) & date
iv) Equipment Tag no. (if any)
v) Destination
vi) Manufacturer / Supplier's name
vii) Address of Manufacturer / Supplier / it’s agent
viii) Description and Quantity
ix) Country of origin
x) Month & year of Manufacturing
xi) Case measurements
xii) Gross and net weights in kilograms
xiii) All necessary slinging and stacking instructions
7.0.0 Shipping,
Handling &
Storage
7.1.0 Shipping The seller shall give complete shipping information concerning
Information weight, size etc. of each package.
7.2.0 Shipping The seller shall ascertain at an early date before the
Constraints commencement of manufacture, any transport limitations such as
weights, dimensions, road culverts, overhead lines, free access
etc. from the manufacturing plant to the project site. Bidder shall
furnish the confirmation that the proposed packages can be safely
transported, as normal or oversize packages, upto the site. Any
modifications required in the infrastructure and cost thereof in this
connection shall be brought to the notice of the Purchaser.
7.3.0 Transit Damage The seller shall be responsible for any transit damage due to
improper packing.
7.4.0 Handling & Manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed. Detail handling &
Page 7 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0

No.
8.0.0 Quality
Assurance
8.1.0 Vendor quality To be submitted for purchaser approval
plan
8.2.0 Inspection points To be mutually identified & agreed in quality plan
9.0.0 Progress
Reporting
9.1.0 Outline To be submitted for purchaser approval for outline of production,

Document inspection, testing, inspection, packing, dispatch, documentation
program
9.2.0 Detailed To be submitted to Purchaser once a month containing
Progress report
ii) Progress on fabrication (As applicable)
iii) Progress on assembly (As applicable)
iv) Progress on internal stage inspection

v) Reason for any delay in total program
vi) Details of test failures if any in manufacturing stages
vii) Progress on final box up

viii) Constraints / Forward path
10.0.0 Deviations
i) Deviations from this Specification are only acceptable where the
Seller has listed in his quotation the requirements he can’t or
does not wish to comply with and the buyer has accepted in
writing the deviations before the order is placed.
ii) In the absence of a list of deviations, it will be assumed by the

Buyer that the Seller complies fully with this specification.
Page 8 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0
Annexure – A
1.0 Scope

No.
1.0.0 Scope
1.1.0 Main Equipment Design, manufacture, assembly & testing at manufacturer’s works
before dispatch, packing & delivery of Lightning Arresters rated
up to 66 kV.
1.2.0 Accessories
i) Supporting insulators for LA.
ii) Line terminal connectors.
iii) Surge counter with leakage current ammeter.
iv) Grounding terminal bracket

v) Necessary flanges alongwith all stainless steel hardware like nut
bolts/ washers etc. for mounting of LA & surge Counter
vi) Suitably sized Cu flat or insulated copper cable for connection
between LA and surge counter
vii) Any other item necessary or usual for efficient performance and
satisfactory maintenance under the various operating and
atmospheric conditions
1.3.0 Documentation Submission of all drawings & documents pertaining to the
equipment.
1.4.0 Site Supervision Supervision of testing & commissioning of equipment at site.
1.5.0 Bill of Materials Complete bill of materials shall be submitted in the following
format.
Sr. Purchaser Equipment Location / Unit Quantity
No. Equipment Tag No. Description Substation
/ Sap Code Name
e.g. Nos. e.g. 1
Santacruz
e.g. Nos. e.g. 6
Alaknanda
Page 9 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0
2.0.0 Document Submission
Submission of drawings, calculations, catalogues, manuals, test reports shall be as follows :

Item Along with For Approval Final after Remarks
Description offer after award of approval
contract
Drawings 3 copies 4 copies + 1 6 copies + 1 See Clause 5.0.0
(Typical drgs) Soft Copy soft copy in CD for various
drawings required
Calculations 3 copies 4 copies + 1 6 copies + 1 See Clause 5.0.0
(Typical) Soft Copy soft copy in CD for details
Catalogues 1 copy 6 copies + 1

soft copy in CD
Instruction 1 copy 6 copies + 1

manual soft copy in CD
Test Report 2 copies 6 copies + 1 Type test and

soft copy in CD routine test reports
3.0.0 Delivery Schedule

No.
i) Delivery period From date of purchase order
start date
ii) Delivery period As agreed with supplier
end date
iii) Material After inspection by purchaser
dispatch
clearance
Page 10 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0
Annexure – B
Ambient Conditions :
A) Mumbai
a) Average grade Heavily polluted , salt Laden, dusty, humid with possibility of
atmosphere condensation
b) Maximum altitude 1000 M
above sea level
c) Ambient Air Highest 45 deg C, Average 35 deg C
temperature
d) Minimum ambient air 20 deg C
temperature
f) Thermal Resistivity of 150 Deg. C cm/W
Soil
g) Seismic Zone 3
B) Delhi
a) Average grade Heavily polluted, dry

atmosphere
b) Maximum altitude 1000 M
above sea level
c) Ambient Air Highest 50 deg C, Average 40 deg C
temperature
d) Minimum ambient air 0 Deg C
temperature
f) Thermal Resistivity of 150 Deg. C cm/W
Soil
g) Seismic Zone 4
Page 11 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0
Annexure – C1
Guaranteed Tech. Particulars for 66KV Lightning Arrester

Sr. Description Data By Purchaser Data by Supplier
No.
2 Type Gapless, ZnO type,
single pole, heavy
duty, station class,
pedestal mounted
3 Model
4 No. of units.
5 Installation Outdoor
6 Application Protection of
Transformers, circuit
breakers, lines and
other outdoor S/S
equipment.
7 LA connection to system Phase to earth
8 Type of Conductor ACSR Zebra / Goat

9 Construction Single Phase
10 Rated voltage of arrester (KVrms) 60 KV
11 Nominal discharge current (Amps) 10KA
(8x20 micro sec. wave) peak value
12 System Particulars
i) Highest System Voltage 72.5 KV
ii) Frequency 50HZ ± 5%

iii) System neutral Solidly earthed
iv) Max. value of temporary over
voltage & its max. duration
- Insulation level of equipment to 325 KVp
be protected
- System short circuit level 31.5KA for 3 seconds.
13 Maximum continuous operating 52KV
voltage (MCOV)
14 Impulse withstand current 100KAp
15 Long Duration discharge class 3

16 Minimum single impulse energy
capability
17 Maximum residual voltage at 136 KVp
switching impulse current of 1KAp
(30/60 micro sec. wave)
Page 12 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0

No.
18 Max. residual voltage
(1x20 micro sec. wave)
i) At 05 KAp
ii) At 10 KAp
iii) At 20 KAp
19 Minimum creepage distance 31 mm/KV
20 Pressure relief class 40KA

21 Reference current (mA)
22 Leakage current at COV (mA)

Resistive
Capacitive
23 Dry and wet power frequency
withstand voltage of arrester
insulation (KVrms)
24 Virtual steepness for front of wave

for above (KV/micro sec.)
25 Ratio of system voltage withstand

level to protection level of surge
arrester
26 High current impulse withstand 4/10
micro second peak value (KV)
27 Long duration current Impulse
i) Current peak.
ii) Virtual duration.
28 Temporary Over Voltage Capacity
(KVp)
i) At 0.1 Sec.
ii) At 1.0 Sec.
iii) At 10.0 Sec.
iv) At 100.0 Sec.
29 Weight of complete unit (Kg)
30 Height of complete unit from base to
the line side (mm)
31 Minimum recommended spacing

between arresters Centro to Centro
(mm)
32 Clearance required from ground
equipment at various heights of
arresters unit (mm)
Page 13 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0

No.
33 Earthing arrangement provided for
earthing side of arresters.
34 Mounting flanges dimensional

details.
35 Type and range of milli-ampere

meter.
36 Type and specifications of the surge
connecters.
37 Surge counter min. current for 200 Amp

recording a lightning stroke
38 Surge counter max. disch. Current 100KA peak for 4/10
withstand wave shape.
39 Range of continuous leakage

current at rated voltage with
variation due to change in
temperature & frequency
40 Size and length of flexible Cu cable
for connection between LA & surge
counter
41 Voltage time curve for thermal To be provided
stability of LA after a stroke
42 Paint shade of surge counter Polyurethane, 692 of
housing IS-5
Page 14 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0
Annexure – C2
Guaranteed Tech. Particulars for 33KV Lightning Arrester

No.
2 Type Gapless, ZnO type,
single pole, heavy
duty, station class,
pedestal mounted
3 Model
4 No. of units.
5 Installation Outdoor
6 Application Protection of
Transformers, circuit
breakers, lines and
other outdoor S/S
equipment.
7 LA connection to system Phase to earth
8 Type of Conductor ACSR Zebra / Goat

9 Construction Single Phase
10 Rated voltage of arrester (KVrms) 30 KV
11 Nominal discharge current (Amps) 10KA
(8x20 micro sec. wave) peak value
i) Highest System Voltage 36 KV
ii) Frequency 50HZ ± 5%

iii) System neutral Solidly earthed
iv) Max. value of temporary over
voltage & its max. duration
- Insulation level of equipment to be 170 KVp
protected
- System short circuit level 26.3KA for 3 seconds.
13 Maximum continuous operating 25KV
voltage (MCOV)
14 Impulse withstand current 100KAp
15 Long Duration discharge class 3

16 Minimum single impulse energy
capability
17 Maximum residual voltage at 70 KVp
switching impulse current of 1KAp
(30/60 micro sec. wave)
Page 15 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0

No.
18 Max. residual voltage
(1x20 micro sec. wave)
i) At 05 KAp
ii) At 10 KAp
iii) At 20 KAp
19 Minimum creepage distance 31 mm/KV
20 Pressure relief class 40KA

21 Reference current (mA)
22 Leakage current at COV (mA)

Resistive
Capacitive
23 Dry and wet power frequency
withstand voltage of arrester
insulation (KVrms)
24 Virtual steepness for front of wave

for above (KV/micro sec.)
25 Ratio of system voltage withstand

level to protection level of surge
arrester
26 High current impulse withstand 4/10
micro second peak value (KV)
27 Long duration current Impulse

i) Current peak.
ii) Virtual duration.
28 Temporary Over Voltage Capacity
(KVp)
i) At 0.1 Sec.
ii) At 1.0 Sec.
iii) At 10.0 Sec.
iv) At 100.0 Sec.
29 Weight of complete unit (Kg)
30 Height of complete unit from base to
the line side (mm)
31 Minimum recommended spacing

between arresters Centro to Centro
(mm)
32 Clearance required from ground
equipment at various heights of
arresters unit (mm)
Page 16 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0

No.
33 Earthing arrangement provided for
earthing side of arresters.
34 Mounting flanges dimensional

details.
35 Type and range of milli-ampere

meter.
36 Type and specifications of the surge
connecters.
37 Surge counter min. current for 200 Amp

recording a lightning stroke
38 Surge counter max. disch. Current 100KA peak for 4/10
withstand wave shape.
39 Range of continuous leakage

current at rated voltage with
variation due to change in
temperature & frequency
40 Size and length of flexible Cu cable
for connection between LA & surge
counter
41 Voltage time curve for thermal To be provided
stability of LA after a stroke
42 Paint shade of surge counter Polyurethane, 692 of
housing IS-5
Page 17 of 18
SP-LALU-01-R0
Annexure – D
Recommended spares (Data by supplier)
List of recommended spares shall be submitted as follows –
Sr. Description of spare part Unit Quantity

No.
1 Nos.
2 Nos.
3
4
5
6
Page 18 of 18
SP-CBLU-01-R0
Index
General Specification ........................................................................................................................ 3
1.0.0 Codes & standards ............................................................................................................ 3
2.0.0 Circuit Breaker design features ....................................................................................... 4
3.0.0 Quality assurance ............................................................................................................ 11
4.0.0 Testing & Inspection ....................................................................................................... 12
5.0.0 Drawings, Data & manuals ............................................................................................. 13
6.0.0 Packing, Shipping, Handling & Storage........................................................................ 15
7.0.0 Progress reporting .......................................................................................................... 16
8.0.0 Deviations ......................................................................................................................... 16
Annexure - A Scope of supply .................................................................................................. 17
Annexure – B Service Conditions ............................................................................................. 19
Annexure - C Guaranteed Technical Particulars (33kV Circuit Breaker) ............................. 20
Annexure - D Guaranteed Technical Particulars (66kV Circuit Breaker) ............................. 31
Annexure - E Recommended spares (Data by supplier) ....................................................... 43
Page 2 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
1.0.0 Codes & standards
The circuit breakers shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the
latest applicable Indian Standard, IEC standard and CBIP manuals as listed below-
National Standards
CBIP manual
IS-2516 Specification for circuit. Breaker.
IS-13118-1991 Specification for high voltage alternating current circuit-

breaker
IS-335-1995 Insulating oil for Transformer & Switchgear.
IS-2090-1973 Bushing for alternating voltage above 1000 volts.
IS-731-1971 Insulator for Overhead lines.
IS -996-1979 Single phase small AC and Universal Electric Motors.
IS-7572-1974 Guide for testing single phase AC and Universal motors.

IS 4237-1967 General Requirement for switchgear for voltage not
exceeding 1Kv.
IS-2147-1962 degree of protection provided by enclosure for low-
voltage switchgear control gear.
IS-1554 Part-I 1988 PVC insulated cables up to & including 1100 volts.
IS-2208 HRC Cartridge fuses links up to 650 volts.
IS-375 Outdoor switchgear & control gear matching with latest

IS/IEC requirement
IS-2544 Porcelain Post Insulator
IS-5621 Hollow insulators for use in electrical equipment
Page 3 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
IEC-56 Specification for high voltage alternating current circuit-

breaker
IEC- 62271 – 100 High Voltage alternating Current Circuit Breaker
IEC-60694 Common specification for high voltage switchgear and
control gear standards
IEC-376 SF6 Gas
2.0.0 Circuit Breaker design features
2.1.0 Contacts
2.1.1 Making & Breaking Hermetically sealed, free from atmospheric
Contacts effects , adjustable to allow for wear and shall
have a minimum number of moveable parts
and adjustments to accomplish these results.
2.1.2 Arcing Contacts First to close and last to open
2.1.3 Main Contacts First to open and last to close.
2.1.4 Material of tips of contact Silver-plated and have tungsten alloy tipping.
2.2.0 Sulphur Hexa Fluoride Gas SF6 gas shall comply with IEC 376 , suitable
(SF6 Gas) in all respect for use in the switchgear under
all the operating conditions.
2.3.0 Operating Mechanism a) Suitable for high speed re-closing, anti-
pumping and trip free (as per IEC definition)
electrically or mechanically under every
method of closing (except during closing for
maintenance).
b) The operating mechanism shall be such
that the failure of any auxiliary spring will not
prevent tripping.
2.4.0 Indicators Electrical indicator as well as mechanical
indicator shall be provided for
a) Open and close position indication of
breaker.
b) Spring Charged indication
Page 4 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
c) Local / Remote indication

These indications shall be located in a
position where it will be visible to a man
standing on the ground with the
mechanism housing closed.
An operation counter shall also be
provided with each breaker.
SF6 gas density monitor shall be provided at
1.5 metre from ground level, tubing between
gauge & breaker shall be stainless steel.
2.5.0 Closing Coil Closing coil shall operate correctly at all
values of voltage between 85% and 110% of
the rated voltage.
2.6.0 Tripping Coil a) Shunt trip shall operate correctly at all
values of supply voltage between 70% and
110% of rated voltage.
b) Trip coil shall be suitable for trip circuit
supervision, the relay for monitoring which will
be provided by the purchaser and mounted on
control panel.
2.7.0 Remote / Local Closing & a) Operating mechanism shall normally be
Tripping operated by remote electrical control.
Electrical tripping shall be performed by
shunt trip coils.
b) A conveniently located manual tripping
lever or button shall also be provided for
local tripping of the breaker and
simultaneously opening the re-closing
circuit. It shall be possible to trip the
breaker in the event of auxiliary supply
failure.
2.8.0 Manual Spring Charging For spring charged mechanism a local manual
closing device which can easily be operated
by one man standing on the ground shall also
be provided for maintenance purpose and
Page 5 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
direction of motion of handle shall be clearly

marked.
2.9.0 Spring Operated a) Complete with motor, opening spring and
Mechanism closing spring with limit switch for
automatic charging and all other necessary
accessories to make the mechanism a
complete operating unit
b) One close-open operation shall be possible
after failure of power supply to motor
c) Closing action of the circuit breaker shall
compress the opening spring ready for
tripping.
2.10.0 Motors Motors shall be ‘Universal type’ capable of
satisfactory operation for the application and
duty as required by the driven equipment.
Motor shall be rated for 240 Volts AC.
2.10.1 Duty Requirement Motors shall be capable of giving rated output
without reduction in the expected life span
when operated continuously in the system.
2.10.2 Supply Voltage Variation ± 10%
2.10.3 Frequency variation ± 5%
2.10.4 Combined voltage & ± 10%

frequency
2.11.0 Interlocks Necessary interlocks to prevent the closing or
opening of the breaker under low SF6
pressure & devices for initiating alarm shall be
provided
2.12.0 Control Cabinets Operating mechanism and all accessories
shall be enclosed in a control cabinet. A
common marshalling box for the three poles of
the breaker shall be provided.
2.12.1 Enclosure Control cabinet enclosure shall be sheet steel
enclosed, dust, weather and vermin proof with
Page 6 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
a degree of protection as mentioned in

Annexure-B.
2.12.2 Mounting Control cabinets shall be suitable for mounting
on the breaker structure at sufficient height for
easy operation.
2.12.3 Doors & Locks Control, cabinets shall be provided with double
hinged doors with padlocking arrangement. All
doors, removable covers and plates shall be
gasketed all around with neoprene gaskets.
2.12.4 Control cables Control cable entries shall be from bottom.
Suitable removable, undrilled cable gland
plate shall be provided on the cabinet for this
purpose.
2.12.5 Heaters Suitable heaters with auto control for ON/OFF
at preset temp. shall be mounted in the
cabinet to prevent condensation. ON/OFF
switch and fuse shall also be provided. Heater
shall be suitable for 240 V AC supply voltage
2.12.6 Terminals a) Terminal blocks shall be 650 V grade 10
Amps rating, complete with insulated
barriers stud type terminals, washers, nuts
and lock nuts and identification strips.
Separate stud shall be provided for
incoming and outgoing, wires. Marking of
terminal strips shall correspond to wire
number on diagrams.
b) Terminal blocks shall be fully enclosed with

easily removable covers and made of
moulded non-inflammable plastic material.
The terminal blocks shall have marking
strips and all terminals shall be clearly
marked with identification numbers or
letters to facilitate connections to the
external wiring
Page 7 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
c) 20 percent spare terminal blocks shall be

provided for purchasers use in addition to
those already provided for interlocks
2.12.7 Illumination A suitable switch to operate on opening of the
door shall be provide to illuminate the interior
of the control cabinet
2.12.8 Control Cubicle Wiring All wiring shall be carried out with 650 Volt
grade Single core stranded, flexible copper
conductor wire with PVC insulation and shall
be vermin and rodent proof. The size of
control wire shall be 1.5 sqmm.
2.12.9 Lugs Wire terminations shall be made with
solderless crimping type of tinned copper lugs.
All lugs shall be pre insulated type.
2.12.10 Sleeves Insulated sleeves shall be provided at all the
wire ends and shall fit tightly on the wires and
shall not fall off when the wire is disconnected
from terminal blocks. The wire numbers on the
wiring diagram shall be in accordance with IS:
375 or to the international Standard
2.12.11 Push Button a) Close/Trip push buttons shall be
momentary contact type. The color of the
push button shall be subject to approval of
the Purchaser. Each push Button shall be
provided with integral inscription plates
engraved with their function.
b) All push buttons shall have two normally
open and two normally open and two c
normally closed contacts. The contact shall
be able to make and carry 5 Amps at
220V/110V/50V DC and shall be capable
of breaking 1 Amp. Inductive load
2.12.12 Switches All control switches shall be of rotary switch
type and toggle/piano switches shall not be
Page 8 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
accepted. All control switches shall be rated

for 220V/110V/50V DC
2.12.13 MCB 220V/110V/50V DC, 16A DP MCB shall be
used for control circuit and 240V AC, 10A SPN
MCB shall be used for motor and heater
circuit.
2.12.14 Earthing a) All metal parts not intended for carrying
current shall be made of stainless steel and
connected to duplicate earthing system and
suitable terminals shall be provided on each
equipment or part of equipment in conformity
with the I.E. Rules and relevant ISS.
b) The earth continuity conductor shall have
sufficient cross-sectional area so as afford a
low resistance path for the full fault current
corresponding to the Circuit breaker rating
c) The size of earth continuity conductor shall
be as large as possible to reduce the potential
rise to minimum of the metal frame of the
circuit breaker and in no case, more than 10
V.
d) The size of earth conductor shall also be
adequate, so as to restrict the temperature
rise to the limit without causing any damage to
the earth connection while short circuit current
flows through it for the short time rating of the
equipment
e) No riveted joints in current conducting path
shall be permitted. Only bolted joints with
proper size of nuts & bolts with Plain/spring
washer and also locking washer is permitted.
The nuts & bolts shall made of stainless steel
only.
2.13.0 Caution/Danger Plate Caution name plate shall be provided at all
points where terminals are likely to remain live
Page 9 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
and isolation is possibly only at remote end

2.14.0 Safety Interlocks Suitable provision for safety electrical
interlocks shall be made as per advise of the
purchaser
2.15.0 Bushings Porcelain used in bushing manufacture shall
be homogenous, free from laminations,
cavities and other flaws or imperfections that
might affect the mechanical or di-electric
quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified tough
and impervious to moisture
2.15.1 Colour & Glazing of Glazing of the porcelain shall be of uniform
Bushing brown colour free from blisters, burns and
similar other defects.
2.16.0 Galvanization All iron parts shall be hot-dip galvanized
2.17.0 Nuts & Bolts Nuts & Bolts shall be of stainless steel only
2.18.0 Joints All joints shall be airtight. Surfaces of the joints
shall be tarred up, porcelain parts by grinding
and metal part of machining.
2.19.0 Creepage distance The Creepage distance of the bushing shall in
no case be less than 31mm/KV. Suitable for
heavily polluted atmosphere
2.20.0 Duty Requirement of a) The circuit breakers shall be totally re strike
Circuit Breaker free under all duty conditions as per
specification in Annexure-B
b) The circuit breakers shall meet the above
duty requirements in case of application on
U/G cable circuits as well as on power
transformer
c) The circuit breaker shall be capable of
Breaking the steady and transient
magnetizing current corresponding to
transformers Breaking line charging
currents as per IS 2165 (Part-II Sec.2) with
a temporary over voltage of 3.5 PU without
the use of opening resistors.
Page 10 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
d) Breaking 25% of the rated fault current at

twice rated voltage under phase
oppositions conditions as per IS: 9135
1979
2.21.0 Transient recovery voltage The rated transient recovery voltage for
terminal fault and short line faults shall be as
per IS: 2165.
2.22.0 Temperature rise The temperature rise and the maximum
temperature on any part of the equipment
when in service at site under continuous full
load condition and exposed continuously in
the direct rays of the sun shall not exceed the
permissible limits as per table-4 of IEC
publication No. 56-2 and IS: 2516 when the
standard specifies the limit of temperature
rise. This shall not be exceeded when
corrected for the difference between the
ambient temperature at site and the ambient
temperature specified in the relevant
specification. The correction proposed shall be
stated in the tender and shall be subjected to
the approval of the purchaser
2.23.0 Painting Polyurethane based paints shall be used. The
color for the finishing paint shall be light gray
as per shade No. 692 of IS-5.
2.24.0 Line side terminal Al-alloy terminal connectors shall suitable for
connector single/twin ACSR conductor as specified in
Annexure-C.
3.0.0 Quality assurance

3.2.0 Inspection points To be mutually identified & agreed in
quality plan
Page 11 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
4.1.0 Tests Test shall be carried out in accordance

with IS-13118 / IEC-56 / IEC-60694 /
IEC-62271-100
4.1.1 Type Tests a) Circuit breakers must be of type tested
quality.
b) Incase, the product is never type
tested earlier, seller has to conduct the
type tests from Govt. recognized /
Internationally accredited test Labs at
their own cost, before commencement
of supply.
c) If the manufacturer’s lab is accredited
by govt. /authorised body then it shall
4.1.2 Routine test Test shall be carried out in accordance
with IS-13118 / IEC-56 / IEC-60694 / IEC-
62271-100
4.1.3 Acceptance Test Test shall be carried out in accordance
with IS-13118 / IEC-56 / IEC-60694 / IEC-
62271-100
4.2.0 Tests on fitting and Accessories As per Manufacturer’s Standards
4.3.0 Inspection and Testing a) The Buyer reserves the right to witness
all tests specified on completed
product.
b) The Buyer reserves the right to inspect
the product at the Sellers works at any
time prior to dispatch, to verify
c) In-process and final inspection call
intimation shall be given in advance to
purchaser.
Page 12 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
5.0.0 Drawings, Data & manuals
5.1.0 To be submitted along with bid The seller has to submit :

a-1: Complete assembly drawing of the
outdoor type circuit breaker showing plan,
elevation and typical sectional view giving
complete dimensions.
a-2: Assembly drawings and weight of
main component parts
a-3: Drawings showing the loads for
foundations
a-4: Schematic control and wiring diagram
in accordance with National / International
practice
a-5: Structural drawing and the breaker
mounting arrangement
a-6: Rating Plate diagram
a-7: Drawings of terminal connectors
b) Detailed reference list of customers
already using the offered product during the
last 5 years with similar design and rating.
c) Completely filled GTP
d) Deviations from this specification. Only
deviations approved in writing before
award of contract shall be accepted.
e) Details of manufacturer's quality
assurance standards and programme and
ISO 9000 series or equivalent national
certification.
f) Type test reports shall be submitted for
the type, size & rating of product /
equipment offered along with bid. They
shall be considered valid for 5 years from
date of test performed on product
/equipment.
Page 13 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
g) Complete product catalogue and

Manual along with the bid.
h) Recommended spare parts and
consumable items for five years of operation
with prices and spare parts catalogue with
price list for future requirements
5.2.0 After award of contract, seller has to a) Programme for production and testing (A)
submit mentioned drawings for
buyer’s Approval (A) / Reference
(R)
b) Guaranteed Technical Particulars (A)
c) Calculations to substantiate choice of

electrical, structural, mechanical component
size / ratings (A)
e-1: General arrangement drawing of the
circuit breaker (A).
e-2: Schematic wiring diagram of the circuit
breaker external wiring termination
along with terminal and wiring
numbers for the various equipment
controlled from the control panel etc
(A)
e-3: Foundation drawings of circuit breaker
with size & nos of foundation bolts (A)
e-4: Structural erection drawings (A)
e-5: Terminal connector drawings. (A)
e-6: Detailed loading drawing to enable
the buyer to design and construct
foundations (as applicable) (R)
e-7: General arrangement drawing of
control cabinet (A)
f) detailed installation and commissioning
instructions (R)
g) quality plan
Page 14 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
5.3.0 Submittals required prior to a) Inspection and test reports, carried out
dispatch in manufacturer’s works (R)
b) Test certificates of all bought out items
c) Operation and maintenance Instruction as
well as trouble shooting charts/ manuals
5.4.0 Drawing and document sizes Standard size paper A0, A1, A2, A3, A4
5.5.0 No of drgs. / Documents required at As per Annexure- A
different stages
6.0.0 Packing, Shipping, Handling & Storage
6.1.1 Packing Protection Against corrosion, dampness, heavy

rains, breakage and vibration
6.1.2 Packing for accessories and spares Robust wooden non returnable packing
case with all the above protection &
identification Label
6.1.3 Packing Identification Label In each packing case, following details
are required :
a) Individual serial number
b) Purchaser's name
c) PO number (along with SAP item code,
if any) & date
d) Equipment Tag no. (if any)
e) Destination
f) Manufacturer / Supplier's name
g) Address of Manufacturer / Supplier /
it’s agent
h) Description and Quantity
i) Country of origin
j) Month & year of Manufacturing
k) Case measurements
l) Gross and net weights in kilograms
m) All necessary slinging and stacking
instructions
6.2.0 Shipping a) Bidder shall furnish the confirmation
that the proposed packages can be
delivered safely upto the site.
Page 15 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
b) The seller shall be responsible for all

transit damage due to improper packing.
6.3.0 Handling & Storage Manufacturer instruction shall be
followed. Detail handling & storage
instruction sheet / manual needs to be
furnished before commencement of
supply.
7.0.0 Progress reporting
7.1.0 Outline Document To be submitted for purchaser approval

for outline of production, inspection,
testing, packing, dispatch, documentation
programme
7.2.0 Detailed Progress report To be submitted to Purchaser once a
month containing
a) Progress on material procurement
b) Progress on fabrication (As applicable)
c) Progress on assembly (As applicable)
d) Progress on internal stage inspection
e) Reason for any delay in total
programme
f) Details of test failures if any in
manufacturing stages
g) Progress on final box up
h) Constraints / forward path
8.0.0 Deviations
8.0.0 Deviation from the Specification Deviations from this Specification shall
be stated in writing with the tender by
reference to the Specification
clause/GTP/Drawing and a description of
the alternative offer. In absence of such a
statement, it will be assumed by the
Buyer that the Seller complies fully with
this specification.
Page 16 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
Annexure - A Scope of supply
1.1 Design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer works before dispatch, packing,

delivery of Circuit Breaker as per BOQ and submission of all documents.
1.2 Supply of SF6 Gas cylinder for first filling.
1.3 Gas filling equipment with valves and tubing
1.4 Terminal connector
1.5 Hot-dip galvanized supporting structure along with foundation bolts.
1.6 Supervision of testing & commissioning of Circuit Breaker at site
1.7 BOQ as following -
Sr Purchaser Equipment Location / Unit Quantity
No Equipment Tag Description Substation name
No / SAP code
1 e.g. Santacruz No e.g. 1
2 e.g. Alaknanda No e.g. 1
3
4
5
6
7
Submission of of drawings , calculations, catalogues, manuals, test reports shall be as

follows-
contract
Drawings 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 See Clause 5.0
(Typical drgs) soft copy in CD for various
drawings
required
Calculations 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 See Clause 5.0
(Typical) soft copy in CD for details
Page 17 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

soft copy in CD
manual for the soft copy in CD
circuit breaker
soft copy in CD sample routine
test reports
Delivery schedule
2.1 Delivery period start date - from date of purchase order
2.3 Material dispatch clearance - after inspection by purchaser and
written dispatch clearances for
purchaser
Page 18 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
Annexure – B Service Conditions
1.0.0 Mumbai Atmospheric

conditions
a) Average grade atmosphere : Heavily polluted , salt Laden, dusty, humid with
possibility of condensation
level
temperature
g) Seismic Zone 3

level
temperature
g) Seismic Zone 4
Page 19 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
Annexure - C Guaranteed Technical Particulars (33kV Circuit Breaker)
Sr. No. Description Data By Purchaser Data By Supplier

1.0 Name of manufacturer
2.0 Manufacturer’s type and
designation
3.0 Governing standard As per Clause 1.0.0 0f the
specification
4.0 Type of circuit breaker Vacuum
5.0 Installation Outdoor
6.0 No. of phase & no. of 3 (Three), 3 (Three)
pole
7.0 Rated voltage (kV) 33kV
8.0 Highest system voltage 36kV
(kV)
9.0 System Neutral Solidly earthed
10.0 Rated insulation level 170kVp
11.0 Frequency (Hz) 50Hz
12.0 Class
13.0 Normal current rating
(amps)
13.1 Under standard 1250A
conditions
13.2 Under site conditions
overload rating
a) 1 Hour
b) 3 Hour
13.3 Derating factor, if any, for
site condition
13.4 Temperature rise at
150% rating for 3 Hours
14.0 Short time current rating
(kA)
(a) For 1 Second
(b) For 3 Second 25kA
Page 20 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

15.0 Maximum temperature 40 deg C
rise over highest ambient
( refer annexure-B ) due
to rated current in main
contacts, measured after
breaking test.
16.0 Rated short circuit
breaking current
16.1 Rated short circuit current
(Ac component)
16.2 Percentage DC
component at KV
16.3 Asymmetrical breaking
Current (including DC
Component)
16.4 Making capacity (KA
peak) – at KV
17.0 Rated operating O-0.3Sec.-CO-3Min.-CO
sequence
18.0 Total break time (Milli-
seconds) :
18.1 For interruption of 10% of 60ms (max)

the rated capacity
the rated capacity
the rated capacity
18.4 For interruption of the full 60ms (max)
rated capacity
19.0 Arcing time (Milli-
seconds)
20.0 Opening time (Milli-
seconds)
Page 21 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

21.0 Break time (Milli-seconds)
22.0 Closing time (Milli- 60ms (max)
seconds)
23.0 Minimum re-closing time
at rated interrupted
capacity from the instant
of the trip coil
energisation (Milli-
seconds)
24.0 Minimum dead time for
24.1 3 phase re-closing
(Milli-seconds)
24.2 Limit of adjustment of
dead time for 3- phase re-
closing.
25.0 Data on re-striking 100% 50% 30%
voltage for 100%, 50% or
30% rated capacity
25.1 Phase factor

25.2 Amplitude factor
25.3 Natural frequency (Hz)
25.4 Rate of rise of re-striking
voltage (V/micro sec.)
26.0 Rated out-of phase
breaking current
27.0 Rated line charging
breaking current
28.0 Maximum line charging
current breaking capacity
and corresponding over-
voltage recorded in
test:
a) On supply side
b) On line side
Page 22 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

29.0 Maximum cable charging
current :
breaking capacity and
corresponding over-
voltage recorded in test:
a) On supply side.
b) On line side
30.0 Rated single capacitor
bank :
30.1 Capacity in rush current
handling, capability
30.2 Capacitive breaking
current Capability.
31.0 Rated small inductive
breaking current and the
corresponding over
voltage
32.0 First pole to clear factor 1.5
33.0 Rated transient recovery

voltage for terminal faults
34.0 Rated characters for
short line faults is rate of
rise.
30.0 Rated short circuit
breaking current
35.0 Dry 1-minute power
frequency test withstand
voltage, for complete
circuit breaker
35.1 Between line terminal and 80kV (rms)
grounded parts (KV rms)
Page 23 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
35.2 Between terminals with 80kV (rms)

breaker contact open (KV
rms)
36.0 Wet 1-minute power
voltage :
breakers contacts open
(KV rms)
36.3 Between poles
37.0 1.2/50 microsecond wave

impulse with stand test
voltage for complete
circuit breaker:
37.1 Between line terminal and 200kVp
ground (KV peak)
37.2 Between terminal with 200kVp

circuit breaker contacts
open.
37.3 Between Poles
38.0 Minimum Clearance in

air.
38.1 Between phases (mm). 320mm (min)
38.2 Live parts and earth 320mm (min)

(mm).
38.3 Live parts to ground level 3700mm (min)
(mm).
Page 24 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
39.0 Number of operation

possible without
maintenance.
39.1 At full rated interrupting
capacity
35.2 At 150% of rated current.
39.3 At 100% of rated current
40.0 Supporting Insulator
40.1 Make and type.
40.2 Insulation class A
40.3 Weight.
40.4 Transport dimensions.
40.5 Visible corona discharge

voltage
40.6 Dry-1 minute power 70kV rms
frequency flashover
voltage.
40.7 Wet-1-minute power 70kV rms
frequency lashover
voltage.
40.8 1.2/50 microsecond 170kVp
impulse flashover
voltage.
Page 25 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
40.9 Creepage distance to

ground (mm)
a) Total 31mm/kV
b) Protected
41.0 No. of breaks per pole 1 (one)
42.0 Total length or breaks per

phase (mm)
43.0 Type of main contacts
44.0 Material of main contacts Silver plated copper
45.0 Whether main contacts

silver plated (Yes/No.)
Thickness of silver 15 +/- 5 microns (min)
coating on main contacts
(mm).
46.0 Contact pressure on
arcing contacts (kg/m2).
47.0 Type of arcing contacts
48.0 Contact pressure on main

contact (kg/m2).
49.0 Type of auxiliary
switches.
50.0 Whether all contacts
silver plated (Yes/No)
51.0 No. of auxiliary switch
contacts operating with all
three poles of breaker
51.1 Which are closed when
breaker is closed.
Page 26 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
51.2 Which are open when

breaker is closed
51.3 Those adjustable with
respect to the position of
main contacts
52.0 No. of spare auxiliary
switch contacts operation
with all three poles of
breaker:
52.1 Which are closed when 6 (six)
breaker is closed
52.2 Which are open when 6 (six)
breaker is closed
main contacts
53.0 Total number of terminal
block
54.0 Number of spare terminal 20%
Block:
55.0 Mounting flange details:
(a)Opening.
(b)Closing.
56.0 Tripping and closing 50V/110V/220V DC
circuit voltage (V).
57.0 Power required for trip
coil
58.0 Power required for
closing coil.
59.0 Rated voltage for spring 240V AC
charging motor
60.0 Rated voltage of space 240V AC
heater and socket
Page 27 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
61.0 Contingencies for which

alarm provided
62.0 Design data for
supporting structure.
63.0 Weight of supporting
steel structure for
breaker.
64.0 Descriptive leaflets
enclosed (Yes/No)
65.0 Operating Mechanism
65.1 Type of operating

mechanism offered
65.2 Manufacturer’s type
designation
65.3 Material of control cabinet
enclosure
65.4 Thickness of sheet metal 3.0mm for bottom and
enclosure 2.5mm elsewhere.
65.5 Painting & colour shade Polyurethane paint, 692 of
IS-5
65.6 Enclosure protection IP 55
65.7 Pad locking facility

provided (Yes/No)
65.8 Wring
a) Control wire size 1.5 Sqmm
b) Insulation 650V
c) Colour Grey for control, Black for
AC and Green for earth
Page 28 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
65.9 Normal power

consumption at rated
voltage (Watt)
65.10 Normal power of spring
charging motor
65.11 Number of close/open
operation possible after
failure of AC supply to
motor
65.12 Time required to charge
the closing spring
65.13 Whether indication of Yes
spring charged condition
provided in central control
cabinet (Yes/No)
65.14 Dimension of the control
cabinets.
65.15 Weight of control cabinet
66.0 Details of safety interlock

provided
67.0 Whether supporting Yes
structure for circuit
breaker provided
(Yes/No)
67.1 Thickness of galvanizing
(mm)
67.2 Size of foundation bolts
68.0 Material of nuts & bolts Stainless steel
69.0 Weight of 3-phase

breaker complete with
operating mechanism,
insulating support frame
work, etc.
Page 29 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
70.0 Impact loading for

foundation design to
include load plus impact
value on opening at
maximum interrupting
ratings in terms of
equivalent of static load.
71.0 Weight of heaviest
package
Page 30 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
Annexure - D Guaranteed Technical Particulars (66kV Circuit Breaker)
Sr. Description Data By Purchaser Data By Supplier

No.
1.0 Name of manufacturer
2.0 Manufacturer’s type and
designation
3.0 Governing standard As per Clause 1.0.0 0f
the specification
4.0 Type of circuit breaker SF6
5.0 Installation Outdoor
6.0 No. of phase & no. of pole 3 (Three), 3 (Three)
7.0 Rated voltage (kV) 66 kV
8.0 Highest system voltage 72.5 kV
(kV)
9.0 System Neutral Solidly earthed
10.0 Rated insulation level 325kVp
11.0 Frequency (Hz) 50Hz
12.0 Class
13.0 Normal current rating
(amps)
13.1 Under standard conditions 2000A
13.2 Under site conditions
overload rating
c) 1 Hour
d) 3 Hour
13.3 Derating factor, if any, for
site condition
13.4 Temperature rise at 150%
rating for 3 Hours
14.0 Short time current rating
(kA)
(a) For 1 Second
(b) For 3 Second 31.5kA
Page 31 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

No.
15.0 Maximum temperature rise 40 deg C
over highest ambient ( refer
annexure-B ) due to rated
current in main contacts,
measured after breaking
test.
16.0 Rated short circuit breaking
current
16.1 Rated short circuit current
(Ac component)
16.2 Percentage DC component
at KV
16.3 Asymmetrical breaking
Current (including DC
Component)
16.4 Making capacity (KA peak)
– at KV
17.0 Rated operating sequence O-0.3Sec.-CO-3Min.-CO
18.0 Total break time (Milli-
seconds) :

the rated capacity
the rated capacity
the rated capacity
18.4 For interruption of the full 60ms (max)
rated capacity
19.0 Arcing time (Milli-seconds)
20.0 Opening time (Milli-
seconds)
21.0 Break time (Milli-seconds)
Page 32 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

No.
22.0 Closing time (Milli-seconds) 60ms (max)
23.0 Minimum re-closing time at
rated interrupted capacity
from the instant of the trip
coil energisation (Milli-
seconds)
24.0 Minimum dead time for
24.1 3 phase re-closing
(Milli-seconds)
24.2 Limit of adjustment of dead
time for 3- phase re-
closing.
25.0 Data on re-striking voltage 100% 50% 30%
for 100%, 50% or 30%
rated capacity
25.1 Phase factor

25.2 Amplitude factor
25.3 Natural frequency (Hz)
25.4 Rate of rise of re-striking
voltage (V/micro sec.)
26.0 Rated out-of phase
breaking current
27.0 Rated line charging
breaking current
28.0 Maximum line charging
current :
breaking capacity and
corresponding over-voltage
recorded in test:
c) On supply side
d) On line side
Page 33 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

No.
29.0 Maximum cable charging
current breaking capacity
and corresponding over-
voltage recorded in test:
a) On supply side.
b) On line side
30.0 Rated single capacitor
bank :
30.1 Capacity in rush current
handling, capability
30.2 Capacitive breaking current
Capability.
31.0 Rated small inductive
breaking current and the
corresponding over voltage
32.0 First pole to clear factor 1.5
33.0 Rated transient recovery

voltage for terminal faults
34.0 Rated characters for short
line faults is rate of rise.
30.0 Rated short circuit breaking
current
35.0 Dry 1-minute power
voltage, for complete circuit
breaker
breaker contact open (KV
rms)
Page 34 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

No.
36.0 Wet 1-minute power
voltage :
breakers contacts open
(KV rms)
36.3 Between poles
37.0 1.2/50 microsecond wave

impulse with stand test
voltage for complete circuit
breaker:
37.1 Between line terminal and 325kVp
ground (KV peak)
37.2 Between terminal with 325kVp

circuit breaker contacts
open.
37.3 Between Poles
38.0 Minimum Clearance in air.
38.1 Between phases (mm). 630mm (min)
38.2 Live parts and earth (mm). 630mm (min)
38.3 Live parts to ground level 4000mm (min)

(mm).
39.0 Number of operation
possible without
maintenance.
Page 35 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

No.
39.1 At full rated interrupting
capacity
39.3 At 100% of rated current
40.0 Supporting Insulator
40.1 Make and type.
40.2 Insulation class A
40.3 Weight.
40.4 Transport dimensions.
40.5 Visible corona discharge

voltage
40.6 Dry-1 minute power 140kV rms
frequency flashover
voltage.
40.7 Wet-1-minute power 140kV rms
frequency lashover
voltage.
40.8 1.2/50 microsecond 325kVp
impulse flashover voltage.
40.9 Creepage distance to
ground (mm)
c) Total 31mm/kV
d) Protected
Page 36 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

No.
41.0 No. of breaks per pole 1 (one)
42.0 Total length or breaks per

phase (mm)
43.0 Type of main contacts
44.0 Material of main contacts Silver plated copper
45.0 Whether main contacts

silver plated (Yes/No.)
Thickness of silver coating 15 +/- 5 microns (min)
on main contacts (mm).
46.0 Contact pressure on arcing
contacts (kg/m2).
47.0 Type of arcing contacts
48.0 Contact pressure on main

contact (kg/m2).
49.0 Type of auxiliary switches.
50.0 Whether all contacts silver

plated (Yes/No)
51.0 No. of auxiliary switch
contacts operating with all
three poles of breaker
51.1 Which are closed when
breaker is closed.
51.2 Which are open when
breaker is closed
main contacts
Page 37 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

No.
52.0 No. of spare auxiliary
switch contacts operation
with all three poles of
breaker:
52.1 Which are closed when 6 (six)
breaker is closed
52.2 Which are open when 6 (six)
breaker is closed
main contacts
53.0 Total number of terminal
block
54.0 Number of spare terminal 20%
Block:
55.0 Mounting flange details:
(a)Opening.
(b)Closing.
56.0 Tripping and closing circuit 50V/110V/220V DC
voltage (V).
57.0 Power required for trip coil
58.0 Power required for closing

coil.
59.0 Rated voltage for spring 240V AC
charging motor
60.0 Rated voltage of space 240V AC
heater and socket
61.0 Contingencies for which
alarm provided
62.0 Design data for supporting
structure.
Page 38 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

No.
63.0 Weight of supporting steel
structure for breaker.
64.0 Descriptive leaflets
enclosed (Yes/No)
65.0 For SF6 gas circuit breaker
65.1 Rated pressure of SF-6

Gas in the gas cylinder
(kg./sq cm.).
65.2 Quantity of SF-6 gas
required per single pole
unit (kg.)
required cylinder (kg.)
65.4 Weight of empty cylinder
(kg).
65.5 Quantity of absorbent
required per pole (kg).
65.6 Recommended interval for
renewal of absorbent in
case of outdoor circuit
breakers operating in
tropical conditions.
65.7 Chemical composition of
the absorbent
65.8 Quantity of absorbent
covered in the scope of
supply. (including spare
qty. ) (kg).
65.9 Limit of gas pressure for
proper operation of circuit
breaker.
Page 39 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

No.
65.10 Pressure and temperature
at which the temperature
compensated gas pressure
switch will:
a) Give alarm.
b) Cut off.
65.11 Name of SF-6 supplier and
country of origin.
supplied for:
a) Actual use in
breaker (kg).
b) As spare (kg).
65.13 Chemical composition of
gas:
a) Qty. of air by
weight (ppm).
b) Qty. of H20 by
weight (ppm).
c) Qty. of CF4 by
weight (ppm).
66.0 Operating Mechanism
66.1 Type of operating

mechanism offered
66.2 Manufacturer’s type
designation
66.3 Material of control cabinet
enclosure
66.4 Thickness of sheet metal 3.0mm for bottom and
enclosure 2.5mm elsewhere.
66.5 Painting & colour shade Polyurethane paint, 692
of IS-5
Page 40 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

No.
66.6 Enclosure protection IP 55
66.7 Pad locking facility

provided (Yes/No)
66.8 Wring
a) Control wire size 1.5 Sqmm
b) Insulation 650V
c) Colour Grey for control, Black
for AC and Green for
earth
66.9 Normal power consumption
at rated voltage (Watt)
66.10 Normal power of spring
charging motor
66.11 Number of close/open
operation possible after
failure of AC supply to
motor
66.12 Time required to charge

the closing spring
66.13 Whether indication of
spring charged condition
provided in central control
cabinet (Yes/No)
66.14 Dimension of the control
cabinets.
66.15 Weight of control cabinet
Page 41 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0

No.
67.0 Details of safety interlock
provided
68.0 Whether supporting
structure for circuit breaker
provided (Yes/No)
68.1 Thickness of galvanizing
(mm)
68.2 Size of foundation bolts
69.0 Material of nuts & bolts Stainless steel
70.0 Weight of 3-phase breaker

complete with operating
mechanism, insulating
support frame work, etc.
71.0 Impact loading for
foundation design to
include load plus impact
value on opening at
maximum interrupting
ratings in terms of
equivalent of static load.
72.0 Weight of heaviest
package
Page 42 of 43
SP-CBLU-01-R0
Annexure - E Recommended spares (Data by supplier)
List of recommended spares as following –
Sr No Description of spare part Unit Quantity

1 No
2 No
3
4
5
6
Page 43 of 43
, - ,~--------- ~,------
8SE
Specification for
OUTDOOR CURRENT TI~ANSF()I{MI'~I{
(33 & 66KV)
Specification no. SP-CTLU-01-R1
I , , I I -~--- --~
Prepared by' Rev I Date
NarnelSign
os 00 I 29 -Jan-OS
Tanu K.K.Alla 01 I 16-JLlly 14
\
!,"
\ " ~-
'J
Page 1 of 23 \-
SP-CTLU-01-R1
Record of Revision
Sl. Revision Clause Nature of change Approved by

no. no. No.
1. R1 2.2 All ferrous parts, CT tank and other MDB/KKA
metallic parts exposed to atmosphere
shall be hot dip galvanised with
galvanising thickness of 610gm/sqmm
minimum.
2. R1 3.0.0 ABIL and IEC included in approved MDB/KKA
makes of insulators
3. R1 6.1.1 Type Test to be conducted from MDB/KKA
CPRI/ERDA
4. R1 Annexure Accuracy class of metering core shall MDB/KKA
C, 10.4 be 0.2s
5. R1 Annexure Knee point voltage & corresponding MDB/KKA
C, 10.7 exciting current (project specific) shall
be greater than or equal to 40
(RCT+8)
6. R1 Annexure Magnetizing current at Vk/2 (project MDB/KKA
C, 10.8 specific) shall be less than or equal to
30 mA
Page 2 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
Index
General Specification .........................................................................................................3
1.0 Codes & standards .......................................................................................................3
2.0 Current transformer design features...........................................................................3
3.0 Approved make of components ..................................................................................5
4.0 Name Plate and Terminal Marking ...............................................................................5
5.0 Quality assurance.........................................................................................................5
6.0 Testing & Inspection ....................................................................................................6
7.0 Drawings, Data & manuals ...........................................................................................7
8.0 Packing, Shipping, Handling & Storage ......................................................................8
9.0 Progress reporting .......................................................................................................9
10.0 Deviations .................................................................................................................10
Annexure – A Scope of supply ......................................................................................11
Annexure – B Service Conditions .................................................................................13
Annexure- C1 Guaranteed Technical Particulars (33kV, 800-400/1/1/1/1A) .................14
Annexure – C2 Guaranteed Technical Particulars (33kV, 2000-1000/1/1/1/1A) ...........16
Annexure – D1 Guaranteed Technical Particulars (66kV, 400-200/1/1/1/1A) ...............18
Annexure – D2 Guaranteed Technical Particulars (66kV, 800-400/1/1/1/1A) ...............20
Annexure – D3 Guaranteed Technical Particulars (66kV, 1600-800/1/1/1/1A) .............20
Annexure – E Recommended spares (Data by supplier) .............................................22
Page 3 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1

The current transformer shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the
latest applicable Indian Standard, IEC standard and CBIP manuals as listed below –
National Standard

CBIP manual
IS- 335 New insulating oil
IS-2705 (Part I to V) Specification for current transformer.
IS-4201 Application guide for current transformer.
IS-2099 High voltage porcelain bushings
IS-731 Insulator for O/H power line
IS-335 New insulating oil for transformer and switchgear.
IS-9676 Reference ambient temperature of electrical equipment
IS-5561 Specification of electric power connectors
IS-9676 Summation current transformer
IS-4201 Application guide for current transformer
IS-5621 Hollow insulator for use in electrical equipment
International Standard
IEC: 137 Bushing for alternating current above 1000V
IEC: 185 Specification for current transformers
IEC: 439 Specification for Terminal box / Marshalling box
2.0 DESIGN FEATURES

Shall be dead tank type; oil immersed, self-cooled outdoor
2.1 Type
type or Polycrete.
a) Oil immersed CT shall be hermetically sealed to
eliminate breathing and to prevent air and moisture. The
core and winding shall be provided in porcelain bushing.
Provision for oil expansion without breathing to be
2.2 Construction provided (diaphragm or bellow as per manufacturer
design) .
b) All ferrous parts, CT tank and other metallic parts
exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanized.
c) Galvanising thickness shall be 610gm/sqmm minimum
The core shall be of high-grade non-ageing, electrical silicon
laminated steel of low hysteresis loss and high permeability
to ensure high accuracy at both normal and over current
2.3 Core
conditions. The saturation factor of the core shall be low
enough not to cause any damage to measuring instruments
in the event of maximum short circuit current.
The winding shall be suitable for simultaneous 100% full load
2.4 Winding continuous rating. The winding shall be capable of desired
output as per specified limit.
The current transformer shall withstand satisfactorily the
2.5 Insulation
dielectric test voltage corresponding to basic insulation level
Page 4 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
specified.
The quantity of insulating oil in each current transformer shall
be best available and the complete specification of the oil
shall be furnished with the tender. The current transformer
2.6 Insulation Oil
offered shall be hermetically sealed completely filled with
insulating oil with provision to replace the oil. Oil level
indication shall be provided.
Porcelain used in bushing manufacture shall be
homogenous, free from laminations, cavities and other flaws
or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric
2.7 Bushing quality. Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown color
free blisters, burns and similar defects. The bushing shall be
designated to have ample insulation, mechanical strength
and rigidity.
2.8 Creepage distance Not less than 31mm /KV
2.9 Terminal Connectors
The current transformers offered shall be supplied with
2.9.1 Primary Aluminum- alloy terminal connector with bimetallic sleeve,
suitable for connection with single/double ACSR conductor.
All the secondary terminals shall be bought in IP55 box with
brass/ copper stud type terminals. The secondary terminals
shall be shorted by brass/copper links before dispatch.
2.9.2 Secondary Terminal box to be provided with earthing stud
Box shall be of adequate size with proper clearance between
the terminals for ease of working and maintenance.
Gasket for Box shall be Neoprene.
2.10 Terminal Marking Terminal marking shall be as per IS 2705
3.0 APPROVED MAKE OF COMPONENTS
3.1.0 Insulator JSI/WSI/Modern/Saravana/BHEL/ABIL/IEC

3.2.0 Terminals Connectwell / Elmex
4.0 NAME PLATE & TERMINAL MARKING

4.1.0 Name Plate
4.1.1 Material Anodized Aluminium 16SWG
4.1.2 Background SATIN SILVER
4.1.3 Letters, diagram &
Black
border
4.1.4 Process Etching
Manufacturer name & address, year of manufacturer, Serial
number and type designation, Rated Primary & secondary
4.1.5 current, rated frequency, rated output and accuracy class,
Name plate details
Highest system voltage, Rated Insulation level, Rated short-
time thermal current or short time factor with rated time,
Rated dynamic current, Reference Standard.
4.2.0 Danger plate on front
Not required
& rear side
5.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE

5.2.0 Inspection points To be mutually identified & agreed in
quality plan
Page 5 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
Page 6 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
6.0 INSPECTION & TESTING

6.1.0 Test shall be carried out in accordance with IS-2705 / IEC-
Test
185
a) Following type test shall be carried out on current
transformer-
- Short-time current test
- Temperature-rise test
- Lightning impulse test
6.1.1 - HV power frequency wet withstand voltage test on CT
Type test
- Determination of errors
b) Current transformer must be of type tested from
CPRI/ERDA and reports hall be submitted.
c) In case the product is never type tested earlier, seller has
to conduct the type tests from CPRI/ERDA at their own cost,
before commencement of supply.
Routine test
185
Acceptance test
185
6.2.0 Test on fitting and
As per manufacturer’s standard
accessories
6.3.0 a) The buyer reserves the right to witness all tests specified
Inspection and Testing
on completed product
b) The buyer reserves the right to inspect the product at the
seller’s works at any time prior to dispatch, to verify
c) In-process and final inspection call intimation shall be
given, 10 days in advance to Purchaser.
7.0 DRAWINGS, DATA & MANUALS
7.1.0 To be submitted along with bid The seller has to be submit :

a-1) Complete assembly, GA drawing
outdoor current transformer showing plan,
elevation and typical section view.
a-2) Typical connection diagram and winding
connection of current transformer.
a-3) Secondary box details
a-4) Structural drawing for CT mounting
arrangement
a-5) Rating plate diagram
a-6) Drawings of terminal connectors
b) Detailed reference list of customers
already using the offered product during
the last 5 years with similar design and
rating.
c) Completely filled GTP
d) Deviations from this specification. Only
deviations approved in writing before
award of contract shall be accepted.
e) Details of manufacturer’s quality
assurance standards and program and
ISO 9000 series or equivalent national
Page 7 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
certification
f) Type test report shall be submitted for
the type, size & rating of product /
equipment offered along with bid. They
shall be considered valid for 5 years from
date of test performed on product /
equipment.
g) Complete product catalogue and manual
along with the bid.
h) Recommended spare parts and
consumable items for 5 years of
operation with prices and spare parts
catalogue with list for future
requirements.
7.2.0 After award of contract, seller has a) Programme for production and testing
to submit mentioned drawings for (A)
buyer’s Approval (A ) / Reference b) Guaranteed Techinal Particulars (A)
(R) c) Calculations to substantiate choice of
electrical , mechanical component size /
ratings (A)
d-1) General arrangement drawing of
the current transformer (A)
d-2) Typical connection diagram and
winding connection of current
Transformer (A).
d-5) Terminal connector drawings (A)
d-7) General arrangement drawing
secondary terminal box (A)
e) Detailed installation and commissioning
instructions ( R)
f) Quality plan
7.3.0 Submittals required prior to a) Inspection and test reports, carried out
dispatch in manufacturer’s work (R )
b) Test certificates of all bought out items
c) Operation and maintenance instruction
as well as trouble shooting charts /
manuals.
7.4.0 Drawing and document sizes Standard size paper A0, A1 , A2, A3, A4
7.5.0 No of drgs./Documents required at As per Annexure A
different stages
8.0 PACKING , SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE
8.0.0 Packing
8.1.1 Packing protection Against corrosion , dampness, heavy rains, breakage and
vibration
8.1.2 Packing for accessories Robust wooden non returnable packing case with all the
and spares above protection and identification labels.
Page 8 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
8.1.3 Packing identification In each packing case, following details are required :
label a) Individual serial number
b) Purchaser’s name
c) PO number (along with SAP item code , if any) &
date
d) Equipment Tag no. (if any)
e) Destination
f) Manufacturer / Supplier’s name
g) Address of manufacturer’s / supplier’s its agent
h) Description and quantity
i) Country of origin
j) Month and year of manufacturing
k) Case measurements
l) Gross and net weight in kilograms
m) All necessary slinging and stacking instructions.
8.1.4 Shipping a) The bidder shall furnish the confirmation that the
proposed packages can be delivered safely upto
the site.
b) The seller shall be responsible for all transit
8.1.5 Handling and Storage Manufacturer instruction shall be followed. Detail
handling & storage instruction sheet / manual need to be
furnished before commencement of supply.
9.0.0 PROGRESS REPORTING
9.1.0 Outline Document To be submitted for purchase approval for

outline of production, inspection, testing,
inspection, packing, dispatch, documentation
programme.
9.2.0 Detailed Progress Report To be submitted to purchaser once a month
containing
a) Progress on material procurement

b) Progress on fabrication (As applicable)
c) Progress on assemble (As applicable)
d) Progress on internal stage inspection
e) Reason for any delay in total
programme
f) Details of test failures if any in
g) Progress on final box up constraints /
forward path
Page 9 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
10.0.0 DEVIATIONS
10.0.0 Deviation from the specification Deviation from the specification shall be
started in writing with the tender by reference
to the specification clause/GTP/Drawing and
a description of the alternative offer. In
absence of such a statement. It will be
assumed by the Buyer that the seller
complies fully with this specification.
Page 10 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
Annexure – A Scope of supply

1.1 Design, manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturer’s works before dispatch,
packing, delivery and submission of all documentation of outdoor current transformer.
1.2 Terminal connector.
1.3 Supervision of testing & commissioning of current transformer at site
1.4 BOQ as following –
Sr no. Purchaser Equipment Location Unit Quantity

Equipment Tag Description Substation
No / SAP code name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Submission of drawing, calculations, manual , catalogues, test report shall be as

follows

contract
Drawing 3 copies (Typical 4 copies 6 copies + 1 See clause 5.0
drgs) soft copy in CD for various
drawing required
Calculations 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 See clause 5.0
soft copy in CD
transformer
Test Report 2 copy 6 copies + 1 Type test and
test reports

3.1 Delivery period start date - from date of purchase order
3.3 Material dispatch clearance - after inspection by purchaser and written
dispatch clearances for purchaser
Page 11 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
Annexure – B SERVICE CONDITIONS

a) Average grade atmosphere Heavy polluted , dry
b) Maximum altitude above see 1000 M
level
d) Maximum ambient air 0 deg C
temperature
f) Thermal Resistivity of Soil 150 deg. C cm/W
g) Seismic Zone 4
Page 12 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
Annexure – C1: Guaranteed Technical Particulars (33KV , 800-400/1/1/1/1A)
Description Data By Purchaser Data By Supplier

1 Name of Manufacturer
2 Address and contact details
3 Type
4 Rated Nominal Voltage 33 kV
5 Highest System Voltage 36 kV
6 Rated Frequency 50 Hz
7 Rated Primary Current 800 - 400 A
8 Rated Secondary current 1A
9 Number of cores
Core- Core- Core-
10.0 Core-1
2 3 4
10.1 Secondary Current 1A 1A 1A 1A
(O/C & E/F)

Protection
Protection
Protection
(Bus Bar)
Metering
(Spare)
10.2 Purpose /Application
Rated output (project

10.3 30 VA 30 VA
specific)
10.4 Class of accuracy 0.2s 5P PS PS
10.5 Instrument security factor ≤5

10.6 Accuracy limit factor 20
40 (RCT+8)
40 (RCT+8)
Knee point voltage &

≥
10.7 corresponding exciting

≥
current (project specific)
Magnetizing current at Vk/2 ≤30 ≤30

10.8
(project specific) mA mA
Resistance of the secondary
10.9
winding at 75 deg C
10.10 Secondary limiting voltage
Short time thermal rating of
11
primary
11.1 One Seconds
11.2 Three seconds 26.3 kA
Rated dynamic current of
12
primary
Rated continuous thermal
13
current
Temp rise at an ambient of
14
50 deg C
14.1 Winding
14.2 Oil at the top
Exposed current carrying
14.3
parts
One minute power frequency
15 dry withstand voltage (KV 70 kV rms
rms)
Page 13 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1

16 wet withstand voltage (KV 70 kV rms
rms)
1.2/50 microsecond impulse
17 withstand test voltage KV 170 kVp
peak
Minimum creepage distance
18 31 mm/kV
in mm
Protective creepage distance
19
in mm
Magnetization curve of CT
20
core
Variations in ratio and phase
21
angle error due to variation in
21.1 Voltage by 1 Volt
21.2 Frequency by 1Hz
Current density in primary
22
winding
23 Weight of oil
24 Total weight
25 Mounting details
26 Overall dimensions
27 Terminal Connector
Page 14 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
Annexure – C2: Guaranteed Technical Particulars (33KV, 2000-1000/1/1/1/1A)

3 Type
4 Rated Nominal Voltage 33kV
5 Highest System Voltage 36 kV
7 Rated Primary Current 2000-1000 A
9 Number of cores
Core- Core Core-
10.0 Core-1
2 -3 4
(O/C & E/F)
Protection
Protection
Protection
(Bus Bar)
Metering
(Spare)

10.3 30 VA 30 VA
specific)

(RCT+8)
(RCT+8)

≥ 40
≥ 40


10.8
10.9
winding at 75 deg C
11
primary
11.1 One Seconds
11.2 Three seconds 26.3kA
12
primary
13
current
14
50 deg C
14.1 Winding
14.2 Oil at the top
14.3
parts
rms)
Page 15 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1

rms)
peak
18 31 mm/kV
in mm
19
in mm
20
core
21
22
winding
23 Weight of oil
24 Total weight
25 Mounting details
Page 16 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
Annexure – D1 : Guaranteed Technical Particulars (66KV , 400-200/1/1/1/1A)

3 Type
5 Highest System Voltage 72.5 kV
9 Number of cores
Core- Core Core-
10.0 Core-1
2 -3 4
(O/C & E/F)

Protection
Protection
Protection
(Bus Bar)
Metering
(Spare)

10.3 30 VA 30 VA
specific)

(RCT+8)
(RCT+8)

≥ 40
≥ 40


10.8
10.9
winding at 75 deg C
11
primary
11.1 One Seconds
12
primary
13
current
14
50 deg C
14.1 Winding
14.2 Oil at the top
14.3
parts
rms)
Page 17 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1

rms)
peak
18 31 mm/kV
in mm
19
in mm
20
core
21
22
winding
23 Weight of oil
24 Total weight
25 Mounting details
Page 18 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
Annexure – D2: Guaranteed Technical Particulars (66KV, 800-400/1/1/1/1A)

3 Type
9 Number of cores
Core- Core Core-
10.0 Core-1
2 -3 4
(O/C & E/F)

Protection
Protection
Protection
(Bus Bar)
Metering
(Spare)

10.3 30 VA 30 VA
specific)

(RCT+8)
(RCT+8)

≥ 40
≥ 40


10.8
10.9
winding at 75 deg C
11
primary
11.1 One Seconds
12
primary
13
current
14
50 deg C
14.1 Winding
14.2 Oil at the top
14.3
parts
rms)
Page 19 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1

rms)
peak
18 31 mm/kV
in mm
19
in mm
20
core
21
22
winding
23 Weight of oil
24 Total weight
25 Mounting details
Page 20 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
Annexure – D3: Guaranteed Technical Particulars (66KV, 1600-800/1/1/1/1A)

Address and contact
2
details
3 Type
4 Rated Nominal Voltage 66 kV
9 Number of cores
Core- Core Core-
10.0 Core-1
2 -3 4
(O/C & E/F)
Protection
Protection
Protection
(Bus Bar)
Metering
(Spare)

10.3 30 VA 30 VA
specific)

(RCT+8)
(RCT+8)

≥ 40
≥ 40

Magnetizing current at ≤30 ≤30

10.8
Vk/2 (project specific) mA mA
Resistance of the
10.9 secondary winding at 75
deg C
Secondary limiting
10.10
voltage
Short time thermal rating
11
of primary
11.1 One Seconds
11.2 Three seconds 31.5 kA
12
primary
Rated continuous
13
thermal current
Temp rise at an ambient
14
of 50 deg C
14.1 Winding
14.2 Oil at the top
14.3
parts
Page 21 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
One minute power

15 frequency dry withstand 140 kV rms
voltage (KV rms)
One minute power
16 frequency wet withstand 140 kV rms
voltage (KV rms)
1.2/50 microsecond
17 impulse withstand test 325 kVp
voltage KV peak
Minimum creepage
18 31 mm/kV
distance in mm
Protective creepage
19
distance in mm
Magnetization curve of
20
CT core
Variations in ratio and
21 phase angle error due to
variation in
Current density in
22
primary winding
23 Weight of oil
24 Total weight
25 Mounting details
Page 22 of 23
SP-CTLU-01-R1
Annexure –D Recommended spares (Data by Supplier)
Sr. No. Description of spare part Unit Quality

1
2
3
4
5
6
Page 23 of 23
SP-ISLU-01-R0
Index
1.0 General Specification…………………………………………………………………. 03-11
2.0 Annexure – A : Scope & Documentation………………………………………… 12-13
3.0 Annexure – B : Ambient Conditions……………………………………………..... 14-14
4.0 Annexure – C1 : Guaranteed Tech. Particulars for 66KV Disconnecting Switch... 15-17
5.0 Annexure – C2 : Guaranteed Tech. Particulars for 33KV Disconnecting Switch… 18-20
6.0 Annexure – D : Recommended spares (Data by supplier)…………………….. 21-21
Page 2 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0
Materials, equipment and methods used in the manufacture of outdoor disconnecting

switch shall conform to the latest edition of following –
National Standards

CBIP manual
IS : 9921 - Part I to V Specification for Alternating Current Disconnectors (Isolators) and
Earthing Switches
IS : 0996 -1979 Single phase small AC and Universal Electric Motors.
IS : 7572 -1974 Guide for testing single phase AC and Universal motors.
IS : 4237 -1967 General Requirement for switchgear for voltage not exceeding 1.1
kV.
IS : 2147 -1962 Degree of protection provided by enclosure for low-voltage
switchgear control gear
IS : 2544 Porcelain Post Insulator
IS : 2629 -1985 Recommended Practice for Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Iron and Steel
IS : 6639 - 1972 Specification for Hexagon Bolts for Steel Structures
Important Note :
In the event of direct conflict between various order documents, the precedence of authority of
documents shall be as follows –
i. Specification including applicable codes, standards

ii. Guaranteed Technical Particulars (GTP)
iii. Approved Vendor Drawings
Page 3 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0

No.
2.0.0 Design Features Common for both 66KV and 33 KV equipment
2.1.0 Disconnect Switch Motor operated, central rotating double break with turn and twist
Type & Mechanism mechanism, triple pole, outdoor type for installation and operation
in horizontal plane for 66KV & in vertical plane for 33 kv with or
without earth switches, as required complete in all respects.
i) Motor assembly Suitable for 3 phase 415V, 50 Hz. Provided with a quick
electro-mechanical brake on high speed shaft for rapid braking.
2.2.0 Earth Switch Manually operated
Mechanism
2.3.0 Disconnector
Switch Controls
i) Remote electrical Required
control
ii) Local Manual Required
control
iii) Local electrical Required from integral Local Control Cabinet
control
2.4.0 Interlock with circuit Electrical interlock suitable for 220 V / 50 V DC
breakers
2.5.0 Interlock with Earth Mechanical & Electrical interlock
Switch
2.6.0 Padlock for Earth Padlock & keys for both positions i.e. when earth switch is
Switch grounded and when earth switch is un-grounded
2.7.0 Fixed Contacts

i) Type of contacts Spring loaded with smooth surface, silver plated
ii) Current carrying Non corrodible, non ferrous material
castings
iii) Current carrying Made of non aging, non magnetic stainless steel with life long
Springs spring action strength
2.8.0 Insulators
i) Construction Comprising of cylindrical solid core post insulators. The
porcelain used in the insulators shall be homogeneous, free
from laminations, cavities or any other defect which may affect
its mechanical and dielectric qualities and shall be thoroughly
vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture. The glazing of the
porcelain shall be of uniform brown colour, free from blisters,
burrs and other defects.
ii) Fasteners All metal caps, jointing flanges, bolts and nuts shall be made of
high grade cast iron or malleable steel casting, machine faced
and hot-dip galvanised.
Page 4 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0

No.
2.9.0 Moving Contacts

i) Type of contacts High pressure relieving copper contacts, silver plated
ii) Wiping Action Required during opening & closing. Shall be adequate to
remove any oxide film formed without causing scouring or
abrasion on the contact surfaces.
2.10.0 Current carrying Made of non aging, non magnetic stainless steel with life long
Springs spring action strength
2.11.0 Fault Current rating Earth switch shall be able to carry same Fault Current as
assigned to the disconnecting switch.
2.12.0 Disconnecting 90 deg from full open to full close in order to ensure a distinct
Switch contacts break ands clear visibility.
movement
2.13.0 Corona Effect Shall be free from visible corona discharge in both open &
close positions at visible discharge test voltages.
2.14.0 Control cabinet
i) Enclosure Weather-proof, water-shedding, corrosion-proof IP-55 steel
cabinet
ii) Cabinet Door Gasketed, hinged access door shall have a mechanical
indicator fitted to clearly indicate fully opened and fully closed
positions of the disconnection switch.
iii) Wiring Control wiring shall be done using 1.1KV grade 2.5 sq.mm
stranded copper conductor, PVC insulated, cables laid in GI
conduits.
iv) Locking Padlocking arrangement to be provided.
arrangement
v) Incomer A local TPN MCB to be provided in cabinet at power supply
incoming point.
vi) Outgoing Control All outgoing control wiring shall terminate on terminal blocks,
Wiring inside the cabinet so as to have maximum access to all
conductor terminals.
vii) Aux. Contacts All auxiliary contacts of the disconnection switch and earthing
switches shall be supplied duly wired up to the terminal blocks.
viii) Terminals Stud type terminals with at least twenty (20) percent spare
terminals shall be provided over and above the number actually
required.
ix) Paint Shade Polyurethane Paint Shade no. 692 of IS-5.

x) Local Controls A local/ remote changeover switch shall be fitted inside the
cabinet together with open/ close push buttons for local control.
Page 5 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0

No.
xi) Cabinet Cabinet illumination incandescent lamp with ON/OFF switch,
accessories 5/15A single phase 3 pin socket with switch & fuse, 240V AC
space heater with switch & thermostat etc.
2.15.0 Manual Operation Manual operation of disconnection switch by means of crank

handle disconnecting power supply to the 3-pole operating
mechanism on insertion into its socket. The height of socket
shall be about 1.2 metre above the finished ground level of the
substation.
2.16.0 Disconnection Switch shall have three (3) grounding blades forming integral
switches with Earth part of the isolator. These blades shall be capable of being
switch fitted on either side of the brakes. Flexible heavily tinned
copper braids of adequate cross-sectional area with connector
suitable for the specified short circuit current shall be provided
on the hinged end of the grounding blade for connection to the
station grounding grid.
2.17.0 Grounding Blades Manually operated and interlocked with disconnection switch
Operation so that the grounding blades can be closed only when the
disconnection switch is open.
2.18.0 Pivot bearings Shall be maintenance-free and corrosion resistant. Double

tapered-roller bearings located 150 mm apart suitable for
ensuring smooth and dependable operation of the
disconnection switch shall be located at the base of the
supporting insulators. The earthing switch shaft shall also be
provided with necessary bearings. The bearings shall be
suitable for effective operation of disconnection switch and
earthing switches even after long periods of their remaining in
closed/ open position.
2.19.0 Disconnection Each pole of the disconnection switch shall be provided with a
Switch Poles & complete galvanized steel base designed for mounting on a
base supporting structure/ gantry.
The base shall be rigid and self-supporting and shall require no

guying or cross bracing between phases. The group operated
isolators shall have a common supporting structure for all the
three (3) poles.
2.20.0 Grounding Pads Each pole of disconnection switch shall be provided with two
(2) grounding pads of non-corrodible material brazed to the
channel base at opposite ends. Flexible tinned copper (15-25
microns) connectors shall be provided for a) Connection of
earthing pad of each pole, b) Operating handle, c) Earthing
switches.
Page 6 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0

No.
2.21.0 Counter-Balancing Springs/ weights of non-rusting alloy composition shall be
Springs/ Weights provided for counter-balancing the earthing switch blades to
prevent impact at the end of travel both on opening and closing
of the earthing switch.
2.22.0 Name Plates Corrosion-proof nameplates giving all the relevant mandatory
as well as optional information as stipulated in IS shall be
provided on disconnection switches, earthing switches and
operating devices as per the Purchaser's/ Consulting
Engineer's approval.
3.0.0 Approved Make of Common for both 66KV and 33 KV outdoor disconnecting
Components switch
3.1.0 Motors ABB / Siemens / Crompton
3.2.0 Insulators JSI / WSI / Modern / Saravana / BHEL
3.3.0 Switch Kaycee / L&T (Salzer)
3.4.0 HRC Fuse Links Alstom / Siemens / L&T
3.5.0 AC Contactors & L&T / Siemens / Schneider
O/L Relay
3.6.0 Terminals Connectwell / Elmex
3.7.0 Push buttons / L&T / Teknic / Siemens
Actuator
3.8.0 MCB Merlin Gerin / Siemens / Schneider
Page 7 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0

No.
4.1.0 Internal Test Manufacturer shall carry out comprehensive inspection
and testing during manufacture of the equipment.
4.2.0 Type test The product must be of type tested quality. Type test
reports shall be submitted for the type, size & rating of
equipment offered along with bid. If the manufacturer’s
lab is accredited by govt./ authorised body then it shall
4.3.0 Routine test As per relevant IS / IEC.
4.4.0 Acceptance test As per relevant IS / IEC.
4.5.0 Test Witness

4.5.1 The Buyer reserves the right to witness all tests specified
on completed product.
4.5.2 The Buyer reserves the right to inspect the product at the
Sellers works at any time prior to dispatch, to verify
4.4.3 In-process and final inspection call intimation shall be

given in advance to purchaser.
4.6.0 Tests on fitting and As per Manufacturer’s Standards and relevant IS / IEC.
Accessories
5.0.0 Drawing, Data &

Manuals
5.1.0 To be submitted along The seller has to submit :
with bid
i) Tentative GA / cross sectional drawing of product
showing all the views / sections.
ii) Detailed reference list of customers already using the
offered product during the last 5 years with particular
emphasis on units of similar design and rating.

iv) Deviations from this specification. Only deviations
approved in writing before award of contract shall be
accepted.
v) Details of manufacturer's quality assurance standards

and program and ISO 9000 series or equivalent national
certification.
Page 8 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0

No.
vi) Type test reports shall be submitted for the type, size &
rating of product / equipment offered along with bid. In
case the type test report for identical product is not
available then type test report of nearby size/ rating shall
be submitted for review. They shall be considered valid
for 5 years from date of test performed on product
/equipment.
vii) Complete product catalogue and Manual along with the

bid.
viii) Recommended spare parts and consumable items for five
years of operation with prices and spare parts catalogue
with price list for future requirements.
ix) Bill of material with make, model & quantity of items.
5.2.0 To be submitted after The seller has to submit : for buyer’s Approval (A) /
award of contract Reference (R)
i) Program for production and testing (A)
ii) Guaranteed Technical Particulars (A)
iii) Calculations to substantiate choice of electrical, structural,
mechanical component size / ratings (A)
iv) a) Detailed dimension drawing for all components, genera

b) Drawings of major components (A)
c) Rating and diagram plate (R)
v) Detailed loading drawing to enable the buyer to design
and construct foundations (as applicable) (R)
vi) Transport / Shipping dimensions with weights (R)

vii) Detailed Bill of Materials for all fittings and accessories
with their make, model & tag no. etc. (A)
viii) Detailed installation and commissioning instructions (R)

ix) Quality plan (A)
5.3.0 Submittals required prior The seller has to submit :

to dispatch
i) Inspection and test reports, carried out in manufacturer’s
works (R)
ii) Test certificates of all bought out items
iii) Operation and maintenance Instruction as well as trouble
shooting charts/ manuals
5.4.0 Drawing and document Standard size paper A0, A1, A2, A3, A4
sizes
5.5.0 No of drgs. / Documents As per Annexure- A
required at different
stages
Page 9 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0

No.
6.0.0 Packing
6.1.0 Packing Against corrosion, dampness, heavy rains, breakage and
Protection vibration
6.2.0 Packing for Robust wooden non returnable packing case with all the above
accessories and protection & identification Label
spares
6.3.0 Packing In each packing case, following details are required :
Identification
Label
i) Individual serial number
ii) Purchaser's name
iii) PO number (along with SAP item code, if any) & date
v) Destination
vi) Manufacturer / Supplier's name
vii) Address of Manufacturer / Supplier / it’s agent
viii) Description and Quantity
x) Month & year of Manufacturing
xi) Case measurements
xii) Gross and net weights in kilograms
xiii) All necessary slinging and stacking instructions
7.0.0 Shipping,
Handling &
Storage
7.1.0 Shipping The seller shall give complete shipping information concerning
Information weight, size etc. of each package.
7.2.0 Shipping The seller shall ascertain at an early date before the
Constraints commencement of manufacture, any transport limitations such as
weights, dimensions, road culverts, overhead lines, free access
etc. from the manufacturing plant to the project site. Bidder shall
furnish the confirmation that the proposed packages can be safely
transported, as normal or oversize packages, upto the site. Any
modifications required in the infrastructure and cost thereof in this
connection shall be brought to the notice of the Purchaser.
7.3.0 Transit Damage The seller shall be responsible for any transit damage due to
improper packing.
7.4.0 Handling & Manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed. Detail handling &
Page 10 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0

No.
8.0.0 Quality
Assurance
8.1.0 Vendor quality To be submitted for purchaser approval
plan
8.2.0 Inspection points To be mutually identified & agreed in quality plan
9.0.0 Progress
Reporting
9.1.0 Outline To be submitted for purchaser approval for outline of production,

Document inspection, testing, inspection, packing, dispatch, documentation
program
9.2.0 Detailed To be submitted to Purchaser once a month containing
Progress report
iii) Progress on assembly (As applicable)

v) Reason for any delay in total program
vi) Details of test failures if any in manufacturing stages
vii) Progress on final box up

viii) Constraints / Forward path
10.0.0 Deviations
i) Deviations from this Specification are only acceptable where the
Seller has listed in his quotation the requirements he can’t or
does not wish to comply with and the buyer has accepted in
writing the deviations before the order is placed.
ii) In the absence of a list of deviations, it will be assumed by the

Buyer that the Seller complies fully with this specification.
Page 11 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0
Annexure – A
1.0 Scope

No.
1.0.0 Scope
1.1.0 Main Equipment Design, manufacture, assembly & testing at manufacturer’s works
before dispatch, packing & delivery of outdoor disconnecting
switch rated up to 66 kV.
1.2.0 Accessories
i) Clamps & terminal connectors.
ii) Stainless steel hardware like nut bolts/ washers etc. for fixing of
all equipment / accessories in the scope of the bidder with
supporting structure.
iii) Any other item necessary or usual for efficient performance and
satisfactory maintenance under the various operating and
atmospheric conditions
1.3.0 Documentation Submission of all drawings & documents pertaining to the

equipment.
1.4.0 Site Supervision Supervision of testing & commissioning of equipment at site.
1.5.0 Bill of Materials Complete bill of materials shall be submitted in the following
format.
Sr. Purchaser Equipment Location / Unit Quantity

No. Equipment Tag No. Description Substation
/ Sap Code Name
e.g. Nos. e.g. 1
Santacruz
e.g. Nos. e.g. 6
Alaknanda
Page 12 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0
2.0.0 Document Submission
Submission of drawings, calculations, catalogues, manuals, test reports shall be as follows :
Along with For Approval Final after Remarks

offer after award of approval
contract
Drawings 3 copies 4 copies + 1 6 copies + 1 See Clause 5.0.0
(Typical drgs) Soft Copy soft copy in CD for various
drawings required
Calculations 3 copies 4 copies + 1 6 copies + 1 See Clause 5.0.0
(Typical) Soft Copy soft copy in CD for details

soft copy in CD

manual soft copy in CD

soft copy in CD routine test reports
3.0.0 Delivery Schedule

No.
i) Delivery period From date of purchase order
start date
ii) Delivery period As agreed with supplier
end date
iii) Material dispatch After inspection by purchaser
clearance
Page 13 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0
Annexure – B
Ambient Conditions :
A) Mumbai
a) Average grade Heavily polluted , salt Laden, dusty, humid with possibility
atmosphere of condensation
b) Maximum altitude above 1000 M
sea level
temperature
f) Thermal Resistivity of Soil 150 Deg. C cm/W
g) Seismic Zone 3
B) Delhi
a) Average grade Heavily polluted, dry

atmosphere
b) Maximum altitude above 1000 M
sea level
temperature
f) Thermal Resistivity of Soil 150 Deg. C cm/W
g) Seismic Zone 4
Page 14 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0
Annexure – C1
Guaranteed Tech. Particulars for 66KV Outdoor Disconnecting Switch

No.
2 Type Motor operated,
central rotating double
break with turn & twist
mechanism.
3 Model
4 No. of units.
5 Installation Outdoor horizontal
i) Highest System Voltage 72.5 kV
ii) Rated frequency 50 Hz ± 5%
iii) System Neutral Solidly Earthed
7 Rated Insulation Data
7.1 1.2/50 µs lighting impulse withstand
voltage (Positive and negative
polarity)
i) To earth 325 kV
ii) Across the isolating distance 375 kV
7.2 Rated One minute power frequency
withstand voltage
i) To earth 140 kV
8 Main Switch Current Capacity
i) Rated normal current 800 A / 1250 A
ii) Rated Short time withstand Current 31.5 kA for 3 Sec.
iii) Rated peak withstand current 2.5 times of short time
withstand current
iv) Maximum magnetizing current 6 - 8 Amps.
(Make/ break capacity)
9 Earthing switch current capacity
i) Rated Short time withstand Current 31.5 kA for 3 Sec.
ii) Rated peak withstand current 2.5 times of short time
withstand current
iii) Making capacity for discharging line
charge
10 Minimum clearances
i) In air between live parts and earth 630 mm
ii) In air between Phase to phase 630 mm
iii) Minimum ground clearance 4000 mm
Page 15 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0

No.
11 Phase spacing 2000 mm (Project
Specific)
12 No. of breaks per circuit pole Two for double break
13 Nos. of insulators pedestal Three stacks per

phase of heavy duty
post type insulators
14 Main Switch Contacts
i) Type of Contact High pressure
relieving copper
contacts (rotating
blade features of twist
mechanism). The
moving arm enters the
fixed female contact
assembly developing
high pressure.
ii) Material for rotating blade Electrolytic tinned

copper
iii) Material of contact Silver plated
electrolytic copper.
15 Earth Switch Contacts
i) Type of Contact of Earth switch High pressure
banging type
ii) Material for earth switch blade Electrolytic tinned
copper
iii) Material of earth switch contact Silver plated
16 Thickness of Silver Coating 15 - 25 microns.
17 Maximum current density 1.5 A /sq mm
18 Type of bearing for rotating insulator
stocks
19 Number of auxiliary contacts
i) Isolator operating mechanism 10 NO + 10 NC
ii) Earthing Device 4 No + 4 NC
20 Temperature rise As per IS 9921
21 Control supply voltage 220 V / 110 V / 50 V
DC
22 AC Aux. Supply (4 wire) 415 V ± 10%
23 Inter Locking arrangement Electrical and
mechanical
Page 16 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0

No.
24 Terminal connectors Suitable for twin
ACSR Zebra
conductor
25 Minimum creepage distance of
insulator
26 Type of control for
i) Disconnection switch Motorised with
Manual Facility
ii) Earthing switch Manual
27 Locking arrangement
28 Rated mechanical terminal loads in
addition to wind load acting on the
equipment and short-circuit forces
29 Total operating time of disconnection
switch including that of its operating
mechanism
30 Weight of Isolators
31 Post insulators
i) Make & type
ii) Height
iii) Voltage level
iv) Cantilever Strength
v) Torsinal Strength
vi) Creepage Distance Min 31mm/KV
vii) Basic insulation level (1 min. power
frequency flashover voltage)
a) Dry 140 KV rms
b) Wet 140 KV rms
viii) Visible corona discharge voltage
ix) 1.2/50 micro second impulse 325 KVp
flashover voltage
x) Insulation class A
32 Drive Motor
i) Make
ii) KW Rating / rpm
iii) Rated current
iv) Frame size
v) Rated Voltage 415 V AC
vi) Degree of Protection IP-55
vii) Insulation Class B/F
viii) Duty
Page 17 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0
Annexure – C2
Guaranteed Tech. Particulars for 33KV Outdoor Disconnecting Switch

No.
2 Type Motor operated,
central rotating double
break with turn & twist
mechanism.
3 Model
4 No. of units.
5 Installation Outdoor Vertical
i) Highest System Voltage 36 kV
ii) Rated frequency 50 Hz ± 5%
iii) System Neutral Solidly Earthed
7 Rated Insulation Data
7.1 1.2/50 µs lighting impulse withstand
voltage (Positive and negative
polarity)
i) To earth 145 kV
7.2 Rated One minute power frequency
withstand voltage
i) To earth 70 kV
8 Main Switch Current Capacity
i) Rated normal current 1250 A
ii) Rated Short time withstand Current 26.3 kA for 3 Sec.
iii) Rated peak withstand current 2.5 times of short time
withstand current
iv) Maximum magnetizing current 6 - 8 Amps.
(Make/ break capacity)
9 Earthing switch current capacity
i) Rated Short time withstand Current 26.3 kA for 3 Sec.
ii) Rated peak withstand current 2.5 times of short time
withstand current
iii) Making capacity for discharging line
charge
10 Minimum clearance
i) In air between live part and earth 320 mm
ii) In air between Phase to phase 320 mm
iii) Minimum ground clearance 3700 mm
Page 18 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0

No.
11 Phase spacing 1500 mm (Project
Specific)
12 No. of breaks per circuit pole Two for double break
13 Nos. of insulators pedestal Three stacks / phase
of heavy duty post
type insulators
14 Main Switch Contacts
i) Type of Contact High pressure
relieving copper
contacts (rotating
blade features of twist
mechanism). The
moving arm enters the
fixed female contact
assembly developing
high pressure.
ii) Material for rotating blade Electrolytic tinned

copper
iii) Material of contact Silver plated
15 Earth Switch Contacts
i) Type of Contact of Earth switch High pressure
banging type
ii) Material for earth switch blade Electrolytic tinned
copper
iii) Material of earth switch contact Silver plated
16 Thickness of Silver Coating 15 - 25 microns.
17 Maximum current density 1.5 A /sq mm
18 Type of bearing for rotating insulator
stocks
19 Number of auxiliary contacts
i) Isolator operating mechanism 10 NO + 10 NC
ii) Earthing Device 4 No + 4 NC
20 Temperature rise As per IS 9921
21 Control supply voltage 220 V / 110 V / 50 V
DC
22 AC Aux. Supply (4 wire) 415 V ± 10%
23 Inter Locking arrangement Electrical and
mechanical
Page 19 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0

No.
24 Terminal connectors Suitable for twin
ACSR Zebra
conductor
25 Minimum creepage distance of
insulator
26 Type of control for
i) Disconnection switch Motorised with
Manual Facility
ii) Earthing switch Manual
27 Locking arrangement
28 Rated mechanical terminal loads in
addition to wind load acting on the
equipment and short-circuit forces
29 Total operating time of disconnection
switch including that of its operating
mechanism
30 Weight of Isolators
31 Post insulators
i) Make & type
ii) Height
iii) Voltage level
iv) Cantilever Strength
v) Torsinal Strength
vi) Creepage Distance Min 31mm/KV
vii) Basic insulation level (1 min. power
frequency flashover voltage)
a) Dry 70 KV rms
b) Wet 70 KV rms
viii) Visible corona discharge voltage
ix) 1.2/50 micro second impulse 145 KVp
flashover voltage
x) Insulation class A
32 Drive Motor
i) Make
ii) KW Rating / rpm
iii) Rated current
iv) Frame size
v) Rated Voltage 415 V AC
vi) Degree of Protection IP-55
vii) Insulation Class B/F
viii) Duty
Page 20 of 21
SP-ISLU-01-R0
Annexure – D
Recommended spares (Data by supplier)
List of recommended spares shall be submitted as follows –
Sr. Description of spare part Unit Quantity

No.
1 Nos.
2 Nos.
3
4
5
6
Page 21 of 21
I I
I
!
I
f
I
!
, '
Specification for I
I
!
OUTDOO)~ !
POTENTIAL TRANSFO){MEI{
(33 & 66KV)
Specification no. SP-PTLU-01-R1
- - . - --_._- -<
Prepared by' Checked by , Approved by Rev DatE

-__0____ --1
Name Sign Name S' n ~ V'Name Sign
tg .. / - - - -j
OS
•
HPB ;,,'W DG 00 29 -"I, jI' \l:
l
Tanu ~~t Meenakshl\ ~7 K.K.Alla
..\1 • I
01 16-Ju1Y 14 I
j
I-
\
Page 1 or 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1
Record of Revision
Sl. Revision Clause Nature of change Approved by

no. no. No.
1. R1 2.3.2 Material of tank construction shall be MDB/KKA
hot dip galvanized with minimum
thickness of 610gm/sq mm
2. R1 3.0.0 ABIL & IEC included in approved MDB/KKA
makes of insulators
3. R1 6.1.1 Type Test to be conducted from MDB/KKA
CPRI/ERDA
4. R1 Annexure Accuracy class of metering core shall MDB/KKA
C, 10.4 be 0.2
Page 2 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1
Index
General Specification...................................................................................................3
1.0.0 Codes & Standards...........................................................................................3
2.0.0 Major Design Criteria & Parameters of the PT..................................................3

.
3.0.0 Fittings and Accessories on Potential Transformer .......................................5
4.0.0 Approved make of components .......................................................................5
5.0.0 Quality assurance ..............................................................................................5
6.0.0 Progress Reporting ...........................................................................................6
7.0.0 Drawing, Data & manuals..................................................................................6
8.0.0 Inspection & testing ..........................................................................................8
9.0.0 Packing, Shipping, Handling and Storage .....................................................10
10.0.0 Deviations........................................................................................................11
Annexure - A Scope of supply ................................................................................12
Annexure – B Service Conditions ...........................................................................14
Annexure – C1 Guaranteed Technical particulars for 66KV PT............................15
Annexure – C2 Guaranteed Technical particulars for 33KV PT............................18
Annexure - D Recommended spares (Data by supplier)........................................21
Page 3 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1

Materials, equipment and methods used in the manufacture of Potential Transformer shall
conform to the latest edition of following –
National Standard
IS-3156
Specification for Voltage transformer.
(Part I to IV)
IS-4146 Application guide for voltage transformer.
IS-335 New insulating oil for transformer and switchgear.
IS-9676 Reference ambient temperature of electrical equipment
IS-5561 Specification of electric power connectors
IS-5621 Hollow insulator for use in electrical equipments
IS-3156 (Part I to IV) Specification for Voltage transformer.
IS-4146 Application guide for voltage transformer.
CBIP manual
2.0 MAJOR DESIGN CRITERIA & PARAMETERS OF THE PT

2.1.0 System 66KV 33KV
2.1.1 Voltage 66KV ± 10% 33KV ± 10%
2.1.2 Frequency 50HZ ± 5% 50HZ ± 5%
2.1.3 Fault level 31.5KA for 3secs. 26.3KA for 3secs.
2.1.4 Earthing Solidly grounded
Single phase, outdoor, dead tank type, oil
2.2.1 Type
immersed, self cooled type.
Oil immersed PT shall be hermetically sealed
2.2.2 Construction feature to eliminate breathing and to prevent ingress
of air and moisture.
2.3.0 Major Parts
2.3.1 Tank
Tank shall be of MS with Hot Dip Galvanized
2.3.2 Material of Construction Steel.
Galvanizing thickness shall be 610gm/sqmm.
2.3.3 Tank Feature The tank shall be provided with oil draining
Page 4 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1
plug, Oil level gauge glass.

Stainless steel bellow or diaphragm shall be
2.3.4 Oil Expansion
provided to take care of oil expansion
High grade, non ageing, low loss, high
2.3.5 Core permeability, cold rolled grain oriented silicon
steel lamination.
2.4.0 Winding
2.4.1 Material Electrolytic Copper
Class A, non catalytic, inert to transformer oil,
2.4.2 Winding Insulating material free from compounds liable to ooze out, shrink
or collapse.
2.4.3 Winding Insulation Uniform
Winding shall be capable of desired output as
2.4.4 Design features per specified limits without exceeding
permissible temperature rise.
2.5.0 Insulating oil
Class 1 new mineral insulating oil as per IS
335, shall be certified not to contain PCBs.
2.5.1 Type
Anti oxidant inhibitor if recommended shall be
subject to Purchaser’s approval.
2.6.0 Bushings and Terminations
2.6.1 Type Porcelain bushing
The HV Terminal shall be of copper.
Termination shall be by bimetallic of
2.6.2 Termination on HV side bushing
Aluminum alloy grade A6 suitable for Twin
Zebra ACSR conductor..
The secondary terminals shall be provided in
IP55 Box with Brass/copper stud type
terminals accessible from front with
removable cover. Box shall be of adequate
2.6.3 Termination of LV side
size with proper clearance between the
terminals for ease of working and
maintenance.
Gasket for Box shall be Neoprene.
The earth terminal of HV winding shall be
bought out in secondary Terminal box by
Termination of Earth terminal of HV
2.6.4 bushing. This shall be connected with body
winding
earth terminal with flexible copper lead
through a link.
2.6.5 Terminal marking Terminals shall be marked as per IS 3156
Minimum creepage distance of
2.7.1 31 mm/KV
bushing
2.8.1 Protected creepage distance At least 50 % of total creepage distance
1.2 times for continuous rating and 1.5 times
2.9.1 Over Voltage factor
for 30 seconds.
Atmospheric protection for clamp
2.10.1 Hot dip galvanizing as per IS 2633
and fitting of iron and steel
Min. 3 mm thick detachable with three
2.10.2 Gland Plate
knockout holes of 3/4 inch.
2.10.3 Cable entry Bottom for all cables
The PT assembly comprising of the chasis,
2.11.1 Earthing
frame work and fixed parts of metal casing
Page 5 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1
shall be provided with two separate body

earthing terminals.
3.0 FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES ON POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
3.1.0 Rating and Diagram Plate Required

3.1.1 Material Anodized Aluminum 16SWG
3.1.2 Background SATIN SILVER
3.1.3 Letters, diagram & border Black
3.1.4 Process Etching
3.2.5 Name plate details Required
3.3.6 Terminal marking of Primary and Required
secondary terminals.
3.4.0 Drain Plug on tank Base Required
4.0 APPROVED MAKE OF COMPONENTS
4.1.0 Insulator JSI/WSI/Modern/Saravana/BHEL/ABIL
5.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE
5.1 Vendor quality plan To be submitted for purchaser approval.

5.2 Inspection point To be mutually identified and agreed in
quality plan.
6.0 PROGRESS REPORTING
6.1 Out Line Document To be submitted for purchase approval for

outline of production, inspection, testing,
inspection, packing, dispatch, documentation
programme.
6.2 Detailed Progress Report To be submitted to purchaser once a month
containing

iii) Progress on assemble (As applicable)
v) Reason for any delay in total
programme
vi) Details of test failures if any in
vii) Progress on final box up constraints /
Page 6 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1
Forward path
7.0 DRAWING, DATA & MANUALS
7.1.0 To be submitted along with bid Seller has to be submitted :

i) Tentative GA /cross sectional
drawing of product showing all the
views / sections
ii) Detailed reference list of customers
already using the offered product
during the last 5 years with particular
emphasis on units of similar design
and rating
iv) Deviations from this specification.
Only deviations approved in writing
before award of contract shall be
accepted.
v) Details of manufacturer’s quality
assurance standards and
programme and ISO 9000 series or
equivalent national certification
vi) Type test report shall be submitted
for the type , size & rating of product
/ equipment offered along with bid in
case the type test report for identical
product is not available then type
report of higher size / rating shall be
submitted for review. They shall be
considered valid 5 years from date of
test.
vii) Complete product catalogue and
manual along with the bid.
viii) Recommended spare parts and
consumables items for 5 years of
operation with prices and spare parts
catalogue with list for future
requirements.
7.2.0 After award of contract, seller has i) Programme for production and
to submit mentioned drawings for testing (A)
buyer’s Approval (A ) / Reference ii) Guaranteed Techinal Particulars (A)
(R) iii) Calculations to substantiate choice of
electrical , structural , mechanical
Page 7 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1
component size / ratings (A)

iv) Detailed dimensional drawing for all
components, general arrangement
drawing showing detailed component
layout and the detailed schematic
and wiring drawings for all
components (like marshalling box)
v) Terminal arrangement & cable box
details etc. (as applicable) (A)
vi) Drawing for major components (A)
vii) Rating & Diagram plate (A)
viii) Detailed loading drawing to enable
the buyer to design and construct
foundations (as applicable ) (R)
ix) Transport / Shipping dimensions with
weights, wheel base details,
untanking height etc. (As applicable )
(R)
x) List of makes of all fittings and
accessories (A)
xi) Detailed installation and
commissioning instructions ( R)
xii) Quality plan
7.3.0 Submittals required prior to i) Inspection and test reports, carried
dispatch out in manufacturer’s work (R )
ii) Test certificates of all bought out
items
iii) Operation and maintenance
instruction as well as trouble
shooting chart / manuals.
iv)
7.4.0 Drawing and document size Standard size paper A0, A1 , A2, A3, A4
7.5.0 No of drgs./Documents required at As per Annexure A scope of supply
diffderent stages
8.0 INSPECTION & TESTING
8.1.0 Inspection and Testing

during manufacture
i) Checking of dimensions as per approved drawing.
8.2.0 ii) Checking for leakage by pressure testing.
Tank
iii) Thickness of Galvanization shall be 610gm/ sq
mm
i) Check dimension.
8.3.0 Porcelain ii) Check finish of sealing surface.
iii) Check creepage distance.
Page 8 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1
iv) Check for routine electrical test.

v) Check for porosity and temperature cycle test.
i) Sample check for physical properties of materials.
8.4.0 Insulating Materials ii) Check for dielectric strength.
iii) Visual and dimensional checks.
i) Check for dimension.
8.5.0 ii) Check for elongation.
Copper conductor
iii) Check for unidirectional scrap.
iv) Check for heat shock.
i) Check for break down voltage.
ii) Check for density.
iii) Check for flash point.
iv) Check for moisture content.
8.6.0 Oil v) Check for neutralization value.
vi) Check for inter facial tension at 27 Deg c.
vii) Check for sludge content.
viii) Check for specific resistance.
ix) Check for pour point.
8.7.0 Secondary terminals i) Check for one min AC Test
8.8.0 Routine tests Tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS 3156
a) On one PT of each rating and type tested from
8.9.0 Type Tests CPRI/ERDA
b) All the test as per IS 3156
c) In case the product is never type tested earlier,
seller has to conduct the type tests from
CPRI/ERDA test labs on BSES order at their own
cost, before commencement of supply.
To be performed in presence of Purchaser at manufacturer
works:-
i) Physical inspection of dimensions and BOM.
ii) Verification of terminal marking and polarity.
iii) Power frequency dry withstand tests on primary
winding.
8.10.0 Acceptance test iv) Power frequency dry withstand tests on secondary
winding.
v) Partial discharge test ( this shall be only for future
reference)
vi) Determination of ratio and phase angle errors
according to the appropriate designation or
accuracy class.
9.0 PACKING , SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE
9.0.0 Packing
9.1.1 Packing protection Against corrosion , dampness, heavy rains, breakage and
vibration
9.1.2 Packing for accessories Robust wooden non returnable packing case with all the
and spares above protection and identification labels.
9.1.3 Packing identification In each packing case, following details are required :
label i) Individual serial number
Page 9 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1
ii) Purchaser’s name

iii) PO number (along with SAP item code , if any) &
date
v) Destination
vi) Manufacturer / Supplier’s name
vii) Address of manufacturer’s / supplier’s its agent
viii) Description and quantity
x) Month and year of manufacturing
xi) Case measurement
xii) Gross and net weight in kilograms
xiii) All necessary slinging and stacking instructions.
9.1.4 Shipping i) The bidder shall ascertain at an early date and
definitely before the commencement of
manufacture, any transport limitations such as
weights, dimensions, road culverts, overhead
lines, free access etc. from the manufacturing
plant to the project site, and furnish to the
purchaser confirmation that the proposed
packages can be safely transported, as normal
or oversize packages, upto the plant site. Any
modification required in the infrastructure and
cost thereof in this connection shall be brought
to the notice of the Purchaser.
ii) The seller shall be responsible for all transit
9.1.5 Handling and Storage Manufacturer instruction shall be followed. Detail
handling & storage instruction sheet / manual need to be
furnished before commencement of supply.
10.0 DEVIATIONS
Deviation from this specification shall be started in writing with the tender by reference to the
specification clause/ DTP/Drawing and a description of the alternative offer. In absence of such a
statement, it will be assured by the Buyer that the seller complies fully with this specification.
Page 10 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1
Annexure –A Scope of supply
1.1 Design, manufacture, assembly, testing at storages of manufacturing as per C l. 12 of this

specification, final testing at manufacturer works on completely assembled transformer
before dispatch, packing delivery and submission of all documentation for the Power
transformer with all accessories as below
Sr. No. Description Scope of Supply

1.0 Fully assembled PT with all major parts like Tank, YES
bushing, Primary terminal with connector and
secondary terminal box.
1.1 Galvanised steel structure for PT NO
1.2 Fixing Bolts for PT YES
1.3 Routine testing as per this specification YES
1.4 Type testing as per this specification YES
1.5 Submission of Documentation as detailed below YES
1.2 Supervision of testing & commissioning of PT as site
1.3 BOQ as following-
Sr. No. Purchaser Location / Substation Unit Quantity

Equipment Tag No. name
/ SAP code
1 e.g. Santacruz No e.g. 1
2 e.g. Alaknanda No e.g. 1
3
4
5
Submission of drawing, calculations, manual, catalogues, test report shall be as follows

contract
Drawing 3 copies (Typical 4 copies 6 copies + 1 See clause 5.0
drgs) soft copy in CD for various
drawing required
Calculations 3 copies 4 copies 6 copies + 1 See clause 5.0
soft copy in CD
transformer
Test Report 2 copy 6 copies + 1 Type test and
test reports
Page 11 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1
3.0 Delivery Schedule

3.1 Delivery Period start date - from data of purchase order
3.2 Delivery Period end date - as agreed with supplier
3.3 Material dispatch clearance - after inspection by purchaser and written dispatch
clearance for purchaser
Page 12 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1
Annexure – B SERVICE CONDITIONS
1.0.0 Mumbai Atmospheric conditions

a) Average grade atmosphere Heavy polluted , salt Laden, dusty, humid
with possibility of condensation
Maximum altitude above see level 1000 M
Maximum ambient air temperature 20 deg C
d) Thermal Resistivity of Soil 150 deg. C cm/W
e) Seismic Zone 3 as per IS 1893

a) Average grade atmosphere Heavy polluted , dry
Maximum altitude above see level 1000 M
Maximum ambient air temperature 0 deg C
d) Thermal Resistivity of Soil 150 deg. C cm/W
e) Seismic Zone 4 as per IS 1893
g) Wind Pressure 195 Kg/m2 up to 90 M elevation as per IS
875-1975
Page 13 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1
Annexure C1 GURANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 66 KV PT
Sr.
No.
Project specific to be filled
1.0 Location of Equipment
up
2.0 Name of Manufacturer
3.0 Address & Contact details
Single phase, outdoor,
dead tank type, oil
4.0 Type
immersed, self-cooled
hermetically sealed type.
5.0 Manufacturer Model No
Reference design ambient
6.0 50 Deg C
temperature
7.0 Reference Standard IS: 3156 (Part1 to 4)
8.0 Nominal system voltage 66KV
9.0 Highest system voltage 72.5KV
10.0 Basic Insulation level 325KVp
11.0 Power frequency voltage 140KV
12.0 Type of cooling ONAN
13.0 Rated frequency (Hz) 50 Hz
14.0 Insulation Class A
15.0 Rated Primary voltage 66KV / √3
16.0 Rated secondary voltage 110V / √3
17.0 Number of secondary cores Two
18.0 CORE Specifications
18.1 Core - 1
18.2 Purpose Metering
18.3 Rated Output 50 VA
18.4 Class of accuracy 0.2
18.5 Ratio error As per IS
18.6 Phase angle error As per IS
19.0 Core - 2
19.1 Purpose Protection
19.3 Class of accuracy 3P
20.0 Rated over voltage factor
20.1 - Continuous 1.2 times
20.2 - 30 Seconds 1.5 times
Temperature rise above an
ambient of 50Deg C at 1.2
21.0
times voltage factor for 30
seconds rating
21.1 - For Winding 50 Deg C
21.2 - For Oil 40 Deg C
Page 14 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1

22.0
seconds rating
23.0 dry withstand voltage for 66 kV
PT (KV rms)
24.0 wet withstand voltage for 66
kV PT (KV rms)
25.0 withstand test voltage for 66 325 KVp
KV PT (KV rms)
One minute Power frequency
26.0 withstand voltage on 3KV
secondary winding
Minimum creepage distance in
27.0 2250 mm
mm for 66KV PT
28.0 1125 mm
in mm for 66KV PT
Partial discharge test, whether
29.0
will be carried out Yes / No
30.0 Weight of core
31.0 Weight of oil
32.0 Total weight
33.0 Mounting details
34.0 Overall dimensions
Page 15 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1
Annexure C2 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 33 KV PT
Sr.
No.
Project specific to be filled
1.0 Location of Equipment
up
2.0 Name of Manufacturer
3.0 Address & Contact details
Single phase, outdoor,
dead tank type, oil
4.0 Type
immersed, self-cooled
hermetically sealed type.
5.0 Manufacturer Model No
Reference design ambient
6.0 50 Deg C
temperature
7.0 Reference Standard IS: 3156 (Part1 to 4)
8.0 Nominal system voltage 33KV
9.0 Highest system voltage 36KV
10.0 Basic Insulation level 170KVp
11.0 Power frequency voltage 70KV
12.0 Type of cooling ONAN
13.0 Rated frequency (Hz) 50 Hz
14.0 Insulation Class A
15.0 Rated Primary voltage 33KV / √3
16.0 Rated secondary voltage 110V / √3
17.0 Number of secondary cores Two
18.0 CORE Specifications
18.1 Core - 1
18.2 Purpose Metering
18.4 Class of accuracy 0.2
19.0 Core - 2
19.1 Purpose Protection
19.3 Class of accuracy 3P
20.0 Rated over voltage factor
20.1 - Continuous 1.2 times
20.2 - 30 Seconds 1.5 times
21.0
seconds rating
Page 16 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1

22.0
seconds rating
23.0 dry withstand voltage for 66 kV
PT (KV rms)
24.0 wet withstand voltage for 66
kV PT (KV rms)
25.0 withstand test voltage for 66 170 KVp
KV PT (KV rms)
One minute Power frequency
26.0 withstand voltage on 3KV
secondary winding
Minimum creepage distance in
27.0 1116 mm
mm for 33 KV PT
28.0 558 mm
in mm for 33 KV PT
Partial discharge test, whether
29.0
will be carried out Yes / No
30.0 Weight of core
31.0 Weight of oil
32.0 Total weight
33.0 Mounting details
34.0 Overall dimensions
Page 17 of 18
SP-PTLU-01-R1
Annexure –D RECOMMENDED SPARES (DATA BY SUPPLIER)
Sr. No. Description of spare part Unit Quality

1
2
3
4
5
6
Page 18 of 18
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIO
FOR
POLYMERIC INSULATORS
Specification No-SP-PI-Ol, RO
Prepared by Pronab Bairagi Rev: 00
Reviewed by Meenakshi Banerji
Approved by I Kiran Alia
Reaistered Office: BSES Bhavan, Neh

SP-PI-01-R0
Technical Specification for Polymeric Insulator
Index
1.0 Scope
2.0 Code and Standards
3.0 Service Conditions
4.0 Design Feature
5.0 General Requirement
6.0 Quality Assurance
7.0 Testing and Inspection
8.0 Drawings, Data and Manuals
9.0 Shipping, Handling and Site Support
10.0 Progress reporting
11.0 Deviation
12.0 Drawings and Materials Details
13.0 GTP
Annexure-A: Scope of Supply
2
SP-PI-01-R0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3
SP-PI-01-R0
General Specifications
1.0 Scope
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing & supply of Polymeric Insulators.
2.0 Codes and Standards
The Polymeric Insulator shall be designed, manufactured & tested in accordance with the following
National / International Standards (IS/IEC).
Sl
Indian Standard Title International Standard
No
1 IS:209-1992 Specification for zinc BS:3436
2 IS:406-1991 Method of Chemical Analysis of Slab Zinc BS:3436
Porcelain insulators for overhead Power lines with a BS:137- (I&II)
3 IS:731-1991
nominal voltage greater than 1000 V IEC:60383
IS:2071 Part (I) –
1993 (Part(II)-
4 Methods of High Voltage Testing IEC:60060-1
1991, Part(III)-
1991
IS:2486 Specification for Insulator fittings for Overhead Power
BS:3288
Part- I-1993 Lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000V
5 IEC:60120
Part- II-1989 General Requirements and Tests Dimensional
IEC:60372
Part-III-1991 Requirements Locking Devices
Recommended Practice for Hot, Dip Galvanization for
6 IS:2629-1990 ISO-1461 (E)
iron and steel
7 IS:2633-1992 Testing of Uniformity of Coating of zinc coated articles
8 IS:3188-1988 Dimensions for Disc Insulators IEC:60305
Determination of Weight of Zinc Coating on Zinc BS:433-1969
9 IS:6745-1990
coated iron and steel articles ISO:1460-1973
IEC:60437
10 IS:8263-1990 Methods of RI Test of HV insulators NEMA Publication
No.07/ 1964/ CISPR
11 IS:8269-1990 Methods for Switching Impulse test on HV insulators IEC:60506
Thermal Mechanical Performance test and mechanical

12 IEC: 60575
performance test on string insulator units
13 Salt Fog Pollution Voltage Withstand Test IEC:60507
4
SP-PI-01-R0
Composite insulators for A.C. Overhead lines with

14 nominal voltage greater than 1000V – Definitions, test IEC 61109
methods and acceptance criteria
Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of
15 IEC:60815
polluted conditions
Tests on insulators of Ceramic material or glass or glass
16 for overhead lines with a nominal voltage greater than IEC:60383
1000V
Characteristics of string insulator units of the long rod
17 IEC : 60433
type
3.0 Service Conditions:
The Polymeric Insulator to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory continuous operation under the following service conditions:
a) Maximum ambient temperature (Degree C) 50
b) Minimum ambient temperature (Degree C) 0
c) Relative Humidity (%) 100
d) Maximum annual rainfall (mm). 1450
e) Maximum wind pressure (Kg/Sq.m) 150
f) Maximum Altitude above mean sea level (Meters) 1000
g) Seismic level (Horizontal Acceleration) 0.30
h) Climatic Conditions : Moderately Hot and humid tropical climate conductive to rust and fungus
growth
i) Ref Ambient Temperature for Temperature (Degree C) 50
4.0 Design Feature:
4.1 Details of Composite Long Rod Insulators:
• The insulators of the strings shall consist of composite long rod insulators for a three phase, 50
Hz, effectively earthed transmission system application in a very heavy polluted environment.
Couplings shall be ball and socket type.
5
SP-PI-01-R0
• Bidder shall quote such composite insulators which have proven use under foggy/humid
operational conditions in polluted environment combined with smoke and dust particles. The
Bidder shall furnish evidence in the form of certification from the power utilities that the
similar type of product supplied to them had been performing satisfactory. The Bidder shall
also submit certified test report (from CPRI/ERDA) for an accelerated ageing test of 5000
hours such as that described in Appendix-C of IEC-61109.
• Insulators shall have sheds of the “open aerodynamic profile without any under ribs” with good
self-cleaning properties. Insulator shed profile; spacing projection etc. shall be strictly in
accordance with the recommendation of IEC-60815.
• The size of long rod insulator, minimum creepage distance, electromechanical strength and
mechanical strength of insulator string along with hardware fittings up to 66 KV shall be as
follows-
Mechanical strength
Size of Min.
EM strength of of Insulator string
Sl. Composite Creepage
Type of String Insulator Unit along with Hardware
No Insulator Distance
(KN) fittings
(mm) (mm)
(kN)
1 Single Suspension 20X870 2280 90 90
2 Single Tension 20X870 2280 120 120
* Note: The core dia. of composite insulators mentioned at column No.3 is minimum requirement.
The bidder shall offer composite long rod insulators of suitable core dia to meet specified E&M
strength requirements. However, the overall string length shall be within the limits specified in the
drawing
4.2 Pin and Cap:
• Pin and cap shall be designed to transmit the mechanical stress & develop uniform mechanical
strength in the insulator. The cap shall be circular with the inner and outer surfaces concentric
of such design that it will not yield or distort under load conditions
• The design shall be such as to permit easy removal of replacement of either insulator units or
fittings under the live line conditions.
6
SP-PI-01-R0
4.3 Ball and Socket Designation:
The dimensions of the Ball and Socket shall be of 16 mm for 90kN & 120kN Insulators in
accordance with the standard dimensions stated in IEC: 120/ IS: 2486 (Part-II).
4.4 Dimensional Tolerance of Composite Insulator:
The tolerances on all dimensions e.g. diameter, length and creepage distance shall be allowed as
follows:
± (0.04d+1.5) mm when d≤300 mm.
± (0.025d+6) mm when d>300 mm
Where ‘d’ is in mm being the diameter, length or creepage distance.
* Note-no negative tolerance shall be applicable to creepage distance.
4.5 Materials:
• Core- It shall be a glass-fiber reinforced (FRP rod) epoxy resin rod of high strength. Glass
fibers and resin shall be optimized. The rod shall be electrical grade corrosion resistant (ECR),
boron free glass and shall exhibit both high electrical integrity and high resistance to acid
corrosion.
• Housing and Weather sheds- The FRP rod shall be covered by a seamless sheath of a silicone
rubber compound of a thickness of minimum 3mm. The housing & weather sheds should have
silicon content of minimum 30% by weight. It should protect the FRP rod against
environmental influences, external pollution and humidity. It shall be extruded or directly
molded on the core. The interface between the housing and the core must be uniform and
without voids. The strength of the bond shall be greater than the tearing strength of the
polymer. The manufacturer shall follow non-destructive technique (N.D.T.) to check the quality
of jointing of the housing interface with the core. The technique being followed with detailed
procedure and sampling shall be furnished along with the bid. The details for this shall be
finalized during detailed engineering and finalization of MQP.
• End Fittings- End fittings transmit the mechanical load to the core. They shall be made of
malleable cast iron spheroidal graphite or forged steel. They shall be connected to the rod by
means of a controlled compression technique. The manufacturer shall have in-process Acoustic
emission arrangement or some other arrangement to ensure that there is no damage to the core
during crimping. This verification shall be in-process and done on each insulator. The gap
between fitting and sheath shall be sealed by a flexible silicone rubber compound. The system
of attachment of end fitting to the rod shall provide superior sealing performance between
housing and metal connection. The sealing must be humidity proof and durable with time
7
SP-PI-01-R0
• Corona Ring/Grading Ring- Grading rings shall be used at both ends of each composite
insulator unit for reducing the voltage gradient on and within the insulator and to reduce radio
and TV noise to acceptable levels. The size and placement of the metallic grading rings shall be
designed to eliminate dry band arcing/corona cutting/ exceeding of permissible electrical stress
of material. The bidder shall furnish calculations along with the proposed placement and design
of corona ring in support of the above. Grading rings shall be capable of installation and
removal with hot line tools without disassembling any other part of the insulator assembly.
* Note:-The supply of grading rings shall be in the scope of the composite insulator supplier.
5.0 General Requirement:
5.1 Interchangeability- The composite long rod insulators inclusive of the ball & socket connection
shall be standard design suitable for use with the hardware fittings of any make conforming to
relevant IEC standards.
5.2 All surfaces shall be clean, smooth, without cuts, abrasions or projections. No part shall be
subjected to excessive localized pressure. The insulator and metal parts shall be so designed and
manufactured that it shall avoid local corona formation and shall not generate any radio interference
beyond specified limit under the operating conditions.
5.3 The long rod insulators offered shall be suitable for employment of hot line maintenance technique
so that usual hot line operation can be carried out with ease, speed and safety.
5.4 All insulators shall be designed to facilitate cleaning and insulators shall have the minimum
practical number of sheds and grooves. All grooves shall be so proportioned that any dust deposit
can be removed without difficulty either by wiping with a cloth or by remote washing under live
line condition.
5.5 All the materials shall be of latest design and conform to the best modern practices adopted in the
extra high voltage field. Bidders shall offer only such insulators as are guaranteed by him to be
satisfactory and suitable for transmission lines specified and will give continued good service
5.6 The design, manufacturing process and material control at various stages shall be such as to give
maximum working load, highest mobility, best resistance to corrosion, good finish and elimination
of sharp edges and corners to limit corona and radio interference
5.7 The design of the insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part
of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration.
5.8 The core shall be free from cracks and voids which may adversely affect insulator.
8
SP-PI-01-R0
5.9 Weather sheds shall be uniform in quality. They shall be clean, sound, smooth and free from gross
defects and excessive flashing at parting lines.
5.10 End fittings shall be free from cracks, seams, shrinks, air holes and rough edges. End fittings
should be effectively, sealed to prevent moisture ingress, effectiveness of sealing system must be
supported by test documents. All surfaces of the metal parts shall be perfectly smooth with the
projecting points or irregularities which may cause corona.
5.11 All load bearing surfaces shall be smooth and uniform so as to distribute the loading stresses
uniformly.
5.12 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized to give a minimum average coating of zinc
equivalent to 600 gm/sqmm and shall be in accordance with the requirement of ISO:1461 (E) and
shall satisfy the tests mentioned in ISO:1460 (E). The zinc used for galvanizing shall be of purity of
99.95%. The zinc coating shall be uniform, adherent, smooth, reasonably bright continuous and free
from imperfections such as flux, ash rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. The galvanized
metal parts shall be guaranteed to withstand at least six successive dips each lasting for one (1)
minute duration under the standard test. The galvanizing shall be carried out only after any
machining
6.0 Quality Assurance:
Vendor Quality Plan To be submitted for purchaser approval
Inspection Points To be mutually identified & agreed in quality plan
7.0 Testing and Inspection:
7.1 Type Test:
The insulators should be offered type tested from CPRI/ERDA. Type test reports should not be more
than 5 (Five) years old considered from the date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in
CPRI/ERDA, based on ISO/IEC.
On the complete Power frequency voltage withstand test with corona

IEC:383-1993 composite Long Rod control rings/grading ring and arcing horns under wet
Insulator String with condition
Hardware Fittings Switching surge voltage withstand test under wet
condition
9
SP-PI-01-R0
Impulse voltage withstand test under dry condition
Corona and RIV test under dry condition

Mechanical Strength test
Vibration test
Salt-fog pollution withstand test
Dry power frequency voltage test
Sudden load release test
On Composite Insulator
Units (Tests on interfaces Thermal mechanical test
IEC: 61109
and connections of metal Water immersion test
fittings)
Steep front impulse voltage test
Dry power frequency voltage test
Determination of the average failing load of the core

On Composite Insulator
of the assembled unit
Units (Assembled core
load time test)
Control of the slope of the strength time curve of the
insulator
Brittle fracture resistance test
Test of housing, Tracking and erosion test
IEC: 61109 Tests for the Dye penetration test
core material Water diffusion test
Flammability test
Recovery of Hydrophobicity test
Mechanical Load Time test and test of tightness between end firings and insulator
housing
Silicone content test
High Pressure washing test
7.1 Acceptance Test : The following tests shall constitute the Acceptance : -
IS/IEC
Test Description
Reference
IEC : 61109 Verification of dimensions
Verification of tightness of interface between end fittings and insulator housing
and of specified mechanical load
10
SP-PI-01-R0
Tests on interfaces and connections of metal fittings (Tests to be performed on

the same samples in the sequence given below)- i) Dry power frequency voltage
test, ii) Sudden load release test, iii) Thermal mechanical test, iv) Water
immersion test, v) Steep front impulse voltage test, vi) Dry power frequency
voltage test
Galvanizing test (IS:209-1979)

IEC : 60383
Verification of locking system

Recovery of Hydrophobicity
Silicone content test
Note: - 1) Test on interfaces and connection shall be carried out for a lot with qty. minimum 2000 nos.
2) Test for silicon shall be carried out for a lot with qty. minimum 2000 nos.
3) In the event of failure of the sample to satisfy the acceptance test(s) specified above, the
retest procedure shall be as per clause 7.6 of IEC 61109
7.2 Routine Tests: The following tests shall constitute the
1) Visual Inspection as per IEC 61109
2) Mechanical Routine Test as per IEC 61109
7.3 Test During Manufacturing:
1) Chemical analysis of Zinc used for galvanizing.
2) Chemical analysis, mechanical, metallographic test and magnetic particle inspection for
malleable castings.
3) Chemical analysis hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for forging.
4) Tracking and erosion test on insulating material
11
SP-PI-01-R0
Inspection:

SL No. Descriptions
7.3.1 The buyer reserves the right to witness all tests specified on Polymeric Insulators
The buyer reserves the right to inspect Polymeric Insulators at the Seller’s works at any
7.3.2
time prior dispatch, to verify compliance with the specifications
7.3.3 In-process and final inspection call intimation shall be given in advance to purchaser
In the event of any discrepancy in the test report i.e. test reports not acceptable or any type
7.3.4 test (including special/additional test if any) not carried out, same shall be carried out
without any cost implication to BSES before dispatch.
Note:
1) The routine and acceptance tests should be performed on sample chosen at random out of
every lot.
2) Three sets of complete test certificates shall be submitted along with the dispatch documents.
8 Drawing, Data and Manuals:
The seller has to submit:

a) Details sectional drawing of Polymeric Insulators along with
all kind of fittings
To be Submitted along b) Details of accessories and drawings
8.1
with the bid
c) Complete filled GPT and QAP
e) Type Test Certificate from CPRI/ERDA
f) Complete Catalogue and manual
Within 15 days, the seller has to submit four sets of above
8.2
mentioned drawings along with one set soft copy for buyer's
8.3 Submission required a) Inspection and test reports carried out in manufacturer's works
prior to dispatch
b) Test Certificate of all bought out items.
Drawing and Documents
8.4 Standard size paper A0,A1,A2,A3,A4
Size
12
SP-PI-01-R0
No of drawings/
8.5 documents required at As per Annexure A
different stages
9 Shipping, Handling and Site Support:
All insulators shall be packed in suitable PVC/ plastic tubes/any other

suitable packing along with temporary wrap-on shields/shrouds for each
insulator unit. The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand
rough handling during transit, storage at site and subsequent handling in
the field
Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or spacers shall be
9.1 Packing provided to prevent damage or deformation during transit and handling
The items so wound will be grouped as per numbers per packet. The
information like product quantity shall be mentioned on the packets
Purchase order no. with SAP code shall be mentioned clearly
Net weight and gross weight with packet shall be mentioned
Batch no. or lot no shall be mentioned
The seller shall give complete shipping information concerning the gross
9.2 Shipping weight, size of each packing and the seller has to send the materials to
buyer’s preferable store or site.
Manufacturer instruction shall be followed. Detail handling & storage
Handling &
9.3 instruction sheet / manual needs to be furnished before commencement of
Storage
supply.
The seller shall be responsible for any transit damage due to improper
9.4 Transit damage
packing.
10 Progress reporting:
To be submitted for purchaser approval for outline of

10.1 Outline Document production, inspection, testing, packing, dispatch, documentation
programmer.
To be submitted to Purchaser once a month containing
a) Progress on material procurement.
10.2 Detailed Progress report c) Reason for any delay in total program.
13
SP-PI-01-R0
11 Deviations:
Deviations from this Specification shall be stated in writing with the tender by reference to the
Specification clause/GTP/Drawing and a description of the alternative offer. In absence of such a
statement, it will be assumed by the Buyer that the Seller complies fully with this specification.
12 Drawings and Materials Details:
The bidder has to summit drawings along with bid for preliminary acceptance and for final approval
before manufacturing. BRPL may insist trial installation to check dimensions and may suggest
necessary changes if required. BRPL decision in this regard would be final and binding to short listed
vendor without any subsequent commercial liability on purchaser.
12 Marking:
The Following information shall be marked on each cross arm:
12.1 Manufacturer’s name or trade mark
12.2 Year of manufacture
12.3 BSES-BRPL, order number, date & SAP Code number
13 GTP:
Data to be filled by
Sl. No. Descriptions Unit
Manufacturer
1 Name & address of manufacture
2 Weight of single unit Kg
3 Size and designation of ball & socket assembly mm
4 Core diameter mm
5 Tolerance on core diameter ±mm
6 Nominal length (section length) mm
7 Tolerance on Nominal length ±mm
8 Dry arcing distance mm
9 Number of sheds nos
10 Sheds profile (type)
11 Shed spacing mm
12 Sheds profile (regular alternating)
13 Shed diameter mm
14 Tolerance on shed diameter ±mm
15 Minimum creepage distance mm
16 Tolerance on creepage distance ±mm
14
SP-PI-01-R0
17 Guaranteed mechanical strength KN

18 Routine mechanical load KN
19 Materials
a FRP Rod
b Weather sheds with % contents of silicon
c Housing
d End Fitting
e Grading Ring
Minimum thickness of sheath covering over the
20 core mm
21 Power frequency withstand voltage of single unit
a Dry KV (rms)
b Wet KV (rms)
22 Power frequency flashover voltage of single unit
a Dry KV (rms)
b Wet KV (rms)
23 Impulse withstand voltage of single unit (dry)
a Positive KV (peak)
b Negative KV (peak)
24 Impulse flashover voltage of single unit (dry)
a Positive KV (peak)
b Negative KV (peak)
25 Purity of zinc used for galvanizing end fittings %
Number of dips which the end fittings can
26 withstand in standard preece test Nos.
Certified test report of accelerated ageing test of
5000 hours (enclosed) (appendix-C of IEC-
27 61109) Yes/No
28 Drawings Enclosed Yes/No
Annexure-A: Scope of Supply
1.0 The scope of supply shall include following:
1.1 Design, manufacturing, testing at manufacturer works before dispatch, packing, delivery
including unloading and stacking at Buyer’s site/store of Polymeric Insulator including all kind
oh accessories for fixing e.g. fixing clump, hardwires etc as per BOQ and submission of all
documents.
15
SP-PI-01-R0
1.2 BOQ as following-
Purchaser Equipment Material

Sl. No. Location Unit Quantity
Tag No/ SAP no Descriptions
1 e.g. Delhi Nos. e.g. 10
2 e.g. Kolkata Nos. e.g. 10
2.0 Submission of Documents:
For
Approval
Final after
Along with offer after Remarks
approval
award of
contract
Detailed dimensional
cross-sectional drawing 6 copies + 1 soft
3 copies (Typical drgs) 4 copies
along with all kind of copy in CD
accessories for fixing
Type test and
2 copies (Type test and 6 copies + 1 soft
Type test certificates sample Routine
sample Routine Test) copy in CD
test reports
Guaranteed technical 6 copies + 1 soft
3 copies 4 copies
particulars copy in CD
Complete catalogue and 6 copies + 1 soft
1 copy
Manual copy in CD
6 copies + 1 soft
List of sub vendor 3 copies (typical) 4 copies
copy in CD
3.0 Delivery Schedule:

16

TS Nit N0 578

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TS Nit N0 578

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GN101-03-SP-06-02

General Specification .................................................................................................3

Annexure # 1 – DEVIATION REPORT FORMAT......................................................16

S. Reference No. Name of Standard

S. Parameter Details

S. Parameter Details

3.11 Identification All cables shall be identified below the gland at each end, at joint

3.15 Cable Where the cables terminate on overhead line poles or towers located

S. Parameter Details

S. Parameter Details

S. Parameter Details

Annexure # 6 – DRAWINGS ( CABLE TRENCH AND RCC CABLE COVER)

Annexure-7: Barricading and Safety

Annexure # 8 – ROUTE MARKER AND BARRICADING DRAWING

Prepared by Javed Ahmed Rev: 2

Reviewed by Abhinav Srivastava Date: 29.03.2017

Approved by Vijay Panpalia

Volume – I Technical Specification for 66KV Control & Relay Panel

Volume – I Technical Specification for 66KV Control & Relay Panel

2.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY

3.0 CODES & STANDARDS:

4.0 PANEL CONSTRUCTION

Volume – I Technical Specification for 66KV Control & Relay Panel

Volume – I Technical Specification for 66KV Control & Relay Panel

6.0 TERMINAL BLOCKS

Volume – I Technical Specification for 66KV Control & Relay Panel

8.0 MIMIC DIAGRAM

Volume – I Technical Specification for 66KV Control & Relay Panel

Volume – I Technical Specification for 66KV Control & Relay Panel

Volume – I Technical Specification for 66KV Control & Relay Panel

Volume – I Technical Specification for 66KV Control & Relay Panel

12.2.1.5 Transformer Feeder/Panel Relay – 1

Volume – I Technical Specification for 66KV Control & Relay Panel

should also be provided

Sequence of operation of the annunciator shall be as follows:

Alarm Visual Audible

15.0 SELECTOR SWITCHES & PUSH BUTTONS

Volume – I Technical Specification for 66KV Control & Relay Panel

15.1.5 Rotary On/Off Switches For heater/illumination circuit

17.0 TESTING & INSPECTION

Volume – I Technical Specification for 66KV Control & Relay Panel

18.0 DRAWINGS & DATA SUBMISSION

Volume – I Technical Specification for 66KV Control & Relay Panel

18.4.4 Analog Ammeter / Voltmeter AE / Rishabh

20.0 TRAINING AND COMMISSIONING SUPPORT

a) Supervision of Erection, Testing and Commissioning inclusive of all testing equipment/

Volume – I Technical Specification Structural Work

2.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURES

2.3 Minimum thickness of galvanized tower member shall be as follows:

Member Minimum thickness (mm)

Leg members, ground wire 5

2.6 The minimum bolt diameter shall be 16 mm.

Volume – I Technical Specification Structural Work

2.7 Step Bolts

2.8 Design Criteria

e) The girders shall be connected with lattice columns be bolted joints.

Volume – I Technical Specification Structural Work

3.0 DESIGN DRAWINGS, BILL OF MATERIAL & DOCUMENTS

4.0 FABRICATION OF STEEL MEMBERS

5.0 PROTO – ASSEMBLY

Volume – I Technical Specification Structural Work

8.0 FOUNDATION BOLTS

9.0 STABILITY OF STRUCTURES